HPV 900 Series 2 AC/PM Elevator Drive
HPV 900 Series 2 AC/PM
Elevator Drive
Technical Manual
Includes Quick Start Guides
TM7333 rev 08
© 2012 Magnetek Elevator
WARRANTY
Standard products manufactured by the Company are warranted to be free from
defects in workmanship and material for a period of one year from the date of
shipment, and any products which are defective in workmanship or material will be
repaired or replaced, at the Company’s option, at no charge to the Buyer. Final
determination as to whether a product is actually defective rests with the Company.
The obligation of the Company hereunder shall be limited solely to repair or replace,
at the Company’s discretion, products that fall within the foregoing limitations, and
shall be conditioned upon receipt by the Company of written notice of any alleged
defects or deficiency promptly after discovery and within the warranty period, and in
the case of components or units purchased by the Company, the obligation of the
Company shall not exceed the settlement that the Company is able to obtain from the
supplier thereof. No products shall be returned to the Company without its prior
consent. Products which the company consents to have returned shall be shipped
prepaid f.o.b. the Company factory. The Company cannot assume responsibility or
accept invoices for unauthorized repairs to its components, even though defective.
The life of the products the Company depends, to a large extent, upon type of usage
thereof and THE COMPANY MAKES NO WARRANTY AS TO FITNESS OF ITS
PRODUCTS FOR THE SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS BY THE BUYER NOR AS TO
PERIOD OF SERVICE UNLESS THE COMPANY SPECIFICALLY AGREES
OTHERWISE IN WRITING AFTER PROPOSED USAGE HAS BEEN MADE KNOWN
TO IT.
This warranty does not apply to experimental products for which no warranty is made
or given and Buyer waives any claim thereto.
THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT LIMITED TO, ANY
WARRANTY OF MECHANTIBILITY OR OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND BUYER HEREBY WAIVES ANY AND ALL CLAIMS THEREFORE.
LIMITATIONS IN NO EVENT SHALL MAGNETEK BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF PROFIT,
OF LIABILITY INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES WHETHER
ARISING OUT OF WARRANTY, BREACH OF CONTRACT OR TORT.
HPV 900 S2 and Series 2 is a trademark of Magnetek, Inc.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic, or
mechanical including photocopying, recording, taping, or information storage and retrieval systems - without written permission
of the publisher.
 2012 Magnetek, Inc.
IMPORTANT
Grounding Considerations
It is very important to make proper ground connections to the drive. The drive has a common
ground bus terminal connection. All grounds need to land at this common point including
building, motor, transformer, and filter grounds. This will limit the impedance between the
grounds and noise will be channeled back to building ground. This improves the performance
of the drive.
CLOSED-LOOP QUICK START-UP GUIDE
NOTE: This quick start-up guide just outlines the general parameters that should be changed / verified
when a drive is installed with information that are readily available. The drive will not run if only these
parameters are set. Because different controller manufacturers have different interfaces, it is
recommended that the parameters in the drive be set to what is recommended by the elevator
controller in their technical manual.
Closed-Loop Operation Set-up
1) Enter / verify that the drive is set to run in Closed-Loop in Drive Mode (U9)
Motor Parameter Set-up
2) Select one of the two default motors (either 4 or 6 pole) for the MOTOR ID (A5) parameter (or
select a valid motor ID, if available).
Synchronous Rated motor
Number of
Enter / verify the following from the motor’s
speed
Speed (rpm) motor poles
nameplate:
1800
1797 - 1495
4
 Motor HP or KW rating (RATED MTR
1200
1198 – 997
6
POWER(A5))
900
898 – 748
8
 Motor Voltage (RATED MTR VOLTS(A5))
720
719 - 598
10
 Motor Excitation Frequency in Hz (RATED
Table 1 CL: Synchronous/Asynchronous Motor Speeds
EXCIT FREQ(A5))
& Motor Poles Reference for 60Hz
 Rated Motor current (RATED MOTOR
CURR(A5))
 Number of Motor Poles (MOTOR POLES(A5))
 Rated Motor Speed at full load in RPM (RATED MTR SPEED(A5))
Note: The rated motor rpm must be full load speed.
If synchronous speed is given, the motor rated rpm
can be estimated by:
 97.5% of synchronous speed for Nema type B
motor design
 94% of synchronous speed for Nema type D
motor design
Synchronous
speed
1500
1000
750
600
Rated motor
Speed (rpm)
1497 - 1195
998 - 797
748 - 598
599 - 478
Number of
motor poles
4
6
8
10
Table 2 CL: Synchronous/Asynchronous Motor Speeds
& Motor Poles Reference for 50Hz
3) Use the default value for Stator Resistance
(STATOR RESIST(A5)) of 3.5% for 4 pole
machines and 1.5% for all other poles.
NOTE: if you are experiencing operation issues, the
stator resistance can be measured, and calculated
using the following formula.

measured resistance across motor windings - meter resistance
 100
2 x BASE IMPEDANCE (D2)
Encoder Set-up
4) Verify the encoder has been selected and installed in accordance with the following:
Electrical interference and mechanical speed modulations are common problems that can result in
improper speed feedback getting to the drive. To help avoid these common problems, the
following electrical and mechanical considerations are suggested.
IMPORTANT- Proper encoder speed feedback is essential for a drive to provide proper motor
control.
i
Electrical Considerations
 If possible, insulate both the encoder case and shaft from the motor.
 Use twisted pair cable with shield tied to chassis ground at drive end
 Use limited slew rate differential line drivers.
 Do not allow capacitors from internal encoder electronics to case.
 Do not exceed the operating specification of the encoder/drive.
 Use the proper encoder supply voltage and use the highest possible voltage available. (i.e.
12VDC is preferred because less susceptible to noise)
Mechanical Considerations
 Use direct motor mounting without couplings where possible.
 Use hub or hollow shaft encoder with concentric motor stub shaft.
 If possible, use a mechanical protective cover for exposed encoders.
NOTE: Refer to Encoder Mounting on page 186 for illustrations on mounting encoder
5) Enter / verify the encoder pulses entered in the ENCODER PULSES (A1) parameter matches the
encoder’s nameplate.
Hoistway Parameter Set-up
6) Enter / verify the hoistway parameters:
 CONTRACT CAR SPD (A1) parameter should be the elevator contract speed in ft/min.
 CONTRACT MTR SPD (A1) parameter should be set to a RPM that will make the elevator
travel at desired car speed (measured with hand tachometer).
NOTE: The above two parameters are utilized by the drive for many purposes regarding speed
control of the lift, therefore its important these are set correctly.
Low speed inspection mode
7) Run the drive in low speed inspection mode and…
 Start with default values for INERTIA (A1) and % NO LOAD CURR (A5) parameters.
 Verify encoder polarity… the motor phasing should match the encoder phasing. If you
experience ENCODER FAULT/ HIT TRQ LIM alarm the phasing may be incorrect -this can be
reversed using ENCODER CONNECT(C1)
 Verify proper hoistway direction…can be reversed with the MOTOR ROTATION (C1)
parameter.
Key Drive Parameters
NOTE: Key paramters that are not listed below are parameters that are set for drive/controller interface
in the C0 menu and A2 and A3 sub menus
A1- Drive Menu
Parameter
CONTRACT CAR SPD
Description
Elevator contract speed
Default
Units
Suggested Adjustment
400.0
fpm
0.0
m/s
Adjust to speed the installation is rated
to run at.
1130.0
CONTRACT MTR SPD
Motor speed at elevator contract speed
rpm
0.0
RESPONSE
Sensitivity of the speed regulator
ii
10.0
rad/sec
Adjust this value to ensure the actual
running speed of the car matches the
parameter above - If the car is traveling
too fast then reduce this value, if too
slow then increase it.
Set to 20 to improve the drive response
to changes in speed reference. If the
motor current and speed becomes
unstable, reduce however if the value is
too small, the response will be sluggish.
Parameter
Description
Default
Units
Suggested Adjustment
Determines the system inertia in terms
of the time it takes the elevator to
accelerate to contract speed. If the car
is light, the value will be smaller than the
default and vice versa if the car is
heavy.
INERTIA
System inertia
2.00
sec
ENCODER PULSES
Encoder counts per revolution
1024
PPR
Obtain the Encoder PPR from the
encoder nameplate and enter in this
parameter.
MTR TORQUE LIMIT
Motoring Torque Limit. Units in percent of
rated torque. Note: The Torque Limit LED
will be lit once the limit defined by this
parameter is reached.
200.0
%
Determines the maximum torque
allowed when in the motoring mode.
This is generally left at the default
setting
GAIN REDUCE MULT
Percentage of response of the speed
regulator used when in the low gain mode
100
%
GAIN CHNG LEVEL
Speed level to change to low gain mode
(only with internal gain switch)
100.0
% rated
speed
When the RESPONSE is high, the
resonant characteristics of the ropes
can cause car vibration. This parameter
determines the gain to be used at higher
speeds.
Determines the speed threshold at
which the gain specified by the GAIN
REDUCE MULT is effective.
Table 3 CL: Important paramters in A1 menu to set/check when seting up a drive in closed-loop
Power Convert A4
Parameter
Description
Default
INPUT L-L VOLTS
Nominal line-line AC
input Voltage, RMS
0
UV ALARM LEVEL
Voltage level for
undervoltage alarm
90
UV FAULT LEVEL
Voltage level for
undervoltage fault
80
PWM FREQUENCY
Carrier frequency
10.0
Units
Volts
Suggested Adjustment
Adjust to match the voltage across R, S, and T of the drive.
The drive uses this value for its undervoltage alarm and fault
detection circuit
%
nominal
dc bus
%
nominal
dc bus
kHz
Set to 80%
Set to 70 %
It should not be necessary to change this value from 10kHz.
However it can be useful to reduce this frequency to try to
determine if a vibration is electrically induced or otherwise
Table 4 CL: Important parameters in A4 menu to set/check when seting up a drive in closed-loop
Motor A5
Parameter
Description
MOTOR ID
Motor Identification
RATED MTR
POWER
Rated motor output
power
RATED MTR
VOLTS
RATED EXCIT
FREQ
Rated motor terminal
RMS voltage
Rated excitation
frequency
RATED MOTOR
CURR
Default
Units
Suggested Adjustment
none
Used to initialize the drive. Display will change to block capital letters
when initialized. Enter either 4 or 6 pole motor.
0
HP
KW
Set to motor HP/kW rating as per the motor nameplate
0
Volts
Set to motor voltage rating as per the motor nameplate
0
Hz
Set to motor frequency rating as per the motor nameplate
Rated motor current
0
Amps
Set to motor nameplate rated current
MOTOR POLES
Motor poles
4
none
Adjust to set number of motor poles
RATED MTR
SPEED
Rated motor speed at
full load
0
RPM
Adjust to motor nameplate value
STATOR
LEAKAGE X
Stator leakage
reactance
Per ID
% base
Z
Leave at default setting unless acoustic motor noise is high. If it is
then initially halve the default settings and observe any change. If
iii
Parameter
ROTOR
LEAKAGE X
Description
Default
Rotor leakage
reactance
Per ID
Units
% base
Z
Suggested Adjustment
there is no improvement then reset back to default values.
Table 5 CL: Important paramters in A5 menu to set/check when seting up a drive in closed-loop
Basics U9
Parameter
Description
Default
Choices
DRIVE MODE
Drive operation
Closed
Loop
Open Loop
Closed Loop
PM
Suggested Adjustment
Leave at default unless a test is need to perform in
Open Loop to validate if the encoder is working.
Table 6 CL: Important parameter in U9 menu to set/check when seting up a drive in closed-loop
iv
OPEN-LOOP QUICK START-UP GUIDE
NOTE: This quick start-up guide just outlines the general parameters that should be changed / verified
when a drive is installed with information that are readily available. The drive will not run if only these
parameters are set. Because different controller manufacturers have different interfaces, it is
recommended that the parameters in the drive be set to what is recommended by the elevator
controller in their technical manual.
Open-Loop Operation Set-up
1) Enter / verify that the drive is set to run in Open-Loop in Drive Mode (U9)
Motor Parameter Set-up
Parameter
motor mid volts
(A5)
motor mid freq
(A5)
motor min volts
(A5)
motor min freq
(A5)
2) Firstly select one of the default motors for
the MOTOR ID (A5) parameter, as a result
typical V/F patterns are loaded via the
MOTOR ID (A5) a typical example is shown
in Table 1 OL.
It is possible to optimize the V/F pattern if
required however often our default values
will suit most motors and installations.
Enter / verify the following from the motor’s
nameplate:
 Motor HP or KW rating (RATED MTR
POWER(A5))
 Motor Voltage (RATED MTR
VOLTS(A5))
 Motor Excitation Frequency in Hz
(RATED EXCIT FREQ(A5))
 Rated Motor Current (RATED MOTOR
CURR(A5))
 Number of Motor Poles (MOTOR
POLES(A5))
 Rated Motor Speed at full load in RPM
(RATED MTR SPEED (A5))
4 & 6 poles
400v
4 & 6 poles
200V
28.0V
14.0V
3.0Hz
3.0Hz
9.0V
4.0V
1.0Hz
1.0Hz
Table 1 OL: V/Hz patterns via Motor ID
Synchronous
speed
1800
Rated motor
Speed (rpm)
1797 - 1495
Number of
motor poles
4
1200
1198 – 997
6
900
898 – 748
8
720
719 - 598
10
Table 2 OL: Synchronous/Asynchronous Motor Speeds &
Motor Poles Reference for 60Hz
Note: The rated motor rpm must be full load
speed. If synchronous speed is given, the motor
rated rpm can be estimated by:
 97.5% of synchronous speed for Nema type
B motor design
 94% of synchronous speed for Nema type
D motor design
Synchronous
speed
1500
Rated motor
Speed (rpm)
1497 - 1195
Number of
motor poles
4
1000
998 - 797
6
750
748 - 598
8
600
599 - 478
10
Table 3 OL: Synchronous/Asynchronous Motor Speeds &
Motor Poles Reference for 50Hz
3) Use the default value for Stator Resistance (STATOR RESIST(A5)) of 3.5% for 4 pole machines
and 1.5% for all other motors.
NOTE: if you are experiencing operation issues, the
stator resistance can be measured, and calculated
using the following formula.
v

measured resistance across motor windings - meter resistance
 100
2 x BASE IMPEDANCE (D2)
Hoistway Parameter Set-up
4) Enter / verify the hoistway parameters:
 CONTRACT CAR SPD (A1) parameter should be the elevator contract speed in m/s.
 CONTRACT MTR SPD (A1) parameter should be set to a RPM that will make the elevator
travel at desired car speed (measured with hand tachometer)
NOTE: The above two parameters are utilized by the drive for many purposes regarding the control of
the lift, therefore it’s important these are set correctly.
Key Drive Parameters
A1- Drive Menu
Parameter
Description
CONTRACT CAR SPD
Elevator contract speed
Default
Units
Suggested Adjustment
400.0
fpm
0.0
m/s
Adjust to speed the installation is rated
to run at.
1130.0
CONTRACT MTR SPD
Motor speed at elevator contract speed
rpm
0.0
Adjust this value to ensure the actual
running speed of the car matches the
parameter above - If the car is traveling
too fast then reduce this value, if too
slow then increase it.
Obtain the Encoder PPR from the
encoder nameplate and enter in this
parameter.
Determines the maximum torque
allowed when in the motoring mode.
This is generally left at the default
setting
ENCODER PULSES
Encoder counts per revolution
1024
PPR
MTR TORQUE LIMIT
Motoring Torque Limit. Units in percent of
rated torque. Note: The Torque Limit LED
will be lit once the limit defined by this
parameter is reached.
200.0
%
DC START LEVEL
DC injection current to hold the motor
shaft in fixed position after picking brakes.
80
%
Enter / verify that it is set at default until
the Open-Loop Performance
Adjustments on page 157 dictates a
different number
DC STOP LEVEL
DC injection current to hold the motor
shaft in fixed position before brakes drop.
%
Enter / verify that it is set at default until
the Open-Loop Performance
Adjustments on page 157 dictates a
different number
DC STOP FREQ
Frequency that DC injection current starts
when motor is decelerating
0.5
Hz
Enter / verify that it is set at default until
the Open-Loop Performance
Adjustments on page 157 dictates a
different number
DC START TIME
Time DC injection current is applied after
a run command to accelerating motor
1.00
sec
DC STOP TIME
Time DC injection current is applied
during DC STOP LEVEL
1.00
sec
SLIP COMP TIME
Adjust for slip compensation response
and stability when motor is loaded
1.50
sec
SLIP COMP GAIN
Multiplier of motor rated slip at torque
1.00
none
TORQ BOOST TIME
Adjust for torque compensation response
and stablitity
0.05
sec
vi
50
Enter / verify that it is set at default until
the Open-Loop Performance
Adjustments on page 157 dictates a
different number
Enter / verify that it is set at default until
the Open-Loop Performance
Adjustments on page 157 dictates a
different number
Enter / verify that it is set at default until
the Open-Loop Performance
Adjustments on page 157 dictates a
different number
Enter / verify that it is set at default until
the Open-Loop Performance
Adjustments on page 157 dictates a
different number
Enter / verify that it is set at default until
the Open-Loop Performance
Adjustments on page 157 dictates a
different number
Parameter
Description
Default
Units
TORQ BOOST GAIN
Torque boost responsivness
0.00
none
Suggested Adjustment
Enter / verify that it is set at default until
the Open-Loop Performance
Adjustments on page 157 dictates a
different number
Table 4 OL: Important parameters in A1 menu to set/check when seting up a drive in open-loop
Power Convert A4
Parameter
Description
Default
Units
INPUT L-L VOLTS
Nominal line-line AC
input Voltage, RMS
0
UV ALARM LEVEL
Voltage level for
undervoltage alarm
90
UV FAULT LEVEL
Voltage level for
undervoltage fault
80
PWM FREQUENCY
Carrier frequency
10.0
kHz
ILIMIT INTEG GAIN
Stall prevention
response
1.00
none
HUNT PREV GAIN
Torque response of
hunt prevention
1.00
none
HUNT PREV TIME
Amount of time for
hunt prevention
function
0.20
sec
Volts
Suggested Adjustment
Adjust to match the voltage across R, S, and T of the drive.
The drive uses this value for its undervoltage alarm and fault
detection circuit
%
nominal
dc bus
%
nominal
dc bus
Set to 80%
Set to 70 %
It should not be necessary to change this value from 10kHz.
However it can be useful to reduce this frequency to try to
determine if a vibration is electrically induced or otherwise
Enter / verify that it is set at default until the Open-Loop
Performance Adjustments on page 157 dictates a different
number
Enter / verify that it is set at default until the Open-Loop
Performance Adjustments on page 157 dictates a different
number
Enter / verify that it is set at default until the Open-Loop
Performance Adjustments on page 157 dictates a different
number
Table 5 OL: Important parameters in A4 menu to set/check when seting up a drive in open-loop
Motor A5
Parameter
Description
Default
Units
Suggested Adjustment
none
Used to initialize the drive. Display will change to block capital letters
when initialized. Enter either 4 or 6 pole motor.
0
HP
KW
Set to motor HP/kW rating as per the motor nameplate
0
Volts
Set to motor voltage rating as per the motor nameplate
0
Hz
Set to motor frequency rating as per the motor nameplate
Rated motor current
0
Amps
Set to motor nameplate rated current
MOTOR POLES
Motor poles
4
none
Adjust to set number of motor poles
RATED MTR
SPEED
Rated motor speed at
full load
0
RPM
Adjust to motor nameplate value
MOTOR MIN
VOLTS
Voltage at minimum
frequency
Per ID
Volts
Enter / verify that it is set at default until the Open-Loop Performance
Adjustments on page 157 dictates a different number
MOTOR MIN
FREQ
Minimum frequency
1
Hz
Enter / verify that it is set at default until the Open-Loop Performance
Adjustments on page 157 dictates a different number
MOTOR MID
VOLTS
Voltage at middle
frequency
Per ID
Volts
Enter / verify that it is set at default until the Open-Loop Performance
Adjustments on page 157 dictates a different number
MOTOR MID
FREQ
Middle frequency
3.0
Hz
Enter / verify that it is set at default until the Open-Loop Performance
Adjustments on page 157 dictates a different number
MOTOR ID
Motor Identification
RATED MTR
POWER
Rated motor output
power
RATED MTR
VOLTS
RATED EXCIT
FREQ
Rated motor terminal
RMS voltage
Rated excitation
frequency
RATED MOTOR
CURR
Table 6 OL: Important parameters in A5 menu to set/check when seting up a drive in open-loop
vii
Basics U9
Parameter
Description
Default
Choices
DRIVE MODE
Drive operation
Closed
Loop
Open Loop
Closed Loop
PM
Suggested Adjustment
Adjust to Open-Loop so drive can run motor without an
encoder
Table 7 OL: Important parameter in U9 menu to set/check when seting up a drive in open-loop
viii
PM QUICK START-UP GUIDE
NOTE: This quick start-up guide just outlines the general parameters that should be changed / verified
when a drive is installed with information that are readily available. The drive will not run if only these
parameters are set. Because different controller manufacturers have different interfaces, it is
recommended that the parameters in the drive be set to what is recommended by the elevator
controller in their technical manual.
PM Operation Set-up
1) Enter / verify that the drive is set to run in PM in Drive Mode (U9)
Encoder Set-up
2) Electrical interference and mechanical speed modulations are
common problems that can result in improper speed feedback getting
to the drive. To help avoid these common problems, the following
electrical and mechanical considerations are suggested.




Ensure that the motor power cabling is screened and correctly
glanded where the braid is clamped within the gland and
earthed through it (as is done with armoured cable) – twisting
the screen together and terminating it to the motor frame is
not recommended procedure.
Ensure that encoder cable routing is away from the motor
cable.
Ensure the encoder screen is clamped at the drive end in the
correct 360degree ‘P’ Clamp – again twisting braid together
and connecting it to earth is not recommended.
After stripping off the encoder cable insulation for terminating
in the drive, keep the tails as short as possible - we would
recommend no more than 3.94in (100mm) is exposed.
Table 1 PM shows the correct terminations for the HPV900S2
with the optional EnDat board and also the standard Heidenhain &
Ziehl cable colour codes – if you are unsure of the correct wire
colours please refer to the encoder/motor suppliers documentation and if required contact
them for clarification prior to powering up the equipment – failure to do this may result in
damage to the encoder, the drive or both! You may wish to note your encoder colours in
the ‘Othercolumn for future reference.
ix
Encoder
Cable Colour
HPV900 S2
Termination
Heidenhain
Ziehl
A/
A-
Yellow & Black
Red & Blue
A
A+
Green & Black
Grey & Pink
B/
B-
Red & Black
Red
B
B+
Blue & Black
Blue
Data/
DAT-
Pink
Brown
Data
DAT+
Grey
White
Clock/
CLK-
Yellow
Black
Other
Clock
CLK+
Violet
Violet
0V com
COM
White
Pink
0V Sense (if present)
SENGreen & White
Yellow
+5V
+5V
Brown
Grey
+5V Sense (if present)
SEN+
Green & Blue
Green
Table 1 PM: Connection and colour scheme of recommended absolute encoders
Motor Parameter Set-up
3) Select the PM default motor for the Motor ID (A5)
parameter.
Synchronous
speed at 60Hz
1800
Synchronous
speed at 50Hz
1500
Number of
motor poles
4
1200
1000
6
Enter / verify the following from the motor’s
900
750
nameplate:
 Motor HP or KW rating (RATED MTR
720
600
POWER(A5))
Table 2 PM: Synchronous motor speeds
 Motor Voltage (RATED MTR VOLTS(A5))
 Rated Motor current (RATED MOTOR CURR(A5))
 Number of Motor Poles (MOTOR POLES(A5))
 Rated Motor Speed at full load in RPM (RATED MTR SPEED(A5))
8
10
NOTE: Some motors do not quote the number of motor poles
however this can be simply calculated using this formula:
120 x Rated Motor Frequency
Rated Motor Speed
NOTE: Motor Frequency is not directly entered in the drive however useful to note to make the
above calculation if required.
In some instances the data on the motor data plate may not be 100% accurate (if the machine
isn’t ‘made to order’ they may quote the motors maximum values as opposed to what is required
for your installation) – if this is the case the ‘calculated’ motor data that matches your installation
will have to be obtained from the motor manufacturer and entered in the drive. This ‘Calculated’
data may have been used to select the drive and the information on the data plate may be beyond
the rating of the drive. It is also important to verify and adjust the CONTRACT MOTOR SPEED
parameter in the A1 Menu of the drive at this stage.
4) Enter / verify the following encoder informations
 Encoder Pulses (A1) should be set to encoder pulses on the encoder nameplate.
 Serial Cnts/Rev (A1) should be set to serial counts on encoder
 Encoder Select (C1) should be set according to the type of encoder that is being used.
x
Hoistway Parameter Set-up
5) Enter / verify the hoistway parameters:
 CONTRACT CAR SPD (A1) parameter should be the elevator contract speed in ft/min.
 CONTRACT MTR SPD (A1) parameter should be set to a RPM that will make the elevator
travel at desired car speed (measured with hand tachometer).
NOTE: The above two parameters are utilized by the drive for many purposes regarding speed
control of the lift, therefore its important these are set correctly.
Encoder Alignment
6) There are multiple ways to gather the encoder angle alignment, some motor manufacturers ‘pre
set’ this to a default value to prevent any need for a motor alignment – if you have this information
you can enter it in the drive, if you do not know this skip to option 2
OPTION 1 – Predetermined Encoder angle offset

Clear any active faults in the drive in the F1 menu (and verify they have cleared)

Scroll to U10 menu – ROTOR ALIGNMENT and change the parameter ALIGNMENT
from DISABLED to ENABLED

Scroll to A5 menu and to the parameter ENCODER ANG OFST press enter and manually
enter the ‘known’ offset value – the motor should then be able to run – attempt this on test
controls.
If the rotor alignment is not known as is the case on the majority of motors/encoders you will
have to perform a physical alignment. The preferred way of doing this is a rotating alignment
under no load (before ropes are fitted or with the ropes lifted and clear of the sheave) if
your ropes are already fitted or it’s an existing installation skip to option 3.
OPTION 2 – Rotating alignment

Clear any active faults in the drive in the F1 menu (and verify they have cleared)

Scroll to U10 menu – ROTOR ALIGNMENT and change the parameter ALIGNMENT
from DISABLED to ENABLED

Also in the U10 alignment menu ensure the parameter ALIGNMENT METHOD is set to
OPEN LOOP

Next change the parameter BEGIN ALIGNMENT to ON RUN

The drive is now ready for alignment, so simply press and hold your RUN, RUN UP, or
RUN DOWN buttons and you should see the brake lift, the motor should rotate for about 4
seconds smoothly then stop on its own accord – its important that the test buttons remain
fully pressed for the duration of the tune, if the buttons are released for any reason you
will need to restart this whole procedure. When the motor has stopped and the run LED
on the drives operator has extinguished you may release your buttons
xi

Assuming this went successfully the drive will have established the encoders position
relative to the motor poles and automatically saved this value, it can be checked in the
drives A5 menu (parameter ENCODER ANG OFST), and also attempt to run on
inspection control to verify.
NOTE: If drive ENCODER ANG OFST is set to a number other than 30000, then the
alignment was most likely performed

If this procedure didn’t complete successfully and a fault was displayed, please refer to
the fault section of this supplement or the drives technical manual for diagnostic
information
Option 3 – Static alignment
If it is not possible to perform a rotating alignment the encoder angle offset can be obtained by
performing a ‘static’ alignment where the brake is not lifted.
To perform this:
 Clear any active faults in the drive in the F1 menu (and verify they have cleared)

Scroll to U10 menu – ROTOR ALIGNMENT and change the parameter ALIGNMENT
from DISABLED to ENABLED

Also in the U10 alignment menu ensure the parameter ALIGNMENT METHOD is set to
AUTO ALIGN
Next change the parameter BEGIN ALIGNMENT to ON RUN

The drive is now ready for alignment, so simply press and hold your RUN, RUN UP, or
RUN DOWN buttons. You should see the run LED on the drive illuminate and the motor
will ‘buzz’, the brake will not lift however. It will only take a couple of seconds and when
completed the RUN LED on the drives operator will extinguish and you may release your
buttons.

Assuming this went successfully the drive will have established the encoders position
relative to the motor poles, this value can be checked in the drives A5 menu (parameter
ENCODER ANG OFFST). The procedure should be run 5 times. The value should be
consistant, if not check for proper grounding. You are then able to attempt to run on
inspection control to verify.

If this procedure didn’t complete successfully and a fault was displayed, please refer to
the fault section of this supplement or the drives technical manual for diagnostic
information
Step 4 – Motor Auto Tune
7) After the encoder angle offset is obtained and as a final optimisation procedure, it is possible to
gather some further motor characteristics from the motor as part of an ‘AutoTune’
In this test the A5 Parameters D AXIS INDUCTANCE, Q AXIS INDUCTANCE & STATOR
RESISTANCE are obtained and updated automatically
To perform this:
 Clear any active faults in the drive in the F1 menu (and verify they have cleared)
xii

Scroll to U11 (U12 on the HPV900S2) menu – AUTOTUNE SEL and change the
parameter AUTOTUNE SELECT to ON RUN

The drive is now ready for Auto Tune, so simply press and hold your RUN, RUN UP, or
RUN DOWN buttons. You should see the run LED on the drive illuminate and the motor
will ‘buzz’, the brake will not lift however. It will only take a couple of seconds and when
completed the RUN LED on the drives operator will extinguish and you may release your
buttons.

The values obtained from this Auto Tune will be automatically saved and can be viewed
in the A5 Menu
Step 5 – Fine Tune
8) Assuming the above steps have been carried out in full, on most occasions the alignment values
obtained will give near perfect alignment results, however if you observe higher than expected
motor current, vibrations or encoder related trips we do have a ‘fine tune procedure’ which can be
used to either diagnose if the encoder alignment is correct or assist with correcting it if it is found
not to be correct. This procedure is rarely required, however if you do find an application where
you would like to perform it a step by step guide can be found in Fine Tune Alignment Procedure
on page 154.
Key Drive Parameters
A1- Drive Menu
Parameter
Description
CONTRACT CAR SPD
Default
Units
Suggested Adjustment
400.0
fpm
0.0
m/s
Adjust to speed the installation is rated
to run at.
Elevator contract speed
1130.0
CONTRACT MTR SPD
Motor speed at elevator contract speed
rpm
0.0
RESPONSE
Sensitivity of the speed regulator
10.0
rad/sec
INERTIA
System inertia
2.00
sec
ENCODER PULSES
Encoder counts per revolution
1024
PPR
SERIAL CNTS/REV
Encoder position counts per revolution
8192
none
MTR TORQUE LIMIT
Motoring Torque Limit. Units in percent of
rated torque. Note: The Torque Limit LED
will be lit once the limit defined by this
parameter is reached.
200.0
%
Adjust this value to ensure the actual
running speed of the car matches the
parameter above - If the car is traveling
too fast then reduce this value, if too
slow then increase it.
Set to 20 to improve the drive response
to changes in speed reference. If the
motor current and speed becomes
unstable, reduce however if the value is
too small, the response will be sluggish.
Determines the system inertia in terms
of the time it takes the elevator to
accelerate to contract speed. If the car
is light, the value will be smaller than the
default and vice versa if the car is
heavy.
Obtain the Encoder PPR from the
encoder nameplate and enter in this
parameter.
Obtain the Encoder serial cnts/rev from
encoder nameplate and enter in this
parameter.
Determines the maximum torque
allowed when in the motoring mode.
This is generally left at the default
setting
Table 3 PM: Important parameters in A1 menu to set/check when seting up a drive in PM mode
Power Convert A4
Parameter
Description
Default
Units
xiii
Suggested Adjustment
Parameter
Description
Default
INPUT L-L VOLTS
Nominal line-line AC
input Voltage, RMS
0
UV ALARM LEVEL
Voltage level for
undervoltage alarm
90
UV FAULT LEVEL
Voltage level for
undervoltage fault
80
PWM FREQUENCY
Carrier frequency
10.0
kHz
It should not be necessary to change this value from 10kHz.
However it can be useful to reduce this frequency to try to
determine if a vibration is electrically induced or otherwise
0.00
none
Enter / verify that it should be set to default.
0.700
none
Enter / verify that it should be set to default. If audible motor
noise is heard, change this parameter to 0.350.
1.00
none
Enter / verify that it should be set to default. If audible motor
noise is heard, change this parameter to 0.5
0.00
none
Enter / verify that it should be set to default.
0.700
none
Enter / verify that it should be set to default. If audible motor
noise is heard, change this parameter to 0.350
1.00
none
Enter / verify that it should be set to default. If audible motor
noise is heard, change this parameter to 0.5
Differential gain for
current regulator flux
generation
Proportional gain for
current regulator flux
generation
Integral gain for the
current regulator flux
generation
Differential gain for
the current regulation
of motor torque
Proportional gain for
the current regulator
torque generation
Integeral gain for the
current regulator
torque generation
ID REG DIFF GAIN
ID REG PROP GAIN
ID REG INTG GAIN
IQ REG DIFF GAIN
IQ REG PROP GAIN
IQ REG INTG GAIN
Units
Volts
Suggested Adjustment
Adjust to match the voltage across R, S, and T of the drive.
The drive uses this value for its undervoltage alarm and fault
detection circuit
%
nominal
dc bus
%
nominal
dc bus
Set to 80%
Set to 70 %
Table 4 PM: Important parameters in A4 menu to set/check when seting up a drive in PM mode
Motor A5
Parameter
Description
Default
Units
none
HP
KW
Suggested Adjustment
MOTOR ID
Motor Identification
RATED MTR
POWER
Rated motor output
power
Used to initialize the drive. Enter PM.
0
RATED MTR
VOLTS
Rated motor terminal
RMS voltage
0
Volts
Set to motor voltage rating as per the motor nameplate
RATED MOTOR
CURR
Rated motor current
0
Amps
Set to motor nameplate rated current
MOTOR POLES
Motor poles
4
none
Adjust to number of motor poles
RATED MTR
SPEED
Rated motor speed at
full load
0
RPM
Adjust to motor nameplate value
ENCODER
ANG OFST
Encoder angle
associated with motor
pole
30000
none
Adjust to either known angle or allow drive to measure with rotor
alignment
Set to motor HP/kW rating as per the motor nameplate
Table 5 PM: Important parameters in A5 menu to set/check when seting up a drive in PM mode
User Switches C1
Parameter
Description
Default
ENCODER SELECT
Encoder type
incremental
Choices
endat
incremental
Table 6 PM: Important parameter in C1 menu to set/check when seting up a drive in PM mode
xiv
Suggested Adjustment
Adjust to encoder type being used
Basics U9
Parameter
Description
Default
Choices
DRIVE MODE
Drive operation
Closed
Loop
Open Loop
Closed Loop
PM
Suggested Adjustment
Adjust to PM so drive can run a PM motor.
Table 7 PM: Important parameter in U9 menu to set/check when seting up a drive in PM mode
Rotor Align U10
Parameter
Description
Default
Choices
Suggested Adjustment
ALIGNMENT
Allow alignment to be
performed
disable
enable
disable
Adjust to enable only when trying to change
ENCODER ANG OFST (A5)
BEGIN ALIGNMENT
Determine when to
perform alignment
no
yes
on run
no
Adjust to on run when trying to obtain ENCODER ANG
OFST (A5)
ALIGNMENT METHOD
How alignment will be
performed
open
loop
open loop
auto align
Adjust to open when shaft of motor will be moving and
auto align when it will be kept still. Detail is provided on
Encoder Align on page x and Rotor Alignment
Procedure on page 148
Table 8 PM: Important parameter in U10 menu to set/check when seting up a drive in PM mode
Autotune Sel U12
Parameter
Description
Default
Choices
AUTOTUNE SELECT
Allow autotune to run
disable
disable
on run
yes
Suggested Adjustment
Adjust to PM so drive can run a PM motor.
Table 9 PM: Important parameter in U12 menu to set/check when seting up a drive in PM mode
If vibration occurs:
1.) Check grounds
2.) Do not set Response (A1) higher than 10 and lower inertia (A1) to below .5
3.) Set Gain Reduce Multiplier (A1) and Gain Changes (A1) level both to 50%
4.) Set Notch Filter Frequency (A1) to 15 HZ and Depth (A1) to 20
xv
Table of Contents
HPV 900 Series 2 Drive Ratings ........................................................................................................... 3 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 14 Drive Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 14 Drive Derating ................................................................................................................................. 15 Drive Model Number ....................................................................................................................... 15 Real Time Clock Setup ................................................................................................................... 17 Terminals .............................................................................................................................................. 18 Interconnections.................................................................................................................................. 24 Parameters ........................................................................................................................................... 35 Menus ............................................................................................................................................. 37 Adjust A0 Menu ................................................................................................................................... 44 Drive A1 Submenu .......................................................................................................................... 44 S-Curves A2 Submenu ................................................................................................................... 64 Multistep Ref A3 Submenu ............................................................................................................. 66 Power Convert A4 Submenu .......................................................................................................... 69 Motor A5 Submenu ......................................................................................................................... 75 Configure C0 Menu.............................................................................................................................. 81 User Switches C1 Submenu ........................................................................................................... 81 Logic Inputs C2 Submenu............................................................................................................... 97 Logic Outputs C3 Submenu ............................................................................................................ 99 Analog Outputs C4 Submenu ....................................................................................................... 102 Display D0 Menu ................................................................................................................................ 103 Elevator Data D1 Submenu .......................................................................................................... 103 Power Data D2 Submenu ............................................................................................................. 108 Utility U0 Menu ................................................................................................................................... 110 Fault F0 Menu .................................................................................................................................... 117 Maintenance ....................................................................................................................................... 119 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................ 120 Troubleshooting Guide .................................................................................................................. 121 Appendix ............................................................................................................................................ 139 Closed Loop Adaptive Tune.......................................................................................................... 139 Estimating System Inertia ............................................................................................................. 142 Motor Parameter Calculations - Induction .................................................................................... 143 1
Motor Parameter Calculations – Permanent Magnet.................................................................... 145 PM Start-Up Procedure ................................................................................................................. 146 Rotor Alignment Procedure........................................................................................................... 148 Auto-Tune Procedure .................................................................................................................... 153 Fine Tune Alignment Procedure ................................................................................................... 154 Open-loop Start-Up Procedure ..................................................................................................... 155 Open-Loop Performance Adjustments ......................................................................................... 157 DCP 4 Setup and Calibration ........................................................................................................ 164 Testpoints (Control Board) ............................................................................................................ 165 Testpoints (EnDat Option Card - Power Supplies) ...................................................................... 166 Testpoints (EnDat Option Card - Other) ...................................................................................... 167 Elevator Duty Cycle ...................................................................................................................... 168 CE Guidelines ............................................................................................................................... 170 Dimensions, Mounting Holes, & Weights ...................................................................................... 172 Dynamic Braking Resistor Selection – Worm Gear ...................................................................... 178 Dynamic Braking Resistor Selection – Planetary Gear ................................................................ 179 Dynamic Braking Resistor Fusing Selection ................................................................................. 180 Three-Phase AC Input Reactor Selection..................................................................................... 181 Three-Phase AC Harmonic Filter Selection .................................................................................. 182 AC Input Fusing Selection ............................................................................................................ 183 Line Filter Selection ...................................................................................................................... 184 Selecting and Mounting of Encoder .............................................................................................. 185 Suggested Wire Sizes ................................................................................................................... 190 Input / Output Rating ..................................................................................................................... 191 Single Phase Ratings .................................................................................................................... 192 Carrier Frequency Ratings ............................................................................................................ 193 Watts Loss .................................................................................................................................... 195 Relay Specifications ...................................................................................................................... 196 Replacement Parts ....................................................................................................................... 197 Index ................................................................................................................................................... 198 2
HPV 900 Series 2 Drive Ratings
Continuous Continuous
Output
Output
Current
Current
Maximum
Rated NA1
EU1
NA1
EU1
General
Elevator
Output
Input Rated Rated Rated Rated
Purpose
Duty Cycle2 Current Frame
3
Voltage HP
HP
kW
kW
Rating
Rating
for 5 Sec Size
2
3
0
V
4
6
0
V
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
-------5
5.5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
5.5
7.5
11
15
19
22
30
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
19
22
30
37
45
56
-------3.7
4
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
25
31
41
52
75
88
98
8
12
16
21
27
34
41
52
65
72
96
27
33
44
56
80
94
105
9
13
17
23
29
36
44
56
70
77
103
62.5
77.5
102.5
130
187.5
220
245
20
30
40
52.5
67.5
85
102.5
130
162.5
180
240
2
2
3.5/4
3.5/4
4
4
5
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
Model Number4
HPV900-2025-2E1-01
HPV900-2031-2E1-01
HPV900-2041-2E1-01
HPV900-2052-2E1-01
HPV900-2075-2E1-01
HPV900-2088-2E1-01
HPV900-2098-2E1-01
HPV900-4008-2E1-01
HPV900-4012-2E1-01
HPV900-4016-2E1-01
HPV900-4021-2E1-01
HPV900-4027-2E1-01
HPV900-4034-2E1-01
HPV900-4041-2E1-01
HPV900-4052-2E1-01
HPV900-4065-2E1-01
HPV900-4072-2E1-01
HPV900-4096-2E1-01
Table 1: HPV 900 Series 2 Drive Ratings
NOTE: all ratings at 60/50Hz and 10 kHz carrier frequency
all ratings based on a geared elevator application,
For more information on altitude, temperature, and carrier frequency derating, see Drive Derating on
page 15.
1
NA refers to drives sold in North America and ratings are based off of 460VAC input. EU refers to
drives sold in Europe and are based off of 400VAC input
2
For more information on the Elevator Duty Cycle Rating, see page 167
3
Cube size dimensions, mounting holes, and weights are shown in Dimensions, Mounting Holes and
Weights on page 171
4
For more information on model numbers, see page 15.
3
Quick Parameter Reference
Default
Submenu Parameter
A1
A1
Contract Car Spd
Fpm
m/s
0.0 – 1500.0
0.000 – 8.000
A1
Contract Mtr Spd
Rpm
0.0 – 3000.0
rad/sec i,ii
sec i,ii
1.0 – 50.0 i, ii
0.25 – 50.00 i,ii
PPR
500 – 40000
none ii
%
%
%i
Sec
% i,ii
% i,ii
%i
sec i,ii
Sec
Sec
Sec
#
Sec
% i,ii
sec i,ii
iii
sec
sec iii
Sec
% iii
% iii
Hz iii
sec iii
sec iii
% i,ii
sec i,ii
%
% iii
sec iii
sec iii
none iii
sec iii
none iii
% i,ii
sec i,ii
% ii
% ii
%
0 – 25000 ii
0.0 – 275.0
0.0 – 275.0
60 – 100i
0.00 – 10.00
10 – 100 i,ii
0.0 – 100.0 i,ii
0.0 – 99.9 i
0.00 – 2.50 i,ii
0.10 – 5.00
0.00 – 5.00
0 – 120
0 – 10
0.00 – 5.00
0.00 – 2.00 i,ii
0.00 – 9.99 i,ii
0.00 – 5.00 iii
0.00 – 5.00 iii
0.00 – 5.00
0.0 – 150.0 iii
0.0 – 150.0 iii
0.0 – 10.0 iii
0.00 – 5.00 iii
0.00 – 5.00 iii
100.0 – 150.0 i,ii
0.00 – 9.99 i,ii
100.0 – 150.0
0.0 – 200.0 iii
0.00 – 9.99 iii
0.01 – 2.00 iii
0.00 – 2.00 iii
0.01 – 1.00 iii
0.00 – 2.00 iii
0.1 – 20.0 i,ii
0.00 – 9.99 i,ii
0.00 – 99.9 ii
0.00 – .99.9 ii
0.00 – 110.00
A1
A1ii
A1
A1
A1i
A1
A1i,ii
A1i,ii
A1i
A1i,ii
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1i,ii
A1i,ii
A1iii
A1iii
A1
A1iii
A1iii
A1iii
A1iii
A1iii
A1 i,ii
A1 i,ii
A1
A1iii
A1iii
A1iii
A1iii
A1iii
A1iii
A1i,ii
A1i,ii
A1ii
A1ii
A1
ii
Range
ENGLISH METRIC Site Setting
(U3)
(U3)
Drive A1 Submenu – For details, see Drive A1 Submenu on page 44.
A1i,ii
A1 i,ii
i
Units
Response i,ii
Inertia i,ii
Encoder Pulses
Serial Cnts/Rev ii
Mtr Torque Limit
Regen Torq Limit
Flux Wkn Factori
Trq Lim Msg Dly
Gain Reduce Mult i,ii
Gain Chng Level i,ii
Spd Dev Hi Leveli
Ramped Stop Time i,ii
Contact Flt Time
Contactor DO Dly
Flt Reset Delay
Flt Resets / Hour
Brake Pick Time
Ab Zero Spd Lev i,ii
Ab Off Delay i,ii
Brake Pick Delay iii
Brake Drop Delay iii
Brake Hold Time
DC Start Level iii
DC Stop Level iii
DC Stop Freq iii
DC Start Time iii
DC Stop Time iii
Overspeed Level i,ii
Overspeed Time i,ii
Overspeed Mult
Stalltest Level iii
Stall Fault Time iii
Slip Comp Time iii
Slip Comp Gain iii
Torq Boost Time iii
Torq Boost Gain iii
Spd Dev Lo Level i,ii
Spd Dev Time i,ii
Spd Dev Alm Lvl ii
Spd Dev Flt Lvl ii
Up to Spd. Level
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
4
400.0
0.000
i,iii
1130.0
0.0
130.0 ii
10.0 i,ii
2.00 i,ii
i,iii
1024
10000 ii
8192 ii
200.0
200.0
100 i
0.50
2.00
100 i,ii
100.0 i,ii
10.0 i
0.20 i,ii
0.50 i,ii
0.50
0.00
5
3
1.00
0.00 i,ii
0.00 i,ii
0.50 iii
0.50 iii
0.20
80.0 iii
50.0 iii
iii
50.0
0.5 iii
1.00 iii
1.00 iii
115.0 i,ii
1.00 i,ii
125.0
200.0 iii
5.00 iii
1.50 iii
1.00 iii
0.05 iii
0.00 iii
i,ii
10.0
20.0 i,ii
i,ii
0.50
5.00 i,ii
10.0 ii
25.0 ii
80.00
Quick Parameter Reference
Default
Submenu Parameter
A1
A1
A1
A1i,ii
A1i,ii
A1i,ii
A1i,ii
A1i,ii
A1i,ii
A1
A1
A1i,ii
A1i,ii
A1i,ii
A1i,ii
A1i,ii
A1
A1
A1
A1
Zero Speed Level
Zero Speed Time
Up/Dwn Threshold
Notch Filter Frq i,ii
Notch Filt Depth i,ii
Run Delay Timer i,ii
Tach Rate Gain i,ii
Inner Loop Xover i,ii
Spd Phase Margin i,ii
Spd Command Bias
Spd Command Mult
Pre Torque Bias i,ii
Pre Torque Mult i,ii
Pre Torque Time i,ii
Ext Torque Bias i,ii
Ext Torque Mult i,ii
Ana 1 Out Offset
Ana 2 Out Offset
Ana 1 Out Gain
Ana 2 Out Gain
A1
Ser2 Insp Spd
A1
Ser2 Rs Crp Spd
A1
A1
A1i,ii
A1i.ii
A1i,ii
A1i,ii
A1
A1
A1
A1ii
A1i,ii
A1ii
A1iii
ii
Range
ENGLISH METRIC Site Setting
(U3)
(U3)
Drive A1 Submenu continued …
A1
i
Units
Ser2 Rs Cpr Time
Ser2 Flt Tol
Arb Start Time i,ii
Arb Decay Rate i,ii
ARB Inertia i,ii
ARB Torque Time i,ii
Mains Dip Speed
Mspd Delay 1-4
Mid Speed Level
Encdr Flt Sense ii
ARB Deadband i,ii
Abs Ref Offset ii
Cont Dwell Time iii
%
Sec
%
Hz i,ii
% i,ii
sec i,ii
none i,ii
rad/sec i,ii
degs i,ii
Volts
None
volts i,ii
none i,ii
sec i,ii
volts i,ii
none i,ii
%
%
None
None
ft/ min
m/ sec
ft/ min
m/ sec
Sec
Sec
sec i,ii
none i,ii
none i,ii
sec i,ii
%
Sec
%
% ii
none i,ii
degs ii
sec iii
0.00 – 99.99
0.00 – 9.99
0.00 – 9.99
5 – 60 i,ii
0 – 100 i,ii
0.00 – 0.99 i,ii
0.0 – 30.0 i,ii
0.1 – 20.0 i,ii
45 – 90 i,ii
-6.000 – +6.000
-10.00 – +10.00
-6.00 – 6.00 i,ii
-10.00 – +10.00 i,ii
0.00 – 10.00 i,ii
-6.00 – +6.00 i,ii
-10.00 – +10.00 i,ii
-99.9 – +99.9
-99.9 – +99.9
0.0 – 10.0
0.0 – 10.0
0.0 – 100.0
0.000 – 0.500
0.0 – 300.0
0.000 – 1.540
0.0 – 200.0
0.00 – 2.00
0.00 – 5.00 i,ii
0.000 – 0.999 i,ii
0.10 – 4.00 i,ii
0.000 – 1.000 i,ii
5.00 – 99.99
0.000 – 10.000
0.00 – 110.00
10 – 100 ii
0 – 20 i,ii
-180.00 – +180.00 ii
0.00 – 5.00 iii
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
5
1.00
25.0
0.10
1.00
20 i,ii
0 i,ii
0.00 i,ii
0.0 i,ii
2.0 i,ii
80 i,ii
0.000
1.00
0.00 i,ii
1.00 i,ii
0.00 i,ii
0.00 i,ii
1.00 i,ii
0.0
0.0
1.0
1.0
30.0
0.150
10.0
0.050
180.0
0.50
0.30 i,ii
0.900 i,ii
1.00 i,ii
0.015 i,ii
25.00
0.000
80.00
30 ii
5 i,ii
0.00 ii
0.50 iii
Quick Parameter Reference
Default
Submenu Parameter
A2
Units
Range
ENGLISH METRIC Site Setting
(U3)
(U3)
S-Curves A2 Submenu – For details, see S-Curves A2 Submenu on page 64.
2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A3
A3
A3
i
i
i
ft/s
0.00 – 7.99
3.00
2
m/s
0.000 – 3.999
0.800
2
ft/s
0.00 – 7.99
3.00
Decel Rate 0
2
m/s
0.000 – 3.999
0.800
3
ft/s
0.0 – 29.9
8.0
Accel Jerk In 0
3
m/s
0.00 – 9.99
0.60
3
ft/s
0.0 – 29.9
8.0
Accel Jerk Out 0
3
m/s
0.00 – 9.99
0.60
3
ft/s
0.0 – 29.9
8.0
Decel Jerk In 0
3
m/s
0.00 – 9.99
0.60
3
ft/s
0.0 – 29.9
8.0
Decel Jerk Out 0
3
m/s
0.00 – 9.99
0.60
2
ft/s
0.00 – 7.99
3.00
Accel Rate 1
2
m/s
0.000 – 3.999
0.800
2
0.00 – 7.99
3.00
ft/s
Decel Rate 1
2
m/s
0.000 – 3.999
0.800
3
ft/s
0.0 – 29.9
8.0
Accel Jerk In 1
3
m/s
0.00 – 9.99
0.60
3
ft/s
0.0 – 29.9
8.0
Accel Jerk Out 1
3
m/s
0.00 – 9.99
0.60
3
ft/s
0.0 – 29.9
8.0
Decel Jerk In 1
3
m/s
0.00 – 9.99
0.60
3
ft/s
0.0 – 29.9
8.0
Decel Jerk Out 1
3
m/s
0.00 – 9.99
0.60
2
ft/s
0.00 – 7.99
3.00
Accel Rate 2
2
m/s
0.000 – 3.999
0.800
2
ft/s
0.00 – 7.99
3.00
Decel Rate 2
2
m/s
0.000 – 3.999
0.800
3
ft/s
0.0 – 29.9
8.0
Accel Jerk In 2
3
m/s
0.00 – 9.99
0.60
3
ft/s
0.0 – 29.9
8.0
Accel Jerk Out 2
3
m/s
0.00 – 9.99
0.60
3
ft/s
0.0 – 29.9
8.0
Decel Jerk In 2
3
m/s
0.00 – 9.99
0.60
3
ft/s
0.0 – 29.9
8.0
Decel Jerk Out 2
3
m/s
0.00 – 9.99
0.60
2
ft/s
0.00 – 7.99
3.00
Accel Rate 3
2
m/s
0.000 – 3.999
0.800
2
ft/s
0.00 – 7.99
3.00
Decel Rate 3
2
m/s
0.000 – 3.999
0.800
3
ft/s
0.0 – 29.9
8.0
Accel Jerk In 3
3
m/s
0.00 – 9.99
0.60
3
ft/s
0.0 – 29.9
8.0
Accel Jerk Out 3
3
m/s
0.00 – 9.99
0.60
3
ft/s
0.0 – 29.9
8.0
Decel Jerk In 3
3
m/s
0.00 – 9.99
0.60
3
ft/s
0.0 – 29.9
8.0
Decel Jerk Out 3
3
m/s
0.00 – 9.99
0.60
Multistep Ref A3 Submenu – For details see Multistep Ref A3 Submenu on page 66.
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
i
Speed Command 1
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
i
Speed Command 2
Accel Rate 0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
-
Parameter only accessible when SERIAL MODE (C1) is set to NONE, MODE1, MODE2 or MODE3
6
0.000
Quick Parameter Reference
Default
Submenu Parameter
A3
i
ii
Units
Range
ENGLISH METRIC Site Setting
(U3)
(U3)
Multistep Ref A3 Submenu continued…
i
A3
Speed Command 3i
A3i
Speed Command 4i
A3i
Speed Command 5i
A3i
Speed Command 6i
A3i
Speed Command 7i
A3i
Speed Command 8i
A3i
Speed Command 9i
A3i
Speed Command 10i
A3i
Speed Command 11i
A3i
Speed Command 12i
A3i
Speed Command 13i
A3i
Speed Command 14i
A3i
Speed Command 15i
A3ii
V0ii
A3ii
VNii
A3ii
V1ii
A3ii
V2ii
A3ii
V3ii
A3ii
V4ii
A3ii
VIii
A3ii
Unlock Spd Level ii
A3ii
Lvling Spd Level ii
A3ii
Border Spd Level ii
A3ii
Over Spd Level ii
A3ii
Re-level Spd Hi ii
A3ii
Re-level Spd Low ii
ft/min
m/sec
ft/min
m/sec
ft/min
m/sec
ft/min
m/sec
ft/min
m/sec
ft/min
m/sec
ft/min
m/sec
ft/min
m/sec
ft/min
m/sec
ft/min
m/sec
ft/min
m/sec
ft/min
m/sec
ft/min
m/sec
ft/min
m/sec
ft/min
m/sec
ft/min
m/sec
ft/min
m/sec
ft/min
m/sec
ft/min
m/sec
ft/min
m/sec
ft/min
m/sec
ft/min
m/sec
ft/min
m/sec
%
ft/min
m/sec
ft/min
m/sec
-3000.0 – +3000.0
-16.000 – +16.000
-3000.0 – +3000.0
-16.000 – +16.000
-3000.0 – +3000.0
-16.000 – +16.000
-3000.0 – +3000.0
-16.000 – +16.000
-3000.0 – +3000.0
-16.000 – +16.000
-3000.0 – +3000.0
-16.000 – +16.000
-3000.0 – +3000.0
-16.000 – +16.000
-3000.0 – +3000.0
-16.000 – +16.000
-3000.0 – +3000.0
-16.000 – +16.000
-3000.0 – +3000.0
-16.000 – +16.000
-3000.0 – +3000.0
-16.000 – +16.000
-3000.0 – +3000.0
-16.000 – +16.000
-3000.0 – +3000.0
-16.000 – +16.000
-3000.0 – +3000.0
-16.000 – +16.000
-3000.0 – +3000.0
-16.000 – +16.000
-3000.0 – +3000.0
-16.000 – +16.000
-3000.0 – +3000.0
-16.000 – +16.000
-3000.0 – +3000.0
-16.000 – +16.000
-3000.0 – +3000.0
-16.000 – +16.000
-3000.0 – +3000.0
-16.000 – +16.000
0.00 – 600.0
0.00 – 300.0
0.00 – 600.0
0.00 – 300.0
0.00 – 600.0
0.00 – 300.0
99.0 – 150.0
0.00 – 600.0
0.00 – 3.00
0.00 – 600.0
0.00 – 3.00
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
8.0
3.0
10.0
105
000.5
000.5
-
Parameter only accessible when SERIAL MODE (C1) is set to None, Mode1, Mode2 or Mode3
Parameter only accessible when SERIAL MODE (C1) is set to DCP 3 or DCP 4
7
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.800
0.300
1.000
105
0.050
0.005
Quick Parameter Reference
A4
Power Convert A4 Submenu – For details, see Power Convert A4 Submenu on page 69.
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
Input L-L Volts
UV Alarm Level
UV Fault Level
PWM Frequency
Extern Reactance
volts
%
%
kHz
%
110 – 480
50 – 99
40 – 99
2.5 – 16.0
0.0 – 10.0
A4
ID Reg Diff Gain
none
0.00 – 1.20
A4
ID Reg Prop Gain
none
0.15 – 3.00
A4ii
i
ii
ID Reg Intg Gain ii
none
ii
0.00 – 2.00 ii
A4
IQ Reg Diff Gain
none
0.00 – 1.20
A4
IQ Reg Prop Gain
none
0.15 – 3.00
A4ii
A4ii
A4ii
A4ii
A4ii
A4ii
A4ii
A4iii
A4iii
A4iii
A4iii
A4iii
A4iii
A4iii
A4iii
A4iii
A4iii
A4iii
A4
A4ii
A4
IQ Reg Intg Gain ii
Fine Tune Ofst ii
ID Ref Threshold ii
Flux Weaken Rate ii
Flux Weaken Lev ii
Align Vlt Factor ii
Brake Opn Flt Lv ii
ID Dist Loop Gn iii
IQ Dist Loop Gn iii
ID Dist Loop Fc iii
IQ Dist Loop Fc iii
I Reg Cross Freq iii
Dist Lp Off Freq iii
Ilimit Integ Gn iii
Hunt Prev Gain iii
Hunt Prev Time iii
Switching Delay iii
Vc Correction iii
Load Sense Time
Autoalign Volts ii
Fan Off Delay
none ii
ii
degs
none ii
none ii
none ii
none ii
% ii
iii
none
iii
none
sec iii
sec iii
% iii
Hz iii
none iii
iii
none
iii
sec
sec iii
volts iii
sec
% ii
sec
0.00 – 2.00 ii
-75.00 – 75.00 ii
0.00 – 0.20 ii
0.000 – 1.000 ii
0.70 – 1.00 ii
0.05 – 1.99 ii
0.0 – 20.0 ii
0.00 – 1.50 iii
0.00 – 1.50 iii
0.1 – 30.0 iii
0.1 – 30.0 iii
0.0 – 300.0 iii
0.0 – 99.9 iii
0.00 – 9.99 iii
0.00 – 4.00 iii
0.001 – 7.000 iii
0 – 10 iii
0.00 – 5.00 iii
0.00 – 1.50
5 – 20 ii
0 – 999
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
8
000
90
80
80
70
10.0
0.0
1.00 i,iii
0.00 ii
0.30 i,iii
0.700 ii
1.00 ii
1.00 i,iii
0.00 ii
0.30 i,iii
0.700 ii
1.00 ii
0.00 ii
0 ii
0.0000 ii
0.95 ii
1.00 ii
2 ii
0.50 iii
0.30 iii
5.0 iii
5.0 iii
100.0 iii
60.0 iii
1.00 iii
1.00 iii
0.200 iii
0 iii
2.50 iii
0.00
10 ii
60
Quick Parameter Reference
Motor A5 Submenu – For details see Motor A5 Submenu on page 75.
A5
i,iii
A5
Motor ID
A5
Rated Mtr Power
A5
A5i,iii
A5
A5
A5
A5i,iii
A5i,iii
A5i,iii
A5i
A5i
A5i
A5iii
A5iii
A5iii
A5iii
A5
A5
i
ii
Stator Resist
A5
A5
A5ii
A5ii
A5ii
A5ii
Motor Iron Loss
Motor Mech Loss
D Axis Induct ii
Q Axis Induct ii
Trq Const Scale ii
Encoder Ang Ofst
%
0.0 – 20.0
%
%
none ii
none ii
none ii
none ii
0.0 – 15.0
0.0 – 15.0
0.50 – 100.00 ii
0.50 – 100.00 ii
0.50 – 2.00 ii
0 – 35999 ii
none
Rated Mtr Volts
Rated Excit Freq i,iii
Rated Motor Curr
Motor Poles
Rated Mtr Speed
% No Load Curr i,iii
Stator Leakage X i,iii
Rotor Leakage X i,iii
Flux Sat Break i
Flux Sat Slope 1 i
Flux Sat Slope 2 i
Motor Min Volts iii
Motor Min Freq iii
Motor Mid Volts iii
Motor Mid Freq iii
Ovld Start Level
Ovld Time Out
A5
HP
kW
volts
Hz i,iii
amps
none
RPM
% i,iii
% i,iii
% i,iii
%i
PU Slope i
PU Slope i
volts iii
Hz iii
Volts iii
Hz iii
%
sec
 4 pole dflt
i,iii
 6 pole dflt
ii
 PM dflt
1.0 – 500.0
0.75 – 300.00
85.0 – 575.0
5.0 – 400.0 i,iii
1.0 – 800.0
2 – 128
1.0 – 3000.0
10.0 – 80.0 i,iii
0.0 – 20.0 i,iii
0.0 – 20.0 i,iii
0 – 100 i
0 – 200 i
0 – 200 i
0.1 – 100.0 iii
0.1 – 10.0 iii
0.1 – 575.0 iii
0.1 – 40.0 iii
100 – 150
5.0 – 120.0
ii
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
9
4 pole dflti,iii
PM dfltii
0.0
0.00
0.0
0.0 i,iii
0.0
4
0.0
Per ID i,iii
Per ID i,iii
Per ID i,iii
75 i
0i
50 i
9.0 iii
1.0 iii
28.0 iii
3.0 iii
110
60.0
1.5 i,iii
7.0 ii
0.5
1.0
10 ii
30 ii
ii
10
30 ii
ii
0.78
30000 ii
Quick Parameter Reference
C1
User Switches C1 Submenu – For details, see User Switches C1 on page 81.
C1
Spd Command Src
none
C1
Run Command Src
none
C1
Motor Rotation
none
C1ii
C1
C1i,ii
i
ii
Encoder Select ii
Encoder Connect
Encoder Fault i,ii
none ii
none
none i,ii
C1
Cont Confirm Src
none
C1i
Fast Flux i
none i
C1i,ii
HI/LO Gain Src
i,ii
none i,ii
C1ii
I-Reg Inner Loop ii
none iii
C1i,ii
Ramped Stop Sel i,ii
none i,ii
C1i,ii
Ramp Down En Src i,ii
none i,ii
C1
S-Curve Abort
none
C1
DB Protection
none
C1
Spd Ref Release
none
C1
Brake Pick Src
none
C1
Brake Pick Cnfm
none
C1
Motor Ovrld Sel
none
C1
Stopping Mode
none
C1
Auto Stop
none
C1iii
Stall Test Ena iii
none iii
C1iii
Stall Prev Ena iii
none iii




















































Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
10
analog input
multi-step
ser mult step
serial
external tb
serial
serial+extern
forward
reverse
ii
endat
ii
incremental
forward
reverse
i,ii
disable
i,ii
enable
none
external tb
i
disable
i
enable
i,ii
external tb
i,ii
serial
i,ii
internal
ii
disabled
ii
enabled low
ii
enabled high
i,ii
none
i,ii
ramp on stop
i,ii
external tb
i,ii
run logic
i,ii
serial
disable
enable
fault
alarm
reg release
brake picked
internal
serial
none
internal time
external tb
alarm
flt immediate
fault at stop
immediate
ramp to stop
disable
enable
iii
enable
iii
disable
iii
enable
iii
disable
MULTI-STEP
EXTERNAL TB
FORWARD
INCREMENTAL ii
FORWARD
ENABLE i,ii
NONE
EXTERNAL TB
DISABLE i
INTERNAL i,ii
DISABLED ii
NONE i,ii
EXTERNAL TB i,ii
DISABLE ENABLE
FAULT
REG
BRAKE
RELEASE PICKED
INTERNAL
NONE
ALARM
IMMEDIATE
DISABLE
ENABLE iii
DISABLE iii
Quick Parameter Reference
C1
User Switches C1 Submenu continued…
C1
Serial Mode
none
C1
Ser2 Flt Mode
none
C1
Drv Fast Disable
none
C1i,ii
Brake Hold Src
None
C1
Brk Pick Flt Ena
None
C1
Brk Hold Flt Ena
None
Ext Torq Cmd Src i,ii
none i,ii
C1
Fault Reset Src
None
C1
Overspd Test Src
None
C1i,ii
Pretorque Source i,ii
none i,ii
C1i,ii
Pretorque Latch i,ii
none i,ii
C1i,ii
Ptorq Latch Clck i,ii
none i,ii
C1
Dir Confirm
None
C1
Mains Dip Ena
None
C1
Mlt-Spd to Dly 1-4
None
C1
Priority Msg
None
C1i,ii
ii
none i,ii
C1
C1i,ii
i
Speed Reg Type i,ii
ARB Selecti, ii
nonei, ii
C1
Drive Enable Src
None
C1
Rec Travel Dir
None
 none
 mode 3
 mode 1  DCP3
 mode 2  DCP4

immediate

run remove

rescue

disable

enable
i,ii

elev spd reg
i,ii

pi speed reg
i,ii

external reg

internal

serial

disable

enable

disable

enable
i,ii

none
i,ii

analog input
i,ii

serial

external tb

serial

automatic

external tb

serial
i,ii

none
i,ii

analog input
i,ii

serial
i,ii

not latched
i,ii

latched
i,ii

serial
i,ii

external tb

disable

enable

disable

low mains

external tb

serial

none

mspd 1-15

enable

disable
i ii

enable
i ii

disable

external tb

serial

serial+extern

none

geared

gearless
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
11
NONE
IMMEDIATE
DISABLE
ELEV SPD REG i,ii
INTERNAL
DISABLE
DISABLE
NONE i,ii
EXTERNAL TB
EXTERNAL TB
NONE i,ii
NOT LATCHED i,ii
EXTERNAL TB i,ii
DISABLE
DISABLE
NONE
ENABLE
DISABLE ii
EXTERNAL TB
NONE
Quick Parameter Reference
Logic Inputs C2 Submenu – For details, see Logic Inputs C2 on page 97.
C2
C2
Logic Input 1
C2
Logic Input 2
C2
Logic Input 3
C2
Logic Input 4
C2
Logic Input 5
C2
Logic Input 6
C2
Logic Input 7
C2
Logic Input 8
C2
C3
Logic Input 9















contact cfirm
drive enable
extrn fault 1
extrn fault 2
extrn fault 3
extrn/flt 4
fault reset
low gain sel
mains dip
mech brk hold
mech brk pick
nc ctct cfirm
no function
ospd test src
rec travel en














pre-trq latch
quick stop
run
run down
run up
s-curve sel 0
s-curve sel 1
ser2 insp ena
step ref b0
step ref b1
step ref b2
step ref b3
trq ramp down
up/dwn
DRIVE ENABLE
RUN
CONTCT
CFIRM
FAULT
RESET
RUN UP
UP/DWN
RUN
DOWN
S-CURVE SEL 0
STEP REF B0
STEP REF B1
STEP REF B2
EXTRN
FAULT 1
FAULT
RESET
Logic Outputs C3 Submenu – For details, see Logic Outputs C3 on page 99.
C3
Logic Output 1
C3
Logic Output 2
C3
Logic Output 3
C3
Logic Output 4
C3
Relay Coil 1
C3
Relay Coil 2
C3
User LED
C4



























Alarm
alarm+flt
at mid speed
auto brake
brake alarm
brake hold
brake pick
brk hold flt
brk igbt flt
brk pick flt
car going dwn
car going up
charge fault
close contact
contactor flt
curr reg flt
drv overload
encoder flt
ext fan en
fan alarm
fault
flt reset out
flux confirm
fuse fault
ground fault
in low gain
rec travel dir


























motor trq lim
mtr overload
no function
not alarm
over curr flt
overspeed flt
overtemp flt
overvolt flt
ovrtemp alarm
phase fault
ramp down ena
ready to run
regen trq lim
run commanded
run confirm
speed dev
speed dev low
speed ref rls
speed ref rel2
speed reg rls
stltst active
undervolt flt
up to speed
uv alarm
zero speed
rec travel on
READY TO RUN
RUN COMMANDED
MTR
OVERLOAD
ZERO
SPEED
ENCODER FLT
FAULT
READY
TO RUN
SPEED
REG RLS
BRAKE
PICK
ALARM
Analog Outputs C4 Submenu – For details, see Analog Outputs C4 on page 102.
C4
Analog Output 1
C4
Analog Output 2














abs pos bin
aux torq cmd
bus voltage
current out
d-current ref
drv overload
flux current
flux output
flux ref
flux voltage
frequency out
mtr overload
no function
power output














12
pretorque ref
slip freq
spd rg tq cmd
speed command
speed error
speed feedbk
speed ref
tach rate cmd
theta e
torq current
torq voltage
torque output
torque ref
voltage out
SPEED
REF
SPEED
COMMAND
SPEED FEEDBK
Quick Parameter Reference
Sub
Parameter
menu
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1i,ii
D1i,ii
D1
D1
D1
D1i,ii
D1i,ii
D1
D1i,ii
D1i,ii
D1i,ii
D1i,ii
D1
D1
D1
D1
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2i
D2i
D2i,ii
D2i
D2i
D2
D2
D2ii
D2i,iii
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2ii
D2ii
D2
D2
Sub
Parameter
menu
Units
Elevator Data D1 Submenu
Speed Command
Speed Reference
Speed Feedback
Encoder Speed
Speed Errori,ii
Est Inertia i,ii
Logic Outputs
Logic Inputs
Rx Logic In
Start Logic i,ii
i,ii
Rx Com Status
U1
U1
U1
U1
U2
U2
U3
U3
U4
U4
U5
U5
U5
U6
U6
U6
U6
U6
U7
U7
U8
U8
U9
U9
U10ii
U10ii
U10ii
U10ii
U11
U11
U11
U11
U11
U11
U11
U12 ii
U12ii
U14
U14
U14
U14
U14
F1
F2
F3
F4
F4
F4
ft/min or m/s
ft/min or m/s
ft/min or m/s
rpm
ft/min or m/s i,ii
seconds i,ii
1 = true; 0 = false
1 = true; 0 = false
1 = true; 0 = false
1 = true; 0 = false i,ii
1 = true; 0 = false i,ii
Rx Error Count
none
Pre-Torque Ref i,ii
% of rated torque i,ii
Spd Reg Torq Cmdi,ii % of rated torque i,ii
Tach Rate Cmd i,ii
% of rated torque i,ii
i,ii
FF Torque Cmd
% of rated torque i,ii
Enc Position
None
Enc Revolutions
None
DCP Command
1 = true; 0 = false
DCP Status
1 = true; 0 = false
Power Data D2 Submenu
DC Bus Voltage
Volts
Motor Current
Amps
Motor Voltage
Volts
Motor Frequency
Hz
Motor Torque
% rated torque
Est No Load Curr % i
%i
i
Est Rated RPM
Rpm i
Torque Reference i,ii
% of rated torquei,ii
i
Flux Reference
%i
i
Flux Output
%i
% Motor Current
% rated current
Power Output
kW
D-Curr Reference ii
% ii
i,iii
Slip Frequency
Hzi,iii
Motor Overload
%
Drive Overload
%
Flux Current
%
Torque Current
% rated current
Flux Voltage
% rated volts
Torque Voltage
% rated volts
Base Impedance
Ohms
Rated Excit Freq ii
Hz ii
ii
Rotor Position
none ii
Drive Temp
Deg C
Highest Temp
Deg C
i
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) only
Parameter accessible through PM (U9) only
iii
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) only
ii
13
Site Setting
Password U1 Submenu
Enter password
New password
Password lockout
Hidden Items U2 Submenu
Hidden Items Enable
Units U3 Submenu
Units Selection
Ovrspeed Test U4 Submenu
Overspeed Test
Restore Dflts U5 Submenu
Rst Mtr Dflts
Rst Drive Dflts
Drive Info U6 Submenu
Drive Version
Boot Version
Cube ID
Drive Type
Hex Monitor U7 Submenu
Address
Language Sel U8 Submenu
Language Select
Basics U9 Submenu
Drive Mode
Rotor Align U10 Submenu ii
Alignment ii
Begin Alignment ii
Alignment Method ii
Time U11 Submenu
Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Second
AutoTune U12 Submenu ii
Autotune Select ii
Power Meter U14 Submenu
Motor Pwr
Regen Pwr
Energy Time
Energy Reset
Active Faults F1 Submenu
Faults History F2 Submenu
Sorted History F3 Submenu
Reset Faults F4 Submenu
Rst Active Flts
Clr Flt Hist
Introduction
Introduction
Input Power
 Voltage: 200 - 240 VAC, 3-phase, ± 10%
380 - 480 VAC, 3-phase, ± 10%
 Frequency:
48 - 63 Hz
 Line Impedance:
3% without choke
1% with choke
 Nominal Voltage Levels:
230 & 460 VAC, 3-phase, 60/50 Hz
Drive Specifications
Ratings
 North American Horse Power ratings
- 230 Volt AC input:
7.5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, and 40 HP
- 460 Volt AC input:
5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60,
and 75 HP
 European Horse Power ratings
- 400 Volt AC input:
5, 5.5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50,
and 60HP
 150% of continuous current rating (general
purpose rating) for 60 seconds
 250% of continuous current rating (general
purpose rating) for 5 seconds
Output Power
 Voltage:
 Frequency:
 Carrier Frequency:
0 - Input Voltage
0 - 120 Hz
2.5 kHz - 16 kHz
Motor Control
 Induction: Closed Loop
 Induction: Open Loop
 Permanent Magnet: Incremental
 Permanent Magnet: Endat (requires kit
HPV9-ENDAT)
Performance Features
 Control Method:
Digital flux vector, Space Vector PWM
(1/3 less switching loss then Sine coded)
 Speed Command Sources:
Serial channel; Analog channel;
and Multi-step command
 Speed Control:
Range:
0 to rated speed
Accuracy: ±0.02%
 Speed Reference Resolution
Multi-step reference: 0.1ft/min / 0.001m/s
Analog reference: 0.05%
 Speed Reference Signal: -10V to +10V
 Four distinctive programmable S-curves
with: adjustable accel / decel rates and
adjustable jerk rates (accel/decel &
leveling)
 Torque Limit: Setting range: 0 to 250%
motoring/regeneration set independently
 Selectable Functions: Multi-step speed
operation (16 steps max.) and S-curves
accel / decel (4 selectable max.)
 Adaptive Tune: Adjusts motor parameters
automatically by: calculating the percentage
no load current and estimating the rated
rpm
 Estimates Inertia: Calculates the inertia of
the entire elevator for easy tuning of the
speed regulator
 Functions Available: Configuration and
tuning of the speed regulator; Specifying
the input line and motor parameters;
Monitoring various internal signals; Fault
annunciation & Fault log viewing.
Digital Inputs
Nine (9) programmable opto-isolated logic inputs.
Voltage:
ON State:
Sinking Operation (High True): 18-26.4 Volts
Sourcing Operation (Low True): 0-3.5 Volts
OFF State:
Sinking Operation (High True): 0-4.5 Volts
Sourcing Operation (Low True): 22-26.4 Volts
 Off state leakage current: 1mA
 On state leakage current (nominal): 5.5mA
 Scan Rate:
2 msec.
 Update Rate:
4 msec.
Digital Outputs
Two (2) programmable Form-C relays.
 Relay 1&2: 2A at 30VDC / 250VAC resistive
(inductive load)
 Update Rate: 2 msec.
Four (4) programmable opto-isolated open
collectors.
 Voltage:
50 Volts DC (max.)
 Capacity:
 150 mA
 Update Rate:
2 msec.
Analog Inputs
Two (2) differential inputs.
 Voltage:
± 10 Volts DC
 Channel 1:
Speed Command
 Channel 2:
Pre Torque Command or
Torque Feed Forward Command
 Resolution:
10 Bit plus sign
 Software gain and offset available
 Update Rate:
2 msec.
14
Introduction
Analog Outputs
Two (2) programmable differential outputs.
 Voltage:
± 10 Volts DC
 Capacity:
10 mA
 Resolution:
10 Bit, 5msec time constant
 Update Rate:
2 msec
Encoder Feedback
 Supply Voltage:
12VDC or 5VDC*
* see Incremental encoder Voltage
Selection on page 29
 Capacity:
200mA or 400mA
 PPR:
600 - 10,000 (max)
 Maximum Frequency:
300 kHz
 Input:
2 channel quadrature
(A, /A, B, /B)
Zero marker (Z,/Z)
Endat (PM, option)
Standards and Reliability
 CSA listed
 CE
 Surface mount devices
Drive Derating
Altitude Derating
Control ratings apply to 1000 meters (3300
feet) altitude without derating. For installations
at higher altitudes, derate both the continuous
and peak current levels 5% for each 300 m
(1000 ft) above 1000 m (3300 ft).
Derating for Carrier Frequency
Control ratings apply for carrier frequencies up
to and including 10 kHz. See Carrier
Frequency Ratings on page 193.
Derating for Single Phase Input Power
For single-phase input power, derate both the
continuous and peak current levels by 60%.
For single phase rating table, see Single
Phase Ratings on page 192.
Remote Keypad
 The keypad can be remotely mounted, the
maximum recommended cable length is
9.15 Meters (30ft)
Design Features
 DC Bus Choke: Connections for optional
external DC Bus Choke
 Internal Dynamic Brake IGBT: Connections
for external Dynamic Brake Resistor
 Serial Channel: Optically isolated serial port
Protective Features
 Internal motor overload protection per
UL/CSA
 Overspeed Fault
 Drive Overload Fault
 DC Bus Overvoltage and Undervoltage
Faults
 Overcurrent Fault
 Phase Overcurrent Fault
 Open Phase Fault
 Overtemperature Fault
 Encoder Malfunction Fault
HPV900
Environmental
 Operating ambient air temperature range
-10°C (14°F) to 45°C (110°F)
 Altitude 1000m (3300 ft) without derating
 Relative humidity 95% (non-condensing)
 Environment: protected from corrosive
gases; conductive dust
 Vibration: displacement of 0.032mm <
57Hz; peak acceleration 0.5g > 57Hz
 Storage of -20°C – 65°C
 Capacitors must be reformed after storage
of more than 1 year.
Drive Model Number
The HPV 900 Series 2 nameplate contains a
fifteen-digit model number, which provides
complete identification of the drive. Figure 1
details the model number.
-2
-
1-0 1
drive
software program
input voltage
2 = 230 volt
4 = 460 volt
operator style
E = Elevator
N = no operator
continuous
output current
Figure 1: Model Number
15
General Start-Up
5. Inspect the security of the supply line
power, ground connections, and all control
circuit connections. Ensure that the main
circuit input/output precautions are
observed. Also, ensure that the control
circuit precautions are observed.
Observe the following precautions:
General Start-Up Procedure
The following is a recommended start-up
procedure:
1. The HPV 900 Series 2 is thoroughly tested
at the factory. Verify the drive has been
installed without shipping and installation
damage.
2. Review the HPV 900 Series 2 technical
manual, shipped with the drive.
3. Verify the proper drive model numbers and
voltage ratings as specified on the
purchase order.
4. Verify the drive has been installed in
accordance with the guidelines detailed
below:
Location of the HPV 900 Series 2 is important
for proper operation of the drive and normal life
expectancy. The installation should comply
with the following:
 DO NOT mount in direct sunlight, rain or
extreme (condensing) humidity.
 DO NOT mount where corrosive gases or
liquids are present.
 AVOID exposure to vibration, airborne dust
or metallic particles.
 DO NOT allow the ambient temperature
around the control to exceed the ambient
temperature listed in the specification.
 Mount control vertically using mounting
holes provided by Magnetek.
 Allow at least 7cm (2.5 in) clearance above
and at least 7 to 13 cm (2.5 to 5 in)
clearance below the unit.
 Allow at least 3 cm (1 in) clearance to
either side of the drive.
 Separate grounded metal conduit is
required for input, output and control
wiring.
The unit should be installed in an open
ventilated area where free air can be circulated
around the control. The installation should
comply with the following:
 When necessary, the cooling should be
provided by using filtered air.
 If the cooling air coming inside the control
cabinet contains airborne dust, filter the
incoming air as required and clean the
cooling surface of the HPV 900 Series 2
regularly using compressed air and a
brush. An unclean heatsink operates at an
efficiency less than that of cooling design
specifications. Therefore, drive may fault
on thermal protection if heatsink is not
cleaned periodically.

Use 600V vinyl sheathed wire or
equivalent. Wire size should be
determined considering voltage drop of
leads.
 Never connect main AC power to the
output terminals: U, V, and W.
 Never allow wire leads to contact metal
surfaces. Short circuit may result.
 SIZE OF WIRE MUST BE SUITABLE FOR
CLASS I CIRCUITS.
 Motor lead length should not exceed 45m
(150 ft) and motor wiring should be run in a
separate conduit from the power wiring. If
lead length must exceed this distance,
contact Magnetek for proper installation
procedures.
 Use UL/CSA certified connectors sized for
the selected wire gauge. Install
connectors using the specified crimping
tools specified by the connector
manufacturer.
 Use twisted shielded or twisted-pair
shielded wire for control and signal circuit
leads. The shield sheath MUST be
connected at the HPV 900 Series 2 ONLY.
The other end should be dressed neatly
and left unconnected (floating).
 Control wire size should be determined
considering the voltage drops of the leads.
 Control wire lead length should not exceed
45m (150 ft). Signal leads and feedback
leads should be run in separate conduits
from power and motor wiring.
6. Verify that the input voltage matches the
drive’s rating.
7. Verify that the motor is wired for the
application voltage and amperage.
8. Tighten all of the three-phase power and
ground connections. Check that all control
and signal terminations are also tight. As
they sometimes come loose during the
shipment process.
IMPORTANT
16
The drive has a common ground bus terminal
connection. All grounds need to land at this
common point including building, motor,
transformer, and filter grounds. This will limit the
impedance between the grounds and noise will
be channeled back to building ground.
General Start-Up
Pre-Power Check
CAUTION: TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE
DRIVE. THE FOLLOWING CHECKS MUST
BE PERFORMED BEFORE APPLYING THE
INPUT POWER.
 Inspect all equipment for signs of damage,
loose connections, or other defects.
 Ensure the three-phase line voltage is
within 10% of the nominal input voltage.
Also verify the frequency (50 or 60 Hz) is
correct for the elevator control system.
 Remove all shipping devices.
 Ensure all electrical connections are
secure.
 Ensure that all transformers are connected
for proper voltage.
IMPORTANT: Double-check all the power
wires and motor wires (R, S, T, U, V, & W) to
make sure that they are securely tightened
down to their respective lugs (loose wire
connections may cause problems at any time).
Operator power switch
Figure 2: Back of Operator
3. Turn on power to the drive and set the
following parameters in the Time, U11
submenu:
 Year
 Month
 Day
 Hour (use 24 hour clock)
 Minute
 Second
4. These number(s) / date(s) will be
automatically stored, however, after setting
these value in the U11 submenu, it may be
viewed on the top of the display or logged
into fault history when a fault occurs and
the U11 parameter will reset back to zero.
This completes the recommended general
start-up procedure. For Close-Loop Adaptive
Tune procedure, please see page 139. For
Open Loop Start-Up Procedure, please see
page 155.
IMPORTANT: Insure the incoming line supply
IS CONNECTED to the drive INPUT
TERMINALS R, S, & T and NOT to the output
motor terminals U, V, & W.
9. Insure the DC Choke link is in place, if a
DC choke is NOT used.
10. Insure a Dynamic Braking Resistor is
connected to the drive, see page 178
11. Measure and verify transformer primary
and secondary volts
12. Check for balanced Vac from phase to
ground.
13. Verify the accuracy of the drive’s input lineto-line voltage in parameter INPUT L-L
VOLTS (A4)
NOTE: The INPUT L-L VOLTS (A4)
parameter helps to determine the DC bus
undervoltage alarm/fault level.
CSA Warnings
The following are written warnings located on
the drive chassis. They appear in both English
and French. In this section, these warnings
appear in English only.
Caution—Risk of Electric Shock:
Capacitive voltages above 50V may
remain for 5 minutes after power is
disconnected
Caution—Risk of Electric Shock: More
than one live circuit: See diagram
Real Time Clock Setup
The following written warning is also located
on the drive chassis.
The HPV900 Series 2 operator comes with a
real time clock and battery. As part of the
startup, it is beneficial to the user to setup the
real time clock by following the instructions
below:
This device provides motor overload
protection in accordance with NEC and
CEC requirements. This device is
factory configured to stop the motor
from a motor overload trip. See
instruction manual for options.
1. With power removed from the drive,
remove the operator from the drive by
unplugging the connector.
WARNING: Separate Motor Overcurrent
Protection is required to be provided in
accordance with the Canadian Electrical Code,
Part 1, and NEC.
2. As seen in Figure 2, set the power switch
to “1”. Plug operator back into drive.
17
Terminals
Terminals
USB (Mag Explorer)
Connection
Control Board
Connections
TB2 (1-7)
Control Board
Connections
TB2 (8-14)
Control Board
Connections
TB1 (17-32)
Control Board
Connections
TB1 (1-16)
DC Bus
Charge LED
DC Link Choke
Connection(+,+)
Motor
Connections
(U,V, and W)
Ground
Connection
Ground
Connection
Input Power
Connections
(R,S, and T)
Dynamic Braking
Resistors
Connection (B1,B2)
DC Bus
Connections
(-,B1)
Remember when servicing the HPV900 Series 2: Hazardous voltages may exist in the drive circuits
even with drive circuit breaker in off position.
IMPORTANT: Use extreme caution: Do not touch any circuit board, the drive, or motor electrical
connections without making sure that the unit is properly grounded and that no high voltage is present.
NEVER attempt maintenance unless:
The incoming three phase power (460 or 230VAC) is disconnected and locked out.
Also, ensure the DC Bus charge light is out.
Even with the light out, we recommend that you use a voltmeter between (-) and (+) to verify that no
voltage is present.
CAUTION: Before continuing, ensure the DC Bus Charge LED is not illuminated.
IMPORTANT: Take ESD precautions, devices within the drive are sensitive to static damage.
Figure 3: Terminal Connections (Frame 1)
18
Terminals
Control Board
Connections
TB2 (1-7)
USB (Mag Explorer)
Connection
DC Bus
Charge LED
Control Board
Connections
TB2 (8-14)
Control Board
Connections
TB1 (17-32)
Control Board
Connections
TB1 (1-16)
DC Link Choke
Connection(+,+)
Motor
Connections
(U,V, and W)
Ground
Connection
Ground
Connection
Input Power
Connections
(R,S, and T)
Dynamic Braking
Resistors
Connection (B1,B2)
DC Bus
Connections
(-,B1)
Remember when servicing the HPV900 Series 2: Hazardous voltages may exist in the drive circuits
even with drive circuit breaker in off position.
IMPORTANT: Use extreme caution: Do not touch any circuit board, the drive, or motor electrical
connections without making sure that the unit is properly grounded and that no high voltage is present.
NEVER attempt maintenance unless:
The incoming three phase power (460 or 230VAC) is disconnected and locked out.
Also, ensure the DC Bus charge light is out.
Even with the light out, we recommend that you use a voltmeter between (-) and (+) to verify that no
voltage is present.
CAUTION: Before continuing, ensure the DC Bus Charge LED is not illuminated.
IMPORTANT: Take ESD precautions, devices within the drive are sensitive to static damage.
Figure 4: Terminal Connections (Frame 2)
19
Terminals
USB (Mag Explorer)
Connection
Input Power
Connections
(R,S, and T)
Control Board
Connections
TB2 (8-14)
Control Board
Connections
TB1 (17-32)
Control Board
Connections
TB1 (1-16)
Control Board
Connections
TB2 (1-7)
DC Bus
Charge LED
DC Link Choke
Connection(+1,+2)
Ground
Connections
Motor
Connections
(U,V, and W)
Dynamic Braking
Resistors
Connection (B1,B2)
DC Bus
Connections
(-,B1)
Remember when servicing the HPV900 Series 2: Hazardous voltages may exist in the drive circuits
even with drive circuit breaker in off position.
IMPORTANT: Use extreme caution: Do not touch any circuit board, the drive, or motor electrical
connections without making sure that the unit is properly grounded and that no high voltage is present.
NEVER attempt maintenance unless:
The incoming three phase power (460 or 230VAC) is disconnected and locked out.
Also, ensure the DC Bus charge light is out.
Even with the light out, we recommend that you use a voltmeter between (-) and (+) to verify that no
voltage is present.
CAUTION: Before continuing, ensure the DC Bus Charge LED is not illuminated.
IMPORTANT: Take ESD precautions, devices within the drive are sensitive to static damage.
Figure 5: Terminal Connections (Frame 3)
20
Terminals
Dynamic Braking
Resistors
Connection (B1,B2)
Control Board
Connections
TB2 (1-7)
USB (Mag Explorer)
Connection
Control Board
Connections
TB1 (17-32)
Control Board
Connections
TB2 (8-14)
Control Board
Connections
TB1 (1-16)
DC Bus
Charge LED
Input Power
Connections
(R,S, and T)
DC Link Choke
Connection(+1,+2)
DC Bus
Connections
(-,+)
(-,B1)
Motor
Connections
(U,V, and W)
Ground
Connections
Remember when servicing the HPV900 Series 2: Hazardous voltages may exist in the drive circuits
even with drive circuit breaker in off position.
IMPORTANT: Use extreme caution: Do not touch any circuit board, the drive, or motor electrical
connections without making sure that the unit is properly grounded and that no high voltage is present.
NEVER attempt maintenance unless:
The incoming three phase power (460 or 230VAC) is disconnected and locked out.
Also, ensure the DC Bus charge light is out.
Even with the light out, we recommend that you use a voltmeter between (-) and (+) to verify that no
voltage is present.
CAUTION: Before continuing, ensure the DC Bus Charge LED is not illuminated.
IMPORTANT: Take ESD precautions, devices within the drive are sensitive to static damage.
Figure 6: Terminal Connections (Frame 3.5)
21
Terminals
USB (Mag Explorer)
Connection
Control Board
Connections
TB2 (8-14)
Control Board
Connections
TB1 (17-32)
Control Board
Connections
TB1 (1-16)
DC Bus
Charge LED
Control Board
Connections
TB2 (1-7)
Input Power
Connections
(R,S, and T)
Ground
Connections
Dynamic
Braking
Resistors
Connection
(B1,B2)
DC Link Choke
Connection(+1,+2)
DC Bus
Connections
(-,B1)
Motor
Connections
(U,V, and W)
Remember when servicing the HPV900 Series 2: Hazardous voltages may exist in the drive circuits
even with drive circuit breaker in off position.
IMPORTANT: Use extreme caution: Do not touch any circuit board, the drive, or motor electrical
connections without making sure that the unit is properly grounded and that no high voltage is present.
NEVER attempt maintenance unless:
The incoming three phase power (460 or 230VAC) is disconnected and locked out.
Also, ensure the DC Bus charge light is out.
Even with the light out, we recommend that you use a voltmeter between (-) and (+) to verify that no
voltage is present.
CAUTION: Before continuing, ensure the DC Bus Charge LED is not illuminated.
IMPORTANT: Take ESD precautions, devices within the drive are sensitive to static damage.
Figure 7: Terminal Connections (Frame 4)
22
Terminals
Dynamic Braking
Resistors
Connection (B1,B2)
Control Board
Connections
TB2 (8-14)
USB (Mag Explorer)
Connection
Control Board
Connections
TB1 (17-32)
Control Board
Connections
TB2 (1-7)
Control Board
Connections
TB1 (1-16)
DC Bus
Charge LED
DC Bus
Connections
(-,B1)
DC Link Choke
Connection(+1,+2)
Input Power
Connections
(R,S, and T)
Motor
Connections
(U,V, and W)
Ground
Connections
Ground
Connections
Remember when servicing the HPV900 Series 2: Hazardous voltages may exist in the drive circuits
even with drive circuit breaker in off position.
IMPORTANT: Use extreme caution: Do not touch any circuit board, the drive, or motor electrical
connections without making sure that the unit is properly grounded and that no high voltage is present.
NEVER attempt maintenance unless:
The incoming three phase power (460 or 230VAC) is disconnected and locked out.
Also, ensure the DC Bus charge light is out.
Even with the light out, we recommend that you use a voltmeter between (-) and (+) to verify that no
voltage is present.
CAUTION: Before continuing, ensure the DC Bus Charge LED is not illuminated.
IMPORTANT: Take ESD precautions, devices within the drive are sensitive to static damage.
Figure 8: Terminal Connections (Frame 5)
23
Interconnections
Interconnections
R
TB1
6
logic inp ut 1
7
logic inp ut 2
8
logic inp ut 3
9
log ic in put 4
10
S
T
T B1
input
pow er
log ic out put 1
13
log ic out put 2
14
log ic out put 3
15
16
logic inp ut 5
H PV 900
log ic out put 4
Se ries 2 log ic out put com m on
11
logic inp ut 6
enc od er + 5/ + 12 V DC
17
24
logic inp ut 7
en cod er c om m on
18
25
logic inp ut 8
A
1
26
logic inp ut 9
/A
2
21
+ 24 V D C is olate d
B
3
22
logic inp ut c om m on
/B
4
23
+ 24 V D C is o. c om m on
Z
19
/Z
20
27
28
s hie ld
re la y 1
29
5
TB2
30
ana log ou tpu t 2
1
a na log co m m o n
2
an alo g inpu t 1 (+ )
3
an alo g inpu t 1 (-)
4
an alog inp ut 2 (+ )
5
an alo g inpu t 2 (-)
6
s hield
7
an alo g o utp ut 1
8
re la y 2
31
32
TB2
9
T (+)
10
T (-)
11
c om m on
12
R (+ )
13
R (-)
s hie ld
14
12
op tion a l En D at C ard
T B1
65
A-_S ine
66
A_Sine
Shield
59
C om m on
67
B-_S ine
60
/A_O ut
61
68
B_Sine
69
D ata-
A_Out
62
/B_O ut
63
70
D ata+
B_Out
64
71
C lock -
Sense-
75
72
C lock +
Sens e+
76
73
Com m on
Shi eld
77
74
+5V
Shi eld
78
P re T orq u e Cm d
 1 0 V DC
U SB (Ma g E xp lore r)
C o n n e ctio n
(46S 04 327 -00 00)
T B2
S pe e d Cm d
1 0 V DC
o ptiona l D C c ho ke
+1
+2
d c b us (-)
-
dc b us (+)
B1
B2
m otor
U
V
W
D yn am ic B rak in g
R es is tor
G
gro und
ac
m otor
Figure 9: Interconnection Diagram
24
Interconnections
Figure 11 shows the connection for using the
internal voltage supply. And in this case, the
voltage source common is TB1-23 (+24VDC
isolated common).
Logic Inputs
The HPV 900 Series 2’s nine programmable
logic inputs are opto-isolated. The inputs
become “true” by closing contacts or switches
between the logic input terminal and voltage
source common (or voltage source). The
voltage supply for the logic inputs is 24VDC.
The choices for the voltage source common
(or voltage source) depend on if the user is
using an external voltage supply or using the
internal voltage supply.
Figure 10 shows the connection for using the
internal voltage supply. And in this case, the
voltage source common is TB1-21 (+24VDC
isolated).
TB1
TB1
6
logic input 1
7
logic input 2
8
logic input 3
9
logic input 4
10
logic input 5
11
logic input 6
24
logic input 7
25
logic input 8
26
logic input 9
21
+24VDC isolated
22
logic input common
23
+24VDC iso. common
6
logic input 1
7
logic input 2
8
logic input 3
9
logic input 4
10
logic input 5
11
logic input 6
24
logic input 7
25
logic input 8
26
logic input 9
22
logic input common
21
+24VDC isolated
23
+24VDC iso. common
Figure 11: Logic Inputs Sinking Operation
(High True - Internal Supply)
Figure 12 shows the connection for using the
external voltage supply. And in this case the
voltage source common is positive side of the
external voltage supply.
Figure 10: Logic Inputs Sourcing Operation
(Low True - Internal Supply)
25
Interconnections
TB1
+24VDC
external
user
supply
6
logic input 1
7
logic input 2
8
logic input 3
9
logic input 4
10
logic input 5
11
logic input 6
24
logic input 7
25
logic input 8
26
logic input 9
22
logic input common
21
+24VDC isolated
23
+24VDC iso. common
The switches or contacts used to operate the
logic inputs may be replaced by logic outputs
from a PLC or car controller. If the outputs are
open collector, the ground is needs to be
connected to the proper voltage source
common.
For more information on the programming the
logic inputs, see Logic Inputs C2 on page 97.
As a reference, please refer to the table below
if replacing an HPV900 or HPV600 with the
HPV900 Series 2 drive.
Terminal
Description
Logic Input 1
Logic Input 2
Logic Input 3
Logic Input 4
Logic Input 5
Logic Input 6
Logic Input 7
Logic Input 8
Logic Input 9
Logic Input
Common
+24VDC
isolated
+24VDC iso.
Common
Figure 12: Logic Inputs Sourcing Operation
(Low True - External Supply)
Figure 13 shows the connection for using the
external voltage supply. And in this case, the
voltage source common is the negative side of
the external voltage supply.
TB1
+24VDC
external
user
supply
6
logic input 1
7
logic input 2
8
logic input 3
9
logic input 4
10
logic input 5
11
logic input 6
24
logic input 7
25
logic input 8
26
logic input 9
22
logic input common
21
+24VDC isolated
23
+24VDC iso. common
Logic Input Connections
HPV900
HPV900 HPV600
Series 2
TB1-6
TB1-1
TB1-16
TB1-7
TB1-2
TB1-17
TB1-8
TB1-3
TB1-18
TB1-9
TB1-4
TB1-19
TB1-10
TB1-5
TB1-20
TB1-11
TB1-6
TB1-21
TB1-24
TB1-7
TB1-22
TB1-25
TB1-8
TB1-23
TB1-26
TB1-9
TB1-24
TB1-22
TB1-10
TB1-15
TB1-21
TB1-11
TB1-13
TB1-23
TB1-12
TB1-14
Table 2: Logic Input Connections
Figure 13: Logic Inputs Sinking Operation
(High True - External Supply)
26
Interconnections
Relay Outputs
The HPV 900 Series 2’s two programmable
relay logic outputs are Form-C relays. They
have both normally open and normally closed
contacts.
The specifications for the relays are as follows:
 2A at 30VDC / 250VAC resistive
(inductive load)
For more on the relay specifications, see page
196.
Figure 15 shows the relay output terminals.
Logic Outputs
The HPV 900 Series 2’s four programmable
logic outputs are opto-isolated, open collector.
The outputs are normally open and can
withstand an applied maximum voltage of
50VDC. When the output becomes “true”, the
output closes and is capable of sinking up to
150mA between the logic output terminal and
the logic output common (TB1-12). Figure 14
shows the logic output terminals.
TB1
TB2
logic output 1
13
logic output 2
14
logic output 3
15
29
logic output 4
16
30
logic output common
12
27
relay 1
28
relay 2
31
32
Figure 14: Logic Outputs
Figure 15: Relay Outputs
For more information on programming the logic
outputs, see section Logic Outputs C3 on page
99.
For more information on programming the
relay outputs, see Logic Outputs C3 on page
99.
As a reference, please refer to the table below
if replacing an HPV900 or HPV600 with the
HPV900 Series 2 drive.
Terminal
Description
Logic Output 1
Logic Output 2
Logic Output 3
Logic Output 4
Logic Output
Common
As a reference, please refer to the table below
if replacing an HPV900 or HPV600 with the
HPV900 Series 2 drive.
Logic Output Connections
HPV900
HPV900 HPV600
Series 2
TB1-13 TB1-14
TB1-9
TB1-14 TB1-15
TB1-10
TB1-15 TB1-16
TB1-12
TB1-16 TB1-17
TB1-13
TB1-12
TB1-18
Terminal
Description
Relay 1 N.O.
Contact
Relay 1
Common
Relay 1 N.C.
Contact
Relay 2 N.O.
Contact
Relay 2
Common
Relay 2 N.C.
Contact
TB1-8
Table 3: Logic Output Connections
Relay Output Connections
HPV900
HPV900 HPV600
Series 2
TB1-27
TB2-51
TB2-51
TB1-29
TB2-52
TB2-52
TB1-28
TB2-53
TB2-53
TB1-30
TB2-54
TB2-54
TB1-32
TB2-55
TB2-55
TB1-31
TB2-56
TB2-56
Table 4: Relay Output Connections
27
Interconnections
Serial Connections
The HPV900 Series 2 supports serial data
communication between the control system
and the drive using both RS-422 & RS-484
interfaces and support multiple serial protocols
detailed on page 85. The serial terminations
should be as detailed in Table 5.
Encoder
The HPV 900 Series 2 has connections for an
incremental two-channel quadrature encoder.
The drive’s encoder circuitry incorporates
resolution multiplication and complimentary
outputs.
Drive Terminal/D-Type Pin
HPV900
HPV900
HPV600
Series 2
TX +
TB2-9
Pin 7
Pin 7
TX TB2-10
Pin 3
Pin 3
RX +
TB2-12
Pin 4
Pin 4
RX TB2-13
Pin 8
Pin 8
Comm
TB2-11
Pin 5
Pin 5
Table 5: Serial Connections
Incremental Encoder Wiring
Use twisted pair cable with shield tied to
chassis ground at drive end, in order to
minimize magnetic and electrostatic pick-up
current and to minimize radiated and
conducted noise.
Reasonable care must be taken when
connecting and routing power and signal
wiring. Radiated noise from nearby relays
(relay coils should have R/C suppressors),
transformers, other electronic drives, etc. may
be induced into the signal lines causing
undesired signal pulses.
Power leads and signal lines must be routed
separately. Signal lines should be shielded,
twisted and routed in separate conduits or
harnesses spaced at least 12 inches apart
from power wiring. This protects the cable from
physical damage while providing a degree of
electrical isolation. Also, do not run cable in
close proximity to other conductors, which
carry current to heavy loads such as motors,
motor starters, contactors, or solenoids. Doing
so could result in electrical transients in the
encoder cable, which can cause undesired
signal pulses. Power leads are defined as the
transformer primary and secondary leads,
motor leads and any 120 VAC or above control
wiring for relays, fans, thermal protectors, etc.
Continuity of wires and shields should be
maintained from the encoder through to the
controller avoiding the use of terminals in a
junction box. The shield and shield drain wires
must be insulated from other objects. This
helps to minimize radiated & induced noise
problems and magnetically induced ground
loops.
Always use an encoder with complementary
output signals. Connect with twisted-pair
shielded wire so that wire-induced currents will
self-cancel.
NOTE: DO NOT ground the encoder through
both the machine and the cable wiring.
Connect the shield at the receiver device only.
If the shield is connected at both ends, noise
currents will flow through the shield and
degraded performance will result.
Serial
Function
Figure 16 shows serial terminations when
using the RS-422 Interface
TB2
9
Tx (+)
10 T (-)
11 Common
12 Rx (+)
13 RX (-)
14 shield
Figure 16: Serial Terminations (RS-422)
Figure 17 shows serial terminations when
using the RS-485 Interface
TB2
9
Tx (+)
10
T (-)
11
Common
12
Rx (+)
13
RX (-)
14
shield
Figure 17: Serial Terminations (RS485)
USB Connection
The HPV 900 Series 2 has an onboard USB
Mini socket for PC connection to enable
uploading and downloading of parameters
using Mag Explorer. The driver for this USB
socket and also Mag Explorer Software is
available for free download from our website.
28
Interconnections
HPV 900 Series 2 Incremental Encoder
Specifications
The HPV 900 Series 2 requires the use of an
encoder coupled to the motor shaft. The
encoder power can be either a 5VDC or
12VDC supply. The capacity of each power
supply is the following:
 supply voltage:
12VDC
200mA capacity
 supply voltage:
5VDC
400mA capacity
The HPV 900 Series 2 can accept encoder
pulses of:
 500 to 10,000 pulses per revolution (ppr)
 a maximum frequency of 300kHz
Terminal
Description
A
/A
B
/B
Z
/Z
encoder +5
/+12VDC
encdr
common
Shield
IMPORTANT
Motor phasing should match the encoder
feedback phasing. If the phasing is not
correct, the motor will not accelerate up to
speed. It will typically oscillate back and forth
at zero speed, and the current will be at the
torque limit. Swapping A and /A or switching
two motor phases should correct this situation.
Incremental Encoder
Connections
HPV600
HPV900
Series HPV900 option
card
2
TB1-1
TB1-21
TB2-63
TB1-2
TB1-20
TB2-62
TB1-3
TB1-23
TB2-65
TB1-4
TB1-22
TB2-64
TB1-19
N/A
N/A
TB1-20
N/A
N/A
TB1-25
TB2-67
TB1-17
TB1-24
TB2-66
TB1-18
TB1-19
TB2-61
TB1-5
TB1-26
TB2-68
Table 6: Encoder Connections
Incremental encoder Voltage Selection
The HPV 900 Series 2 drive allows for either
an isolated +5VDC power supply or an isolated
+12VDC power supply. The drive is defaulted
with the +5VDC power supply. If the +12VDC
power supply is desired, change the jumper as
seen in the figure below from +5V position to
the +12V position
The encoder pulses per revolution must be
entered in the ENCODER PULSES parameter,
see Drive A1 Submenu on page 44.
The encoder connection terminals are shown
in Figure 18.
TB1
A
1
/A
2
B
3
/B
4
shield
5
encoder +5/12VDC power
17
encoder common
18
Z
19
EnDat Encoder Connections
/Z
20
The HPV 900 PM has an absolute encoder
option card that reads absolute rotor position
data and converts analog incremental
(sine/cosine) signals into standard quadrature
feedback signals. The drive’s encoder circuitry
incorporates resolution multiplication (8x). The
output quadrature signals are available for use
by the car controller.
+12VDC
+5VDC
Figure 19: Encoder Voltage Selection
Figure 18: Encoder Connections
As a reference, please refer to the table below
if replacing an HPV900 or HPV600 with the
HPV900 Series 2 drive.
29
Interconnections
absolute encoder option board supports
sine/cosine encoders (also called servo
encoders) with the 13-bit single turn EnDat 2.1
or 2.2 data interface with incremental signals
(EnDat01). The following Heidenhain
encoders can be used: ECN113, ECN1313,
ECN413, and ROC 413. For high pole count
gearless motors use encoders with high
incremental line count (2048).
Encoder Wiring
Use twisted pair shielded cable with shield tied
to chassis ground at drive end using the
ground clamp provided, in order to minimize
magnetic and electrostatic pick-up current and
to minimize radiated and conducted noise.
Reasonable care must be taken when
connecting and routing power and signal
wiring. Radiated noise from nearby relays
(relay coils should have R/C suppressors),
transformers, other electronic drives, etc. may
be induced into the signal lines causing
undesired signal pulses.
IMPORTANT
Motor phasing should match the encoder
feedback phasing for both absolute and
incremental feedback. The proper phasing
can be easily established through open loop
rotor alignment procedure. Refer to the open
loop alignment section for more details.
Swapping only incremental leads may be
insufficient to establish proper phasing.
Power leads and signal lines must be routed
separately. Signal lines should be shielded
and routed in separate conduits or harnesses
spaced at least 12 inches apart from power
wiring. This protects the cable from physical
damage while providing a degree of electrical
isolation. Also, do not run cable in close
proximity to other conductors, which carry
current to heavy loads such as motors, motor
starters, contactors, or solenoids. Doing so
could result in electrical transients in the
encoder cable, which can cause undesired
signal pulses. Power leads are defined as the
transformer primary and secondary leads,
motor leads and any 120 VAC or above control
wiring for relays, fans, thermal protectors, etc.
The encoder pulses per revolution must be
entered in the ENCODER PULSES (A1)
parameter from the encoder nameplate.
Encoder signal connections with Heidenhain
309778-xx cable are shown below.
to Heidenhain EnDat Encode r
TB2
Magnetek recommends using a 17-pin circular
(M23) flange socket paired with a Heidenhain
309778-xx cable. Also acceptable are:
encoder pigtail cable up to 1m in length fitted
with M23 (17-pin male) coupling (291698-25,
291698-26, or 291698-27) and paired with a
Heidenhain 309778-xx cable. Maximum length
of the encoder cable (including a pigtail cable,
if applicable) is 15 meters (50’).
NOTE: In cases where a pigtail cable is being
used, Magnetek recommends paralleling the
power and the power sense connections. For
connection diagram, see Figure 20.
TB1
65
A-_Sine
Shield
66
A_Sine
Common
60
67
B-_Sine
/A
61
68
B_Sine
A
62
/B
63
B
64
69
DATA-
59
70
DATA
71
CLK-
Sense-
75
72
CLK
Sense+
76
73
Common
Shield
77
74
+5V
Shield
78
46S04327-0010
Cable Shield Clamp at Drive Chassis
Figure 20: EnDat Encoder Option Card
Continuity of wires and shields should be
maintained from the encoder through to the
controller avoiding the use of terminals in a
junction box. The shield and shield drain wires
must be insulated from other objects. This
helps to minimize radiated & induced noise
problems and magnetically induced ground
loops.
The customer connections are 8 times the
encoder nameplate (i.e. 16384 for a 2048
encoder). The HPV 900 S2 PM EnDat
automatically accounts for the multiplication of
8 and the encoder nameplate data is required
in A1.
HPV 900 S2 PM EnDat Encoder Specifications
The HPV 900 S2 PM requires the use of an
encoder coupled to the motor shaft. The
30
Interconnections
The HPV 900 Series 2 provides common
mode noise rejection with the differential
analog inputs. The connection of these two
inputs is shown in Figure 22
TB2
Analog Inputs
The HPV 900 Series 2 has two nonprogrammable differential analog input
channels.
 Analog input channel 1 is reserved for the
speed command (if used).
 Analog input channel 2 is reserved for the
pre-torque command (if used).
The analog input channels are bipolar and
have a voltage range of 10VDC.
Available with the analog channels is multiplier
gain parameters (SPD COMMAND MULT and
PRE TORQUE MULT) and bias parameters
(SPD COMMAND BIAS and PRE TORQUE
BIAS). These parameters are used to scale the
user’s analog command to the proper range for
the drive software. The formula below shows
the scaling effects of these two parameters.
Speed Cmd
10VDC
PreTorque Cmd
10VDC
The scaling of the analog input signals follows:
 Speed Command
+10VDC = positive contract speed
-10VDC = negative contract speed
 Pre Torque Command
+10VDC = positive rated torque of motor
-10VDC = negative rated torque of motor
NOTE: The drive cannot recognize voltages
outside of the 10VDC on its analog input
channels. Speed
Signal
Speed Cmd
10VDC
PreTorque Cmd
10VDC
4
analog input 1 (-)
5
analog input 2 (+)
6
analog input 2 (-)
7
shield
2
analog common
3
analog input 1 (+)
4
analog input 1 (-)
5
analog input 2 (+)
6
analog input 2 (-)
7
shield
As a reference, please refer to the table below
if replacing an HPV900 or HPV600 with the
HPV900 Series 2 drive.
+10V
0V
-5V
-10V
effect of parameter
SPD COMMAND
BIAS = +5
analog input 1 (+)
Figure 23: Analog Inputs (Single Ended)
Drive Software
Uses
+10V to -10V
+5V
3
Figure 23 shows the connection for the analog
inputs, if they are configured to be single
ended. In this configuration, the HPV 900
Series 2 noise immunity circuitry is not in
effect.
TB2
For more on the multiplier gain or bias
parameters, see Drive A1 Submenu on page 44.
+10V
analog common
Figure 22: Analog Inputs (Differential)
signal
 analog



drive
 channel

 BIAS  MULT 
 input
software


 voltage

uses


Command
Input
+10V to 0V
2
effect of parameter
SPD COMMAND
MULT = 2
Analog Input Connections
HPV900
HPV900 HPV600
Series 2
analog common
TB2-2
TB1-29
TB1-2
analog input 1 (+) TB2-3
TB1-28
TB1-3
analog input 1 (-)
TB2-4
TB1-27
TB1-4
analog input 2 (+) TB2-5
TB1-31
N/A
analog input 2 (-)
TB2-6
TB1-30
N/A
shield
TB2-7
TB1-32
TB1-1
Terminal
Description
Table 7: Analog Input Connections
Figure 21: Analog Input Scaling
31
Interconnections
Electrical Installation
Input Power Connections
Terminals: R, S, and T provide connections for
AC input power.
Motor Lead Connections
U, V, & W terminals provide connection points
for the motor leads.
DC Choke Connections
Terminals +1 and +2 provide connection points
for a user supplied DC choke. A two position
removable link is provided to the pair of
terminals. With this link, the drive can be
operated without the use of a DC choke. All
HPV 900 Series 2 drives contain internal DC
reactors.
Brake Resistor Connections
Terminals B1 and B2 provide connection
points for an external user supplied braking
resistor. Connect the external brake resistor
between terminals B1 and B2. Terminals: +
and - are the positive and negative rails of the
DC bus (see Figure 25, Figure 26, Figure 27,
and Figure 28).
Equipment Grounding
A terminal block is provided for the required
user supplied equipment grounding.
Control Circuit
Observe the following precautions:
Refer to Figure 9 on page 24 for completing
encoder connections; analog inputs; logic
inputs; and logic outputs at the HPV 900
Series 2’s Control Board.
IMPORTANT
Parameter adjustments will have to be made
for the specific analog input, logic inputs, and
logic outputs to be used for the installation.
Analog Outputs
The HPV 900 Series 2 has two programmable
differential analog output channels. The two
analog output channels were designed for
diagnostic help. For more information on
programming the analog output channels, see
Analog Outputs C4 Submenu on page 102.
The analog output channels are bipolar and
have a voltage range of 10VDC.
Available with the analog channels is multiplier
gain parameters (ANA 1 OUT GAIN and ANA
2 OUT GAIN) and a bias or offset parameters
(ANA 1 OUT OFFSET and ANA 2 OUT
OFFSET). These parameters are used to scale
the user’s analog outputs to the proper range
for the drive software. The formula below
shows the scaling effects of these two
parameters.
analog
 signal



channel
 drive

 software  OFFSET   BIAS  output


 creates

voltage


The scaling of the analog output signals is
shown below.
The connection of these two inputs is shown in
Figure 24.
TB2
analog output 2
1
analog output common
2
analog output 1
8
shield
7
Figure 24: Analog Outputs
As a reference, please refer to the table below
if replacing an HPV900 or HPV600 with the
HPV900 Series 2 drive.
Terminal
Description
analog common
analog output 1
analog output 2
Shield
Analog Output Connections
HPV600
HPV900
HPV900 option
Series 2
card
TB2-2
TB1-34
AC
TB2-8
TB1-33
A1
TB2-1
TB1-35
A2
TB2-7
TB1-36
N/A
Table 8: Analog Output Connections
32
Interconnections
Figure 25: Main Circuit Block Diagram (230VAC 1-20HP cube)
Figure 26: Main Circuit Block Diagram(230vac 25-60HP)
33
Interconnections
Figure 27: Main Circuit Block Diagram (460VAC 1-20HP)
Figure 28: Main Circuit Block Diagram (460VAC 25-75HP)
34
Parameters
Parameters
Parameter Introduction
The digital operator keys operate on three
levels, the menu level, the sub-menu level and
the entry level. At the menu level, they
function to navigate between menus or submenus. At the sub-menu level, they navigate
between sub-menus or menu items. At the
entry level, they are used to adjust values or
select options. Six (6) keys are used for this
navigation, they are:
This section describes the parameter menu
structure; how to navigate this menu structure
via the HPV 900 Series 2 digital operator; and
a detailed description of each parameter.
Parameters are grouped under six major
menus:






ADJUST A0
CONFIGURE C0
UTILITY U0
FAULTS F0
DISPLAY 1 D0
DISPLAY 2 D0
READY
When the SUB-MENU LED is not lit, the
currently selected menu is shown on the top
line of the Digital Operator display and the
currently selected sub-menu is shown on the
bottom line of the Digital Operator display.
RUN
USER
FAULT
8:55
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
Left Arrow Key
Right Arrow Key
ESC
SUBMENU
TORQUE
LIMIT
May 20
USER
Up Arrow Key
ESCAPE Key
READY
RUN
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
ENTER Key
Down Arrow Key
A0 ADJUST
A1 DRIVE
Figure 29: Digital Operator Keys
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
The menu/sub-menu tree is shown below.
Display 1 D0
 Elevator
Data D1
 Power
Data D2
Adjust A0
 Drive A1
 S-Curves
A2
 Multistep
Ref A3
 Power
Convert
A4
 Motor A5
Configure C0
Utility U0
 User
Switches C1
 Logic Inputs
C2
 Logic
Outputs C3
 Analog
Outputs C4













Password U1
Hidden Items U2
Units U3
Ovrspeed Test
U4
Restore Dflts U5
Drive Info U6
Hex Monitor U7
Language Sel
U8
Basics U9
Alignment U10
Time U11
AutoTune U12
Power Meter
U14
Figure 30: Menu/Sub-Menu Tree
35
Faults F0
 Active
Faults F1
 Fault
History
F2
 Sorted
History
F3
 Reset
Faults F4
Display 2 D0
 Elevator
Data D1
 Power Data
D2
Parameters
READY
RUN
USER
8:55
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
READY
SUB MENU
READY
D1
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
READY
RUN
A1
SPEED COMMAND
0000.0
ft/min
RUN
USER
8:55
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
May 20
USER
FAULT
READY
TORQUE
LIMIT
READY
D0 DISPLAY
D2 POWER DATA
TORQUE
LIMIT
FAULT
ENTER
RUN
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
Spd Command Src
MULTI-STEP
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
USER
DATA ENTRY
8:55
ENTER
RUN
FAULT
May 20
ESC
C1
SUB MENU
A1
USER
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
Contract Car Spd
0400.0
ft/min
DATA ENTRY
RUN
8:55
8:55
ESC
READY
READY
ENTER
ESC
8:55
SUB MENU
TORQUE
LIMIT
C0 CONFIGURE
C1 USER SWITCHES
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
USER
FAULT
May 20
A0 ADJUST
A1 DRIVE
ENTER
RUN
USER
8:55
D0 DISPLAY
D1 ELEVATOR DATA
ESC
RUN
May 20
DATA ENTRY
ENTER
ESC
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:57
READY
C1
Contract Car Spd
0400.0
ft/min
RUN
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:57
Spd Command Src
serial
Min 0.0
Max 1500.0
SUB MENU
ESC
READY
D2
RUN
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
READY
RUN
8:55
USER
8:55
SUB MENU
RUN
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
READY
A2
MOTOR CURRENT
000 Amps
SUB MENU
TORQUE
LIMIT
READY
DATA ENTRY
RUN
RUN
USER
8:55
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
May 20
C0 CONFIGURE
C2 LOGIC INPUT
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
USER
FAULT
May 20
A0 ADJUST
A2 S-CURVES
ESC
READY
DATA ENTRY
ENTER
DC BUS VOLTAGE
000 VDC
D2
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
ENTER
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
READY
C2
Accel Rate 0
7.99
ft/min
DATA ENTRY
Figure 31: Operator Navigation
36
ENTER
ESC
8:55
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
RUN
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
Logic Input 1
DRIVE ENABLE
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
Parameters
Navigation at the Entry Level
When in the entry level, the DATA ENT LED
on the digital operator is lit. At the entry level,
the functions of keys are redefined. The
“ESCAPE” key remains as the key used to
move back to the higher level. The left and
right arrow keys are used as cursor positioning
keys and the up and down arrow keys are
used as increment and decrement keys.
Menus
Each menu has a number of sub-menus, see
Figure 30.
Menu Navigation
How these keys in Figure 29 operate is
dependent on the “level” (i.e. menu, sub-menu
or entry level.) In general, the “ENTER” and
“ESCAPE” keys control the level. That is the
ENTER key used to move to a lower level and
the ESCAPE key is used to move to a higher
level. The arrow keys control movement. With
the up and down arrow keys controlling vertical
position. And the left and right arrow keys
controlling horizontal position.
READY
A1
RUN
USER
FAULT
8:55
TORQUE
LIMIT
May 20
DATA ENTRY
Hidden Parameters
There are two types of parameters: standard
and hidden. Standard parameters are
available at all times. Hidden parameters are
for more advanced functions and are available
only if activated. Activation of the hidden
parameters is accomplished by setting of a
utility parameter, HIDDEN ITEMS U2. See
details in Hidden Items on page 112.
Navigation at the Sub-menu Level
When in the sub-menu level, the SUB-MENU
LED on the digital operator is lit. At the submenu level, the positioning keys work slightly
different than they did at the menu level. The
up and down arrow keys now select separate
items in the sub-menu.
A1
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
Contract Car Spd
0400.0
ft/min
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
DATA ENTRY
Upon exiting a sub-menu via the “ESCAPE”
key, the last item number is “remembered”.
The next time this sub-menu is entered, it is
entered at the “remembered” item number.
This feature can be used to obtain quick
access to two monitor values. Two menus one
labeled Display 1 D0 and one labeled Display
2 D0 has the same display items. One item
can be selected under the Display 1 menu and
another under the Display 2 menu. The left
and right arrow keys can then be used to move
back and forth between these two display
items. Remember, that the “remembering” of
sub-menus and sub-menu items is volatile and
is lost at power-down.
When any sub-menu is displayed, pressing the
“ENTER” key will place the operator in the submenu level.
RUN
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:57
SUB MENU
Each menu will remember the last accessed
sub-menu. The left and right arrow keys will
navigate between these last active sub-menus.
This remembrance of last active sub-menu is
volatile and will be lost at power down.
READY
FAULT
Min 0.0
Max 1500.0
A0 ADJUST
A1 DRIVE
SUB MENU
USER
Contract Car Spd
0400.0
ft/min
Navigation at the Menu Level
At the menu level, the up and down arrow keys
cause the display to show the sub-menus.
The side arrow keys cause the display to
select which menu is active. When the end is
reached (either up, down, left or right),
pressing the same key will cause a wrap
around.
READY
RUN
37
Closed Loop Parameters
Display D0
 Elevator Data D1




















Speed Command
Speed Reference
Speed Feedback
Encoder Speed
Speed Error
Est Inertia
Logic Outputs
Logic Inputs
Rx Logic In
Start Logic
Rx Com Status
Rx Error Count
Pre-Torque Ref
Spd Reg Torq Cmd
Tach Rate Cmd
FF Torque Cmd
Enc Position
Enc Revolution
DCP Command
DCP Status
 Power Data D2





















DC Bus Voltage
Motor Current
Motor Voltage
Motor Frequency
Motor Torque
Est No Load Curr %
Est Rated RPM
Torque Reference
Flux Reference
Flux Output
% Motor Current
Power Output
Slip Frequency
Motor Overload
Drive Overload
Flux Current
Torque Current
Flux Voltage
Torque Voltage
Base Impedance
Drive Temp
 Highest Temp
Adjust A0
 Drive A1





















Contract Car Spd
Contract Mtr Spd
Response
Inertia
Encoder Pulses
Mtr Torque Limit
Regen Torq Limit
Flux Wkn Factor
Trq Lim Msg Dly
Gain Reduce Mult
Gain Chng Level
Spd Dev Hi Level
Ramped Stop Time
Contact Flt Time
Contactor Do Dly
Flt Reset Delay
Flt Resets/Hour
Brake Pick Time
Ab Zero Spd Lev
Ab Off Delay
Brake Hold Time
 S-Curves A2








Accel Rate 0
Decel Rate 0
Accel Jerk In 0
Accel Jerk Out 0
Decel Jerk In 0
Decel Jerk Out 0
Accel Rate 1
Decel Rate 1
 Multistep Ref A3









Speed Command 1
Speed Command 2
Speed Command 3
Speed Command 4
Speed Command 5
Speed Command 6
Speed Command 7
Speed Command 8
Speed Command 9
 Speed Command 10
 Power Convert A4
 Input L-L Volts
 UV Alarm Level
 UV Fault Level
 PWM Frequency
 Motor A5





Motor Id
Rated Mtr Power
Rated Mtr Volts
Rated Excit Freq
Rated Motor Curr
 Motor Poles
38




















Overspeed Level
Overspeed Time
Overspeed Mult
Spd Dev Lo Level
Spd Dev Time
Up To Spd. Level
Zero Speed Level
Zero Speed Time
Up/Dwn Threshold
Notch Filter Frq
Notch Filt Depth
Run Delay Timer
Tach Rate Gain
Inner Loop Xover
Spd Phase Margin
Spd Command Bias
Spd Command Mult
Pre Torque Bias
Pre Torque Multi
Pre Torque Time
 Ext Torque Bias



























Accel Jerk In 1
Accel Jerk Out 1
Decel Jerk In 1
Decel Jerk Out 1
Accel Rate 2
Decel Rate 2
Accel Jerk In 2
Accel Jerk Out 2








Decel Jerk In 2
Decel Jerk Out 2
Accel Rate 3
Decel Rate 3
Accel Jerk In 3
Accel Jerk Out 3
Decel Jerk In 3
Decel Jerk Out 3










Speed Command 11
Speed Command 12
Speed Command 13
Speed Command 14
Speed Command 15
V0
VN
V1
V2
V3








V4
VI
Unlock Spd Level
Lvling Spd Level
Border Spd Level
Over Spd Level
Re-level Spd Hi
Re-level Spd Low




Extern Reactance
ID Reg Diff Gain
ID Reg Prop Gain
IQ Reg Diff Gain



IQ Reg Prop Gain
Load Sense Time
Fan Off Delay






Rated Mtr Speed
% No Load Curr
Stator Leakage X
Rotor Leakage X
Flux Sat Break
Flux Sat Slope 1






Flux Sat Slope 2
Ovld Start Level
Ovld Time Out
Stator Resist
Motor Iron Loss
Motor Mech Loss
Ext Torque Mult
Ana Out 1 Offset
Ana Out 2 Offset
Ana Out 1 Gain
Ana Out 2 Gain
Ser2 Insp Spd
Ser2 Rs Crp Spd
Ser2 Rs Cpr Time
Ser2 Flt Tol
Arb Start Time
Arb Decay Rate
ARB Inertia
ARB Torque Time
Mains Dip Speed
Mspd Delay 1
Mspd Delay 2
Mspd Delay 3
Mspd Delay 4
Mid Speed Lvl
 ARB Deadband
Closed-Loop Parameters
Configure C0
 User Switches C1




















Spd Command Src
Run Command Src
Motor Rotation
Encoder Connect
Encoder Fault
Cont Confrim Src
Fast Flux
Hi/Lo Gain Src
Ramped Stop Sel
Ramp Down En Src
S-Curve Abort
DB Protection
Spd Ref Release
Brake Pick Src
Brake Pick Cnfm
Motor Ovrld Sel
Stopping Mode
Auto Stop
Serial Mode
Ser2 Flt Mode
 Logic Inputs C2





Logic Input 1
Logic Input 2
Logic Input 3
Logic Input 4
Logic Input 5
 Logic Outputs C3




Logic Output 1
Logic Output 2
Logic Output 3
Logic Output 4
 Analog Outputs C4
 Analog Output 1
Utility U0




















Drv Fast Disable
Speed Reg Type
Brake Hold Src
Brk Pick Flt Ena
Brk Hold Flt Ena
Ext Torq Cmd Src
Fault Reset Src
Overspd Test Src
Pretorque Source
Pretorque Latch
Ptorq Latch Clck
Dir Confirm
Mains Dip Ena
Mlt-Spd to Dly 1
Mlt-Spd to Dly 2
Mlt-Spd to Dly 3
Mlt-Spd to Dly 4
Priority Msg
Arb Select
Drive Enable Src
 Rec Travel Dir
 Logic Input 6
 Logic Input 7
 Logic Input 8
 Logic Input 9
 Password U1
 New Password
 Enter Password
 Password Lockout
 Hidden Items U2
 Hidden Items Enable
 Units U3
 Units Selection
 Ovrspeed Test U4
 Overspeed Test?
 Restore Dflts U5
 Rst Mtr Defaults
 Rst Drive Defaults
 Drive Info U6




Drive Version
Boot Version
Cube ID
Drive Type
 Hex Monitor U7
 Address
 Language Sel U8
 Language Select
 Basics U9
 Relay Coil 1
 Relay Coil 2
 User LED
 Drive Mode
 Time U11






 Analog Output 2
Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Second
 Power Meter U14




39
Motor Pwr
Regen Pwr
Energy Time
Energy Reset
Faults F0
 Active Faults F1
 Fault History F2
 Sorted History F3
 Reset Faults F4
 Rst Active Flts
 Clr Flt Hist
Permanent Magnet Parameters
PM Parameters
Display D0
 Elevator Data D1




















Speed Command
Speed Reference
Speed Feedback
Encoder Speed
Speed Error
Est Inertia
Logic Outputs
Logic Inputs
Rx Logic In
Start Logic
Rx Com Status
Rx Error Count
Pre-Torque Ref
Spd Reg Torq Cmd
Tach Rate Cmd
FF Torque Cmd
Enc Position
Enc Revolution
DCP Command
DCP Status
 Power Data D2



















DC Bus Voltage
Motor Current
Motor Voltage
Motor Frequency
Motor Torque
Torque Reference
% Motor Current
Power Output
D-Curr Reference
Motor Overload
Drive Overload
Flux Current
Torque Current
Flux Voltage
Torque Voltage
Base Impedance
Rated Excit Freq
Rotor Position
Drive Temp
 Highest Temp
Adjust A0
 Drive A1





















Contract Car Spd
Contract Mtr Spd
Response
Inertia
Encoder Pulses
Serial Cnts/Rev
Mtr Torque Limit
Regen Torq Limit
Trq Lim Msg Dly
Gain Reduce Mult
Gain Chng Level
Ramped Stop Time
Contact Flt Time
Contactor Do Dly
Flt Reset Delay
Flt Resets/Hour
Brake Pick Time
Ab Zero Spd Lev
Ab Off Delay
Brake Hold Time
Overspeed Level
 Overspeed Time
 S-Curves A2








Accel Rate 0
Decel Rate 0
Accel Jerk In 0
Accel Jerk Out 0
Decel Jerk In 0
Decel Jerk Out 0
Accel Rate 1
Decel Rate 1
 Multistep Ref A3









Speed Command 1
Speed Command 2
Speed Command 3
Speed Command 4
Speed Command 5
Speed Command 6
Speed Command 7
Speed Command 8
Speed Command 9
 Speed Command 10
 Power Convert A4






Input L-L Volts
UV Alarm Level
UV Fault Level
PWM Frequency
Extern Reactance
ID Reg Diff Gain
 ID Reg Prop Gain
 Motor A5


























Overspeed Mult
Spd Dev Lo Level
Spd Dev Time
Spd Dev Alm Lvl
Spd Dev Flt Lvl
Up To Spd. Level
Zero Speed Level
Zero Speed Time
Up/Dwn Threshold
Notch Filter Frq
Notch Filt Depth
Run Delay Timer
Tach Rate Gain
Inner Loop Xover
Spd Phase Margin
Spd Command Bias
Spd Command Mult
Pre Torque Bias
Pre Torque Mult
Pre Torque Time
Ext Torque Bias
Ext Torque Mult




























Accel Jerk In 1
Accel Jerk Out 1
Decel Jerk In 1
Decel Jerk Out 1
Accel Rate 2
Decel Rate 2
Accel Jerk In 2
Accel Jerk Out 2








Decel Jerk In 2
Decel Jerk Out 2
Accel Rate 3
Decel Rate 3
Accel Jerk In 3
Accel Jerk Out 3
Decel Jerk In 3
Decel Jerk Out 3










Speed Command 11
Speed Command 12
Speed Command 13
Speed Command 14
Speed Command 15
V0
VN
V1
V2
V3








V4
VI
Unlock Spd Level
Lvling Spd Level
Border Spd Level
Over Spd Level
Re-level Spd Hi
Re-level Spd Low







ID Reg Intg Gain
IQ Reg Diff Gain
IQ Reg Prop Gain
IQ Reg Intg Gain
Fine Tune Ofst
ID Ref Threshold
Flux Weaken Rate





Flux Weaken Lev
Align Vlt Factor
Brake Opn Flt Lv
Load Sense Time
Autoalign Volts
Fan Off Delay




Motor Mech Loss
D Axis Induct
Q Axis Induct
Trq Const Scale
Encoder Ang Ofst




Motor Id
Rated Mtr Power
Rated Mtr Volts
Rated Motor Curr
 Motor Poles
Rated Mtr Speed
Ovld Start Level
Ovld Time Out
Stator Resist
 Motor Iron Loss
40
Ana Out 1 Offset
Ana Out 2 Offset
Ana Out 1 Gain
Ana Out 2 Gain
Ser2 Insp Spd
Ser2 Rs Crp Spd
Ser2 Rs Cpr Time
Ser2 Flt Tol
Arb Start Time
Arb Decay Rate
ARB Inertia
ARB Torque Time
Mains Dip Speed
Mspd Delay 1
Mspd Delay 2
Mspd Delay 3
Mspd Delay 4
Mid Speed Lvl
Encdr Flt Sense
ARB Deadband
 Abs Ref Offset


Permanent Magnet Parameters
Configure C0
 User Switches C1





















Spd Command Src
Run Command Src
Motor Rotation
Encoder Select
Encoder Connect
Encoder Fault
Cont Confrim Src
Hi/Lo Gain Src
I-Reg Inner Loop
Ramped Stop Sel
Ramp Down En Src
S-Curve Abort
DB Protection
Spd Ref Release
Brake Pick Src
Brake Pick Cnfm
Motor Ovrld Sel
Stopping Mode
Auto Stop
Serial Mode
Ser2 Flt Mode
 Logic Inputs C2





Logic Input 1
Logic Input 2
Logic Input 3
Logic Input 4
Logic Input 5
 Logic Outputs C3




Logic Output 1
Logic Output 2
Logic Output 3
Logic Output 4
Utility U0




















Drv Fast Disable
Speed Reg Type
Brake Hold Src
Brk Pick Flt Ena
Brk Hold Flt Ena
Ext Torq Cmd Src
Fault Reset Src
Overspd Test Src
Pretorque Source
Pretorque Latch
Ptorq Latch Clck
Dir Confirm
Mains Dip Ena
Mlt-Spd to Dly 1
Mlt-Spd to Dly 2
Mlt-Spd to Dly 3
Mlt-Spd to Dly 4
Priority Msg
Arb Select
Drive Enable Src
 Rec Travel Dir
 Logic Input 6
 Logic Input 7
 Logic Input 8
 Logic Input 9
 Password U1
 New Password
 Enter Password
 Password Lockout
 Hidden Items U2
 Hidden Items Enable
 Units U3
 Units Selection
 Ovrspeed Test U4
 Overspeed Test?
 Restore Dflts U5
 Rst Mtr Defaults
 Rst Drive Defaults
 Drive Info U6




Drive Version
Boot Version
Cube ID
Drive Type
 Hex Monitor U7
 Address
 Language Sel U8
 Language Select
 Basics U9
 Relay Coil 1
 Relay Coil 2
 User LED
 Drive Mode
 Rotor Align U10
 Alignment
 Begin Alignment
 Alignment Method
 Time U11





Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
 Second
 AutoTune Sel U12
 AutoTune Select
 Power Meter U14
 Motor Pwr
 Regen Pwr
 Energy Time
 Energy Reset
41
Faults F0
 Active Faults F1
 Fault History F2
 Sorted History F3
 Reset Faults F4
 Rst Active Flts
 Clr Flt Hist
Open-Loop Parameters
Open-Loop Parameters
Display D0
 Elevator Data D1












Speed Command
Speed Reference
Speed Feedback
Encoder Speed
Logic Outputs
Logic Inputs
Rx Logic In
Rx Error Count
Enc Position
Enc Revolution
DCP Command
DCP Status
 Power Data D2
















DC Bus Voltage
Motor Current
Motor Voltage
Motor Frequency
Motor Torque
% Motor Current
Power Output
Slip Frequency
Motor Overload
Drive Overload
Flux Current
Torque Current
Flux Voltage
Torque Voltage
Base Impedance
Drive Temp
 Highest Temp
Adjust A0
 Drive A1































Contract Car Spd
Contract Mtr Spd
Encoder Pulses
Mtr Torque Limit
Regen Torq Limit
Trq Lim Msg Dly
Contact Flt Time
Contactor Do Dly
Flt Reset Delay
Flt Resets/Hour
Brake Pick Time
Brake Pick Delay
Brake Drop Delay
Brake Hold Time
DC Start Level
DC Stop Level
 S-Curves A2








Accel Rate 0
Decel Rate 0
Accel Jerk In 0
Accel Jerk Out 0
Decel Jerk In 0
Decel Jerk Out 0
Accel Rate 1
Decel Rate 1
 Multistep Ref A3









Speed Command 1
Speed Command 2
Speed Command 3
Speed Command 4
Speed Command 5
Speed Command 6
Speed Command 7
Speed Command 8
Speed Command 9
 Speed Command 10
 Power Convert A4







Input L-L Volts
UV Alarm Level
UV Fault Level
PWM Frequency
Extern Reactance
ID Reg Diff Gain
ID Reg Prop Gain
 IQ Reg Diff Gain
 Motor A5







Motor Id
Rated Mtr Power
Rated Mtr Volts
Rated Excit Freq
Rated Motor Curr
Motor Poles
Rated Mtr Speed
42
DC Stop Freq
DC Start Time
DC Stop Time
Overspeed Mult
Stalltest Level
Stall Fault Time
Slip Comp Time
Slip Comp Gain
Torq Boost Time
Torq Boost Gain
Up To Spd. Level
Zero Speed Level
Zero Speed Time
Up/Dwn Threshold
Spd Command Bias
 Spd Command Mult






















Accel Jerk In 1
Accel Jerk Out 1
Decel Jerk In 1
Decel Jerk Out 1
Accel Rate 2
Decel Rate 2
Accel Jerk In 2
Accel Jerk Out 2








Decel Jerk In 2
Decel Jerk Out 2
Accel Rate 3
Decel Rate 3
Accel Jerk In 3
Accel Jerk Out 3
Decel Jerk In 3
Decel Jerk Out 3










Speed Command 11
Speed Command 12
Speed Command 13
Speed Command 14
Speed Command 15
V0
VN
V1
V2
V3








V4
VI
Unlock Spd Level
Lvling Spd Level
Border Spd Level
Over Spd Level
Re-level Spd Hi
Re-level Spd Low







IQ Reg Prop Gain
ID Dist Loop Gn
IQ Dist Loop Gn
ID Dist Loop Fc
IQ Dist Loop Fc
I Reg Cross Freq
Dist Lp Off Freq






ILimit Integ Gn
Hunt Prev Gain
Hunt Prev Time
Switching Delay
Vc Correction
Load Sense Time
Fan Off Delay






% No Load Curr
Stator Leakage X
Rotor Leakage X
Motor Min Volts
Motor Min Freq
Motor Mid Volts





Motor Mid Freq
Ovld Start Level
Ovld Time Out
Stator Resist
Motor Iron Loss
Motor Mech Loss
Ana Out 1 Offset
Ana Out 2 Offset
Ana Out 1 Gain
Ana Out 2 Gain
Ser2 Insp Spd
Ser2 Rs Crp Spd
Ser2 Rs Cpr Time
Ser2 Flt Tol
Mains Dip Speed
Mspd Delay 1
Mspd Delay 2
Mspd Delay 3
Mspd Delay 4
Mid Speed Lvl
 Cont Dwell Time


Open-Loop Parameters
Configure C0
 User Switches C1
















Spd Command Src
Run Command Src
Motor Rotation
Encoder Connect
Cont Confirm Src
S-Curve Abort
DB Protection
Spd Ref Release
Brake Pick Src
Brake Pick Cnfm
Motor Ovrld Sel
Stopping Mode
Auto Stop
Stall Test Ena
Stall Prev Ena
Serial Mode
 Logic Inputs C2





Logic Input 1
Logic Input 2
Logic Input 3
Logic Input 4
Logic Input 5
 Logic Outputs C3




Logic Output 1
Logic Output 2
Logic Output 3
Logic Output 4
 Analog Outputs C4
 Analog Output 1
Utility U0















 Password U1
Ser2 Flt Mode
Drv Fast Disable
Brake Hold Src
Brk Pick Flt Ena
Brk Hold Flt Ena
Fault Reset Src
Overspd Test Src
Dir Confirm
Mains Dip Ena
Mlt-Spd to Dly 1
Mlt-Spd to Dly 2
Mlt-Spd to Dly 3
Mlt-Spd to Dly 4
Priority Msg
Drive Enable Src
 New Password
 Enter Password
 Password Lockout
 Hidden Items U2
 Hidden Items Enable
 Units U3
 Units Selection
 Ovrspeed Test U4
 Overspeed Test?
 Restore Dflts U5
 Rst Mtr Defaults
 Rst Drive Defaults
 Drive Info U6




 Logic Input 6
 Logic Input 7
 Logic Input 8
 Logic Input 9
Drive Version
Boot Version
Cube ID
Drive Type
 Hex Monitor U7
 Relay Coil 1
 Relay Coil 2
 User LED
 Address
 Language Sel U8
 Language Select
 Basics U9
 Drive Type
 Analog Output 2
 Time U11





Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
 Second
 Power Meter U14




43
Motor Pwr
Regen Pwr
Energy Time
Energy Reset
Faults F0
 Active Faults F1
 Fault History F2
 Sorted History F3
 Reset Faults F4
 Rst Active Flts
 Clr Flt Hist
Drive A1 Submenu
Adjust A0 Menu
Drive A1 Submenu
NOTE: When Hidden Item appears with the
parameter description, it indicates that its
appearance in the list is controlled by the
HIDDEN ITEMS setting. See details on page
112.
NOTE: When Run lock out appears with the
parameter description, the parameter cannot
be changed when the drive is in the RUN
mode.
Name
Description
Units
Contract
Car Spd
(Contract Car Speed) This parameter
programs the elevator contract speed in feet
per minute (fpm) or meters per second (m/s)
Default
Contract
Mtr Spd
Responsei,ii
Inertiai,ii
Encoder
Pulses
Serial
Cnts/
Revii
Mtr Torque
Limit
(Contract Motor Speed) This parameter
programs the motor speed at elevator
contract speed in revolutions per minute
(rpm).
Range
Run
ENGLISH
(U3)
METRIC
(U3)
fpm
0.0 – 1500.0
400.0
-
m/s
0.000 – 8.000
-
0.000
Hidden
lock
Item
out
N
Y
N
Y
1130.0i,iii
rpm
0.0
0.0 – 3000.0
130.0ii
(Responsei,ii) This parameter sets the
sensitivity of the drive’s speed regulator in
terms of the speed regulator bandwidth in
radians. The responsiveness of the drive as
it follows the speed reference will increase
as this number increases. If the number is
too large, the motor current and speed will
become jittery. If this number is too small,
the motor will become sluggish.
(System Inertiai,ii) This parameter sets the
equivalent of the system inertia in terms of
the time it takes the elevator to accelerate to
motor base speed at rated torque.
(Encoder Pulses) This parameter sets the
pulses per revolution the drive receives from
the encoder. This value is directly from the
encoder nameplate.
rad/
seci,ii
1.0 – 50.0i,ii
10.0i,ii
Ni,ii
Ni,ii
seci,ii
0.25 – 50.00i,ii
2.00i,ii
Ni,ii
Ni,ii
N
Y
1024 i,iii
PPR
ii
(Serial Counts / Revolution ) This parameter
sets the number of discrete absolute
positions per rotor revolution that the drive
noneii
receives from the absolute encoder (if
applicable). The value for a 13-bit encoder
is 8192. All recommended Heidenhain
encoders will be 8192.
(Motoring Current Limit) This parameter sets
the maximum torque allowed when in the
motoring mode. This parameter may need
adjustment to reduce the effects of field
%
weakening. Units in percent of rated torque.
Note: The Torque Limit LED will be lit once
the limit defined by this parameter is
reached.
i
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
iii
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
ii
44
500 – 40000
10000 ii
0 – 25000ii
8192ii
Nii
Yii
0.0 – 275.0
200.0
N
N
Drive A1 Submenu
Default
Name
Description
Units
(Regenerating Current Limit) This
parameter sets the maximum amount of
regenerative torque the drive will see during
regeneration. This parameter may need
Regen Torq
%
adjustment to reduce the effects of field
Limit
weakening. Units in percent of rated torque.
Note: The Torque Limit LED will be lit once
the limit defined by this parameter is
reached.
(Flux Weakening Factori) This parameter
limits the maximum amount of torque
available at higher speeds. When the drive
is commanding higher speeds, this
parameter defines a percentage of the
Flux Wkn
defined torque limits (MTR TORQUE LIMIT
%i
i
Factor
and REGEN TORQ LIMIT). This parameter
is used to reduce the effects of field
weakening and reduce the amount of motor
current produced at higher speeds. Units in
percent of torque.
For further information, see page 57.
(Torque Limit Message Delay) This
parameter determines the amount of time
Trq Lim
sec
the drive is in torque limit before the “HIT
Msg Dly
TORQUE LIMIT” alarm message is
displayed.
i,ii
(Gain Reduce Multiplier ) This parameter
is the percent of ‘response’ the speed
regulator should use in the ‘low gain’ mode.
Gain
This value reduces the RESPONSE value
% i,ii
Reduce
when the drive is in ‘low gain’ mode. (i.e.
i,ii
Mult
setting this parameter to 100% equals no
reduction in gain in the ‘low gain’ mode).
See GAIN CHNG LEVEL on page 58.
i,ii
(Gain Change Level ) This parameter sets
the speed level to change to low gain mode
Gain Chng
% i,ii
(only with internal gain switch). See GAIN
i,ii
Level
CHNG LEVEL on page 58. Units in
percent of rated speed.
i
(Speed Deviation High Level ) This
parameter sets the level at which a speed
Spd Dev Hi
%i
deviation alarm will be declared. For more
i
Level
information, see SPD DEVIATION on page
59.
(Ramped Stop Time i,ii) Time to ramp torque
Ramped
from rated torque to zero. Note: this
sec i,ii
Stop Time parameter is used only with torque ramp
i,ii
down stop function. For more information
see RAMPED STOP TIME on page 59.
i
ii
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
45
Range
ENGLISH
(U3)
METRIC
(U3)
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
0.0 – 275.0
200.0
N
N
60 – 100i
100i
Yi
Ni
Y
Y
0.00 – 10.00
0.50
2.00
10 – 100 i,ii
100 i,ii
Y i,ii
N i,ii
0.0 – 100.0 i,ii
100.0 i,ii
Y i,ii
N i,ii
0.0 – 99.9 i
10.0 i
Yi
Ni
Y i,ii
N i,ii
0.00 – 2.50 i,ii
0.20 i,ii
0.50 i,ii
Drive A1 Submenu
Default
Name
Description
Units
(Contact Fault Time ) When external logic
outputs are used to control the closing of the
motor contactor, this parameter sets the
amount of time delay at start until the drive
output is enabled and current flows. And
Contact Flt
when external logic inputs are used to
Time
confirm the closing of the motor contactor,
this parameter sets the time allowed for the
contactor’s auxiliary contacts to reach the
user commanded state before a
CONTACTOR FLT occurs.
(Contactor Drop-out Delay) When the drive
controls the motor contactor via CLOSE
CONTACT logic output, this parameter,
Contactor
CONTACTOR DO DLY (A1), allows the user
DO Dly
to delay the drive’s dropout of the motor
contactor. The CONTACTOR DO DLY
Timer Delay starts when the speed regulator
release signal goes false.
(Fault Reset Delay) When the drive is set
Flt Reset
for automatic fault reset, this is the time
Delay
before a fault is automatically reset.
(Fault Resets per Hour) When the drive is
Flt Resets / set for automatic fault reset, this is the
Hour
number of faults that is allowed to be
automatically reset per hour.
(Brake Pick Time) If the brake pick fault is
enabled, this parameter sets the time
allowed for the brake pick feedback not to
match the brake pick command before a
Brake Pick BRK PICK FLT occurs. Also, when the user
Time
switch SPD REF RELEASE (C1) is set to
brake picked, this parameter determines the
amount of time the drive will command zero
speed after the RUN command is removed
(time allowed for the brake to close).
(Auto Brake Zero Speed Level i,ii) This
parameter sets the speed point that will be
considered as zero speed for the auto brake
function. The units are % of contract speed
and the parameter has a maximum value of
2.00% and a default value of 0.00%.
Ab Zero
i,ii
Spd Lev
i
ii
In order to use the Auto Brake function, a
logic output needs to be configured for
AUTO BRAKE (C3), the parameter SPD
COMMAND SRC(C1)=MULTI-STEP,SER
MULTI-STEP or SERIAL, the parameter
SPD REF RELEASE(C1)=BRAKE PICKED,
and the parameter BRAKE PICK
CFRM(C1)=INTERNAL TIME or EXTERNAL
TB1.
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
46
Range
ENGLISH
(U3)
METRIC
(U3)
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
sec
0.10 – 5.00
0.50
Y
N
sec
0.00 – 5.00
0.00
Y
Y
sec
0 – 120
5
Y
N
#
0 – 10
3
Y
N
sec
0.00 – 5.00
1.00
Y
N
% i,ii
0.00 – 2.00 i,ii
0.00 i,ii
Y i,ii
Yi
Drive A1 Submenu
Default
Name
Ab Off
i,ii
Delay
Brake
Pick
Delayiii
Brake
Drop
Delayiii
Brake Hold
Time
DC Start
iii
Level
DC Stop
iii
Level
i
ii
Description
Units
i,ii
(Auto Brake Off Delay ) This parameter
determines the time after zero speed is
reached (level determined by the AB ZERO
SPD LEV (A1) parameter) that the Auto
sec i,ii
Brake logic output goes false. The units are
seconds and the parameter has a maximum
value of 9.99 seconds and a default value of
0.00 seconds.
(Brake Pick Delayiii) When external logic
outputs are used to control the mechanical
brake, this is the time delay from a drive run
command until the brake is picked. This
seciii
time delay needs to be set for the following:
have DC injection current before the
mechanical brake is picked and have DC
injection current after the mechanical brake
is picked to allow the brake to fully open.
iii
(Brake Drop Delay ) When external logic
outputs are used to control the mechanical
brake and ramp to stop is selected, this
parameter sets the time delay to set the
brake after decelerating to the DC Stop
seciii
Freq. This time delay needs to be set for the
following: have DC injection current before
the mechanical brake is closed and after the
mechanical brake is picked to allow the
brake to fully open.
(Brake Hold Time) If the brake hold fault is
enabled, this parameter sets the time
sec
allowed for the brake hold feedback not
match the brake hold command before a
BRK HOLD FLT occurs.
(DC Injection Current Start Leveliii) The
level of DC injection current at start is a
percent of motor rated current. The DC
injection current will hold the motor shaft in a
%iii
fixed position as the drive outputs a DC
current to the motor. At the start, it is
important to have DC injection current
before the mechanical brake is picked to
allow the brake to fully open
(DC Injection Current Stop Leveliii) The level
of DC injection current at stop is a percent of
motor rated current. To hold the motor shaft
in a fixed position the drive will output a DC
current to the motor. At the stop, it is
%iii
important to have DC injection current
before the mechanical brake is closed and to
have DC injection current after the
mechanical brake is closed to allow the
brake to fully set.
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
47
Range
ENGLISH
(U3)
METRIC
(U3)
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
0.00 – 9.99 i,ii
0.00 i,ii
Y i,ii
Y i,ii
0.00 – 5.00iii
0.50iii
N iii
Y iii
0.00 – 5.00iii
0.50iii
N iii
Y iii
0.00 – 5.00
0.20
Y
N
Niii
Yiii
Niii
Yiii
0.0 – 150.0iii
0.0 – 150.0iii
80.0iii
50.0iii
50.0iii
Drive A1 Submenu
Default
Name
DC Stop
iii
Freq
DC Start
iii
Time
DC Stop
iii
Time
Overspeed
i,ii
Level
Overspeed
i,ii
Time
Overspeed
Mult
Stalltest
Leveliii
i
ii
Description
Units
ii
(DC Injection Stopping Frequency ) The
frequency at which DC injection begins to
occur when the drive is decelerating to a
Hziii
stop. If ramp to stop is selected and the run
command is removed, the drive decelerates
from its current speed to the DC stop
frequency and then DC injection is applied.
iii
(DC Injection Current Start Time ) The time
DC injection current is applied following a
valid run command until the release of the
speed command. After receiving a valid run
command the drive will maintain DC Start
Level current for Dc Start Time in seconds
seciii
before releasing the internal speed
reference allowing the drive to ramp up in
speed. At the start, it is important to have
DC injection current before and after the
mechanical brake is picked to allow the
brake to fully open.
(DC Injection Current Stop Timeiii) The time
the level of DC injection current at stop is at
DC STOP LEVEL. If ramp to stop is
selected, the drive will ramp down in speed
following removal of the run command to the
seciii
DC Stop Freq and will then output DC Stop
Level current for DC Stop Time seconds. At
the stop, it is important to have DC injection
current after the mechanical brake is closed
to allow the brake to fully close.
i,ii
(Overspeed Level ) This parameter sets
the percentage of rated speed the drive uses
(in conjunction with OVERSPEED TIME,
%i,ii
below) to determine when an OVERSPEED
FLT occurs. Units in percent of contract
speed.
i,ii
(Overspeed Time ) This parameter sets the
time that the drive can be at or above the
seci,ii
OVERSPEED LEVEL (A1), before the drive
declares an OVERSPEED FLT.
(Over Speed Multiplier) This parameter sets
%
the percentage of contract speed for the
OVERSPEED TEST (U4).
(Stall Test Leveliii) This parameter sets the
percentage of motor current the drive uses
(in conjunction with STALL FAULT
TIME(A1)) to determine when an STALL
%iii
FAULT occurs. In order for a STALL TEST
FAULT to occur, it must be enabled by the
STALL TEST ENA (C1) parameter. Units in
percent of rated motor current.
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
48
Range
ENGLISH
(U3)
METRIC
(U3)
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
0.0 – 10.0iii
0.5iii
Niii
Yiii
0.00 – 5.00iii
1.00iii
Niii
Yiii
0.00 – 5.00iii
1.00iii
Niii
Yiii
100.0 –
150.0i,ii
115.0i,ii
Yi,ii
Ni,ii
0.00 – 9.99i,ii
1.00i,ii
Yi,ii
Ni,ii
100.0 – 150.0
125.0
Y
N
0.0 – 200.0iii
200.0iii
Niii
Yiii
Drive A1 Submenu
Default
Name
Stall
Fault
Timeiii
Slip
Comp
Timeiii
Slip
Comp
iii
Gain
i
ii
Description
Units
(Stall Fault Timeiii) This parameter sets the
time that the drive can be at or above the
STALL TEST LVL(A1), before the drive
seciii
declares an STALL TEST FAULT. In order
for a STALL TEST FAULT to occur, it must
be enabled by the STALL TEST ENA (C1)
parameter.
(Slip Compensation Time Constantiii) Slip
compensation filter time constant. Adjusted
for slip compensation response and stability.
By increasing the value of the parameter,
the response time of the slip compensation
function will become slower. Reducing the
parameter to a lower value makes the slip
compensation function respond more
quickly. Note: Setting the parameter too
low may result in unstable motor operation
or setting the parameter too high will result
in very poor response.
seciii
NOTE: it is usually best to leave this
parameter set at default of 1.5 seconds.
Slip compensation allows an open-loop drive
to maintain constant motor speed regardless
of loading. The function adjusts the drive’s
output frequency (and output voltage) to
compensate for motor slip as the motor load
is increased. The compensation is based on
the motor rated speed, frequency and
calculated motor torque, therefore a valid
value must be entered for the Rated Motor
Speed (RATED MTR SPEED(A5))
(Slip Compensation Gainiii) Multiplier of
motor rated slip at rated torque. Setting the
parameter to 1.00 compensates the drive
output frequency by rated slip at rated
torque. Setting the Slip Compensation Gain
to 0.00 disables the slip compensation
function.
NOTE: it is usually best to leave this
parameter set at the default of 1.0.
Slip compensation allows an open-loop drive noneiii
to maintain constant motor speed regardless
of loading. The function adjusts the drive’s
output frequency (and output voltage) to
compensate for motor slip as the motor load
is increased. The compensation is based on
the motor rated speed, frequency and
calculated motor torque, therefore a valid
value must be entered for the Rated Motor
Speed (RATED MTR SPEED(A5))
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
49
Range
ENGLISH
(U3)
METRIC
(U3)
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
0.00 – 9.99iii
5.00iii
Niii
Niii
0.01 – 2.00iii
1.50iii
Niii
Niii
0.00 – 2.00iii
1.00iii
Niii
Niii
Drive A1 Submenu
Default
Name
Description
Units
(Torque Boost Time Constantiii) This
parameter is the torque boost filter time
constant. Adjusted for torque compensation
response and stability. Increasing the value
of the parameter, decreases response.
Reducing the parameter to a lower value
increases response.
NOTE: it is usually best to leave this
Torq
parameter set at the default of 0.5 seconds.
seciii
Boost
Torque compensation automatically boosts
iii
Time
the drive’s output voltage, in excess of the
programmed V/Hz pattern, as the load
demand increases. Torque compensation
counters the voltage drop in the motor stator
resistance. This function has the greatest
effect at low speeds improving load
response. When using torque compensation,
a valid value must be entered for the motor’s
no-load current (% NO LOAD CURR(A5))
(Torque Boost Gainiii) This gain controls the
differential term in the voltage boost
function. This affects the rate of response of
the torque boost. Setting the Torque Boost
Gain to 0.00 disables the torque boost
function.
NOTE: this function is defaulted off (TORQ
BOOSTGAIN=0.0). If adjustments need to
be made follow the guidelines listed in the
Torq
“Performance Adjustments” on page 157.
noneiii
Boost
iii
Torque
compensation
automatically
boosts
Gain
the drive’s output voltage, in excess of the
programmed V/Hz pattern, as the load
demand increases. Torque compensation
counters the voltage drop in the motor stator
resistance. This function has the greatest
effect at low speeds improving load
response. When using torque compensation,
a valid value must be entered for the motor’s
no-load current (% NO LOAD CURR(A5))
(Speed Deviation Lo Leveli,ii) Range around
the speed reference for speed deviation low
Spd Dev Lo
logic output. For more information, see SPD %i,ii
i,ii
Level
DEVIATION on page 59. Units in percent of
contract speed.
(Speed Deviation Timei,ii) This parameter
defines the time the speed feedback needs
to be in the range around the speed
Spd Dev
seci,ii
reference defined by SPD DEV LO LEVEL
i,ii
Time
(A1) before the Speed Deviation Low logic
output is true. For more information, see
SPD DEVIATION on page 59.
i
ii
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
50
Range
ENGLISH
(U3)
METRIC
(U3)
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
0.01 – 1.00iii
0.05iii
Niii
Niii
0.00 – 2.00iii
0.00iii
Niii
Niii
0.1 – 20.0i,ii
10.0i,ii
20.0i,ii
Yi,ii
Ni,ii
0.00 – 9.99i,ii
0.50i,ii
5.00i,ii
Yi,ii
Ni,ii
Drive A1 Submenu
Default
Name
Description
Units
(Speed Deviation Alarm Levelii) This
parameter sets the level at which a speed
Spd Dev
deviation alarm will be declared. For more
ii
Alm Lvl
information, see SPD DEVIATION on page
59.
(Speed Deviation Fault Levelii) This
parameter sets the level at which a speed
Spd Dev
deviation fault will be declared. For more
ii
Flt Lvl
information, see SPD DEVIATION on page
59.
(Up to Speed Level) This parameter sets
the threshold for the up to speed logic
Up to Spd.
output. This is only used to generate the up
Level
to speed logic output. Units in percent of
contract speed.
(Zero Speed Level) This parameter sets the
threshold for zero speed detection. This is
only used to generate the zero speed logic
output.
Zero Speed
Note: if DIR CONFIRM (C1) is enabled, this
Level
parameter also sets the threshold for the
termination of the test to confirm the polarity
of the analog speed command. Units in
percent of contract speed.
(Zero Speed Time) This parameter sets the
Zero Speed time at which the drive is at the ZERO
Time
SPEED LEVEL (A1) before zero speed logic
output is true
(Directional Threshold) This parameter sets
the threshold for the direction sense logic
outputs. If speed feedback does not reach
Up/Dwn
this level, the drive will not detect a
Thrshold
directional change. This is only used to
generate the direction sense logic outputs
(car going up and car going down). Units in
percent of contract speed.
(Notch Filter Frequencyi,ii) Notch filter
Notch Filter
center frequency. For more information, see
Freqi,ii
NOTCH FILTER FRQ on page 60.
(Notch Filter Depthi,ii) This parameter
determines notch filter maximum
attenuation.
Notch Filt
Note: A filter depth setting of zero (NOTCH
i,ii
Depth
FILT DEPTH (A1) =0) removes the filter.
For more information, see NOTCH FILTER
FRQ on page 60.
i
ii
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
51
Range
ENGLISH
(U3)
METRIC
(U3)
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
%ii
0.0 – 99.9ii
10.0ii
Nii
Nii
%ii
0.0 – 99.9ii
25.0ii
Nii
Nii
%
0.00 – 110.00
80.00
Y
N
%
0.00 – 99.99
Y
Y
sec
0.00 – 9.99
0.10
Y
Y
%
0.00 – 9.99
1.00
Y
Y
Hzi,ii
5 – 60i,ii
20i,ii
Yi,ii
Yi,ii
%i,ii
0 – 100i,ii
0i,ii
Yi,ii
Yi,ii
1.00
2.50
Drive A1 Submenu
Default
Name
Description
Units
Range
ENGLISH
(U3)
METRIC
(U3)
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
(Run Delay Timeri,ii) Allows the user to
delay the drive’s recognition of the RUN
signal.
internal connection
READY TO RUN
(logic output)
software ready
no faults
Run Delay
i,ii
Timer
Run recognition
delay
RUN or
RUN UP or
RUN DOWN
(logic input)
DRIVE
ENABLE
(logic input)
Drive
Internal
Signals
Speed
Regulator
and
Reference
Release
sec i,ii
0.00 – 0.99 i,ii
0.00 i,ii
Yi,ii
Yi,ii
0.0 – 30.0 i,ii
0.0 i,ii
Yi,ii
Ni,ii
0.1 – 20.0 i,ii
2.0 i,ii
Ni,ii
Ni,ii
45 – 90 i,ii
80 i,ii
Yi,ii
Ni,ii
-6.000 –
+6.000
0.000
Y
Y
Drive Internal
Signal
Run Confirm
CONTACT
CFIRM
(logic input)
(if used)
Tach Rate
i,ii
Gain
Inner Loop
Xoveri,ii
Spd Phase
Margini,ii
Spd
Command
Bias
i
ii
(Tach Rate Gaini,ii) This parameter can be
used to help reduce the effects of rope
resonance. It should be adjusted only after
the INERTIA (A1), and RESPONSE (A1)
has been set correctly.
The tach rate function is available for high
performance systems that exhibit problems
none
i,ii
with rope resonance characteristics.
This function subtracts a portion of the
speed feedback derivative from the output of
the speed regulator. The Tach Rate Gain
parameter (TACH RATE GAIN (A1)) selects
a unit less gain factor that determines how
much of the derivative is subtracted.
(Inner Loop Cross Overi,ii) This parameter
sets the inner speed loop cross over
rad/
sec i,ii
frequency. This parameter is only used by
the Elevator Speed Regulator (Ereg).
i,ii
(Speed Phase Margin ) This parameter
sets the phase margin of the speed regulator
degs
assuming a pure inertial load. This
i,ii
parameter is only used by the PI speed
regulator.
(Speed Command Bias) This parameter
subtracts an effective voltage to the actual
analog speed command voltage signal.
volts
signal
 analog



SPD
SPD
drive
 channel#1

 COMMAND  COMMAND 
 input
software

BIAS 
MULT
 voltage
uses


Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
52
Drive A1 Submenu
Default
Name
Spd
Command
Mult
Pre Torque
Biasi,ii
Pre Torque
i,ii
Mult
Pre Torque
i,ii
Time
Ext Torque
Bias i,ii
Description
Range
ENGLISH
(U3)
METRIC
(U3)
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
(Speed Command Multiplier) This parameter
scales the analog speed command.
signal
 analog



SPD
SPD
drive
 channel#1


COMMAND


COMMAND
 input

software


BIAS
MULT
 voltage

uses


i,ii
none
-10.00 +10.00
1.00
Y
Y
volts
-6.00 – 6.00 i,ii
0.00 i,ii
Yi,ii
Yi,ii
none
i,ii
-10.00 +10.00i,ii
1.00i,ii
Ni,ii
Yi,ii
seci,ii
0.00 – 10.00i,ii
0.00i,ii
Ni,ii
Ni,ii
volts
-6.00 – 6.00i,ii
0.00i,ii
Ni,ii
Ni,ii
-10.00 +10.00i,ii
1.00i,ii
Ni,ii
Ni,ii
-99.9 – +99.9
0.0
Y
N
(Pre-Torque Bias ) This parameter
subtracts an effective voltage to the actual
analog pre torque command (channel 2)
voltage signal.
 analog

 channel#2
 input

 voltage


PRE 
PRE

 TORQUE   TORQUE
BIAS 
MULT

i,ii

 analog

 channel#2
 input

 voltage


PRE 
PRE

 TORQUE   TORQUE
BIAS 
MULT

i,ii
software
uses
signal
drive

software
uses
(Pre Torque Time ) Time to ramp torque
from zero to pre-torque value. When set to
zero, Pre-Torque will be applied
immediately. This helps eliminate the
‘bump’ felt upon starting caused by the
torque being immediately set to rated pretorque. Setting this parameter to zero will
disable the Pre Torque Ramp Up function.
With a non-zero setting for Pre Torque Time,
the torque reference will be linearly ramped
from zero to the value given through the
Analog Input Channel or the serial channel.
(External Torque Biasi,ii) This parameter
subtracts an effective voltage to the actual
analog pre torque / torque command
(channel 2) voltage signal. For more
information, see Analog Inputs on page 31.

EXT 
EXT
 TORQUE   TORQUE
BIAS 
MULT

i,ii

i,ii
signal
drive
(Pre-Torque Multiplier ) This parameter
scales the analog pretorque command
(channel 2).
 analog
 channel#2

 input
 voltage
Ext Torque
i,ii
Mult
Units
i,ii
signal
drive
software
uses
(External Torque Multiplier ) This
parameter scales the analog pretorque /
torque command (channel 2). If this function
is set to 1.00, a 10V signal will call for 100% none
i,ii
torque. For more information, see Analog
Inputs on page 31.
 analog
 channel#2

 input
 voltage

EXT 
EXT
 TORQUE   TORQUE
BIAS 
MULT


signal
drive
software
uses
(Digital to Analog #1 Output Offset) Offset
for scaling Analog Output Channel #1.
Ana 1 Out
Offset
i
ii
 signal



ANA
ANA
 drive

software OUT
  OUT 


GAIN
 creates OFFSET 


analog
%
channel
output
voltage
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
53
Drive A1 Submenu
Default
Name
Description
Units
Range
ENGLISH
(U3)
Run
METRIC
(U3)
Hidden
lock
Item
out
(Digital to Analog #2 Output Offset) Offset
for scaling Analog Output Channel #2.
Ana 2 Out
Offset
Ana 1 Out
Gain
Ana 2 Out
Gain
Ser2 Insp
Spd
 signal



ANA
ANA
 drive

software OUT
  OUT 


GAIN
 creates OFFSET 


analog
channel
%
-99.9 – +99.9
0.0
Y
N
none
0.0 – 10.0
1.0
Y
N
none
0.0 – 10.0
1.0
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
180.0
Y
Y
0.50
Y
Y
output
voltage
(Digital to Analog #1 Output Gain) Adjusts
the scaling for the Analog Output Channel
#1.
NOTE: value of 1.0 = 0 to 10VDC signal.

 signal


ANA
ANA

 drive
OUT

OUT



software


OFFSET
GAIN

 creates


analog
channel
output
voltage
(Digital to Analog #2 Output Gain) Adjusts
the scaling for the Analog Output Channel
#2.
NOTE: value of 1.0 = 0 to 10VDC signal.
 signal



ANA
ANA
 drive


OUT

OUT

software



OFFSET
GAIN
 creates



analog
channel
output
voltage
(Serial Mode 2 Inspection Speed)
Used only with custom serial protocol (mode
2) When in Serial Mode 2, this parameter
ft/ min
0.0 – 100.0
defines the inspection speed to be used. To
run in inspection speed via serial mode 2
requires that the run command for inspection
speed come from two sources, a command
sent in a serial message and via hardware
m/sec 0.000 – 0.500
as a logic input defined as “SER2 INSP
ENA”.
(Serial Mode 2 Rescue Creep Speed)
Used only with custom serial protocol (mode ft/ min 0.0 – 300.0
Ser2 Rs
2) When in Serial Mode 2 and SER2 FLT
Crp Spd
MODE (C1)=rescue, this parameter defines
m/sec 0.000 – 1.540
the creep speed that will be used in the
“rescue mode”.
(Serial Mode 2 Rescue Creep Time) Used
only with custom serial protocol (mode 2)
When in Serial Mode 2 and SER2 FLT
MODE (C1)=rescue, this parameter defines
the maximum time the drive will continue to
Ser2 Rs
0.0 – 200.0
run at rescue creep speed (defined by SER2 sec
Cpr Time
RS CRP SPD (A1) parameter) when
reacting to a serial fault. The time is defined
as the time running at creep speed. It does
not include the time it takes to decelerate to
creep speed.
(Serial Mode 2 Fault Tolerance) Used only
with custom serial protocol (mode 2) When
in Serial Mode 2, this parameter defines the
sec
0.00 – 2.00
Ser2 Flt Tol
maximum time that may elapse between
valid run time messages while in serial run
mode before a serial fault is declared.
54
30.0
-
-
0.150
10.0
-
-
0.050
Drive A1 Submenu
Default
Name
Description
Units
i,ii
(Anti-Rollback Start Time ) ARB Start Time
(A1) is the dwell time between the logic
output SPD REG RLS and the brake starting
to pick. ARB will not become activated until
ARB START TIME (A1) has occurred.
Arb Start Setting this value too long will cause major
rollback to occur. Setting this value too
Timei,ii
short will cause ARB to begin while the
brake is still set. Adjust the ARB START
TIME (A1) to begin just as the brake is
lifting. For more information, see ANTIROLLBACK on page 61.
(Anti-Rollback Decay Rate i,ii) ARB Decay
Rate determines the slew rate for torque
while in ARB mode. The higher the value,
the more torque change may occur while the
Arb
lower the value, the less torque change may
Decay
occur. Setting this value to the maximum
i,ii
Rate
0.99 indicates limited decay. The faster the
brake lifts, the higher this value should be.
For more information, see ANTI-ROLLBACK
on page 61
i,ii
(Anti-Rollback Inertia ) ARB INERTIA (A1)
is the Inertia/Gain setting when the drive is
in ARB Mode. Setting this value too high
may cause instability in the motor. If the
ARB
motor growls or vibrates, lower this setting.
Inertiai,ii
Setting this parameter too low may cause
excessive rollback. It is best to start this
value at the same value of system inertia
(see INERTIA (A1)). For more information,
see ANTI-ROLLBACK on page 61
(Anti-Rollback Torque Time i,ii) This
parameter helps smooth out the torque
requirement from the drive to the motor.
With this set at zero, the drive will step up
ARB
torque as required to hold the motor. The
Torque
higher this value is, the smoother the torque
i,ii
Time
transition to the motor, however, the more
rollback may occur. For information on
setting ARB, see ANTI-ROLLBACK on page
61
(Mains Dip Speed Multiplier) This parameter
sets the percentage of contract speed for the
speed to be reduced when the drive goes
into ‘low voltage’ mode. The Mains Dip
function is enabled by the Mains Dip Enable
(MAINS DIP ENA(C1)) parameter. When
Mains Dip
the drive goes into ‘low voltage’ mode, it
Speed
reduces the speed by the percentage
defined by this parameter. ‘Low voltage’
mode is defined as when the drive declares
a UV alarm, which is defined by the Input
line-to-line voltage (INPUT L-L VOLTS(A4))
parameter and the Undervoltage Alarm
Level (UV ALARM LEVEL(A4)).
(Multi-Step Speed Delay 1-4) Determines the
Mspd Delay recognition time delay for a defined multi-step
1-4
speed command. For more information, see
p. 63.
55
sec
i,ii
none
i,ii
none
i,ii
sec
i,ii
Range
0.00 – 5.00
ENGLISH
(U3)
i,ii
0.000 – 0.999
i,ii
0.10 – 4.00
i,ii
0.000 – 1.000
i,ii
0.30
METRIC
(U3)
i,ii
0.900
1.00
i,ii
i,ii
0.015
i,ii
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
N
i,ii
Y i,ii
N
i,ii
Y i,ii
N
i,ii
Y i,ii
N
i,ii
Y i,ii
%
5.00 – 99.99
25.00
Y
N
sec
0.000 – 10.000
0.000
Y
Y
Drive A1 Submenu
Default
Name
Description
Units
(Mid Speed Level) This parameter sets the
Mid Speed level/threshold for mid speed detection. This
%
Lvl
is only used to generate the mid speed logic
output. Units in percent of contract speed.
ii
(Encoder Fault Sensitivity ) Determines the
percentage of voltage rise to occur before an
Encdr Flt
%ii
Encoder Fault occurs due to voltage rise at
ii
Sense
the beginning of run. Units in percent of
Rated Mtr Volts (A5)
(Anti-Rollback Deadbandi,ii) This parameter
determines the amount of encoder pulses
the drive will ignore before starting the ARB
ARBi,ii
noneii
sequence. Setting too low and you may
Deadband
experience motor noise especially at
balanced car, setting too high will result in
excessive rollback
For Magnetek personnel – This parameter
Abs Ref
sets angular offset for absolute position
degii
Offset ii
reference signal that can be used for
position feedback/ alignment testing.
(Contact Dwell Timeiii) When external logic
outputs are used to control the closing of the
motor contactor, this parameter sets the
amount of time delay from disabling the
Cont
drive outputs following a stop until the motor
seciii
Dwell
contactor opens. And when external logic
iii
inputs are used to confirm the closing of the
Time
motor contactor, this parameter extends the
time allowed for the contactor’s auxiliary
contacts to reach the user commanded state
before a CONTACTOR FLT occurs.
Range
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
iii
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
ii
56
METRIC
(U3)
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
0.00 – 110.00
80.00
Y
Y
10 – 100ii
30ii
Nii
Yii
0 – 20
i,ii
5
i,ii
N
i,ii
N i,ii
-180.00 –
+180.00 ii
0.00ii
Yii
Nii
0.00 – 5.00iii
0.50iii
Niii
Niii
Table 9: Drive A1 Submenu
i
ENGLISH
(U3)
Drive A1 Submenu
Detailed descriptions
FLUX WEAKENINGi
The HPV 900 Series 2 will calculate the rated
flux level by using the following motor
parameters:
 rated motor voltage
 rated motor current
 rated excitation frequency
 stator resistance
 stator and rotor leakage reactances
As motor speed increases, the drive will
calculate the maximum available flux and
decrease the flux automatically. This ‘field
weakening’ will cause less torque to be
available during this time.
In the HPV 900 Series 2 , flux weakening
begins before the motor reaches rated speed.
The drive can supply more than 100% current,
since the CEMF is lower. Therefore, the drive
can produce more than 100% of the motor’s
rated torque at the rated speed.
However, this increased torque capability
requires more than 100% motor current to
produce 100% torque at rated speed.
The highest of the two torque limits is used as
the torque limit that defines the two curves.
An example of the effects of the torque limit on
the amount of flux weakening needed and the
amount of torque available through the entire
speed range is shown below.
By lowering the torque limit you can effectively
reduce the amount of field weakening needed
and reduce the amount of current needed by
the motor at motor’s rated speed. The tradeoff is you have lower over-all torque available.
In order to have more torque available at the
lower speeds, the HPV 900 Series 2 has the
Flux Weakening Factor parameter, which
effectively reduces the amount of torque
available only at the higher speeds. This will
allow the HPV 900 Series 2 to have a higher
flux level at the motor’s rated speed and
require less current to produce rated torque.
An example of the effects of the flux
weakening factor on the amount of flux
weakening needed and the amount of torque
available through the entire speed range is
also shown below
The maximum amount of torque available can
be defined as the following:
 At low speeds…
the torque limit parameters
 At high speeds…
function of the torque limit parameters and
the flux weakening factor
Flux Weakening Parameters
The following three HPV 900 Series 2
parameters affect both the available torque
curve and flux level curve:
 Motor Torque Limit
 Regenerative Mode Torque Limit
 Flux Weakening Factor
torque capability &
flux level
250 %
Available Torque Curve
(limit 250%)
A,B
A
Available Torque Curve
200 % (limit 200%)
B
C
A
torque limit = 250%
flux weakening factor = 100%
B,C
B
torque limit = 250%
flux weakening factor = 80%
Flux Curve
100 %
B,C
A,B,C
A
100 %
i
ii
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) only
iii
57
C
torque limit = 200%
flux weakening factor = 100%
speed
Drive A1 Submenu
GAIN CHNG LEVELi,ii
(Gain Change Level)
Note: This parameter is only accessible and
usable when the drive is set for Closed Loop
Operation.

With the drive set to internal control, the speed
regulator will go into ‘low gain’ mode when the
drive senses the motor is above a defined
speed level. The defined speed level is
determined by the gain change level
parameter.
When the gain control is set to internal, the
drive will control the high/low gain switch. This
parameter sets the speed reference level,
when the drive is in ‘low gain’ mode.
The speed regulator high / low gain function
was developed in response to high
performance elevator requirements where the
resonant nature of the elevator system
interferes with the speed response of the drive.
An example of internal high / low gain control
is shown below.
HPV 900 Series 2 Parameter
Settings
HI/LO GAIN SRC = internal
GAIN REDUCE MULT = 80%
GAIN CHNG LEVEL = 10 %
When the speed response (gain) is set to high
levels, the resonant characteristics created by
the spring action of the elevator ropes can
cause car vibration. To solve this problem, the
speed regulator is set to a low enough
response (gain) so that the resonant
characteristics of the ropes are not excited.
10%
contract
speed
By using the gain reduce multiplier; the user
can specify a lower response (gain) for the
speed regulator when the drive is at higher
speeds. The gain reduce multiplier (GAIN
REDUCE MULT(A1)) tells the software how
much lower, as a percentage, the speed
regulator response (gain) should be.
0%
contract
speed
The high / low gain switch determines when
the HPV 900 Series 2 is in ‘low gain’ mode. In
the ‘low gain’ mode, the gain reduce multiplier
has an effect on the speed regulator’s
response (gain).
speed
reference
10%
contract
speed
low gain
mode
Response of
Speed Regulator
8.0 rad/sec
Response of
Speed Regulator
10.0 rad/sec
The high / low gain switch can be controlled
externally by either:
 a logic input
 the serial channel
The high / low gain switch can also be
controlled internal by:
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) only
iii
58
0%
contract
speed
Response of
Speed Regulator
10.0 rad/sec
High / Low Gain Example
The drive allows for the high / low gain switch
to be controlled either externally or internally.
The high / low gain source parameter (HI/LO
GAIN SRC(C1)) allows for this external or
internal selection.
ii
Response of
Speed
Regulator
8.0 rad/sec
100%
contract
speed
This is accomplished by controlling the
sensitivity or response of the speed regulator
via the high / low gain switch and gain reduce
multiplier.
i
the gain change level parameter (GAIN
CHNG LEVEL(A1)), which defines a
percentage of contract speed
Drive A1 Submenu
take for the drive to ramp from the rated torque
to zero torque.
SPEED DEVIATION
(Speed Deviation)
The following two functions are available to
indicate how the speed feedback is tracking
the speed reference.
 Speed Deviation Lowi,ii – indicates that the
speed feedback is tracking the speed
reference within a defined range.
 Speed Deviation Highi – indicates that the
speed feedback is failing to properly track
the speed reference.
 Speed Deviation Alm Levelii - the point at
which a Speed Deviation Alarm will be
declared by the software.
 SPD DEV FLT LVLii - the point at which a
Speed Deviation Fault will be declared
RAMPED STOP TIMEi,ii
(Ramped Stop Time)
This parameter is only used by the torque
ramp down stop function and sets the time to
ramp torque from rated torque to zero.
After the elevator lands and the brake is
applied, the torque ramp down function allows
the torque to ramp down at an even level. This
helps eliminate the ‘bump’ felt upon landing
caused by the torque being immediately
dropped to zero.
A function unique to elevators involves the
interaction between the motor torque and the
mechanical brake that holds the elevator.
Under full load conditions at the end of a run, if
the brake is set and the motor torque is
removed quickly, some brake slippage may
occur. Therefore, the option of gradually
reducing the motor torque is provided by the
Torque Ramp Down Stop function.
The Speed Deviation Low function has the
ability to set a configurable logic output (C3
Submenu). The logic output will be true, when
the speed feedback is tracking the speed
reference within a defined range around the
speed reference for a defined period of time,
see Figure 32. The defined range is
determined by the Speed Deviation Low Level
parameter (SPD DEV LO LEVEL(A1)) and the
defined time is determined by the Speed
Deviation Time parameter (SPD DEV
TIME(A1)).
Upon being enabled by the Ramped Stop
Select Parameter (RAMPED STOP SEL(C1)),
the torque command is linearly ramped to zero
from the value that was present when the
‘Ramp Down Enable’ was selected.
The Ramp Down Enable has the following
three possible sources:
 An input logic bit (EXTERNAL TB1)
 The run command removal
 The serial channel
The Speed Deviation High function
annunciates a Speed Deviation Alarm and has
the ability to set a configurable logic output,
see Logic Outputs C3 on page 99. The alarm
will be annunciated and the logic output will be
true, when the speed feedback is not properly
tracking the speed reference and is outside a
defined range around the speed reference.
The defined range is determined by the Speed
Deviation High Level parameter (SPD DEV HI
LEVEL(A1)).
The Ramp Down Enable Source parameter
(RAMP DOWN EN SRC(C1)) is used to select
one of the above options.
A method of providing the Ramp Down Enable
would be with a logic signal (EXTERNAL TB1)
that is dedicated to that function. The Ramp
Down Enable would be asserted while the Run
command is still present and remain there until
the ramp is completed, after which the Run
command would be removed.
The RUN LOGIC option to trigger the Ramp
Down Enable from the Run command is
provided. In this case, removal of the Run
command enables the Ramp Down Stop
Function.
The time it takes for the HPV 900 Series 2 to
perform its ramped stop is determined by the
Ramped Stop Time Parameter. The Ramped
Stop Time parameter (RAMPED STOP
TIME(A1)) selects the amount of time it would
i
ii
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) only
iii
59
Drive A1 Submenu
Speed Deviation High
(Speed Deviation Alarm)
Speed Deviation Low
NOTCH FILTER FRQ i,ii
(Notch Filter Center Frequency)
This parameter determines the notch filter
center frequency.
Speed
Notch Filter
Although originally created for gearless
applications where elevator rope resonance is
sometimes an issue, this filter affects the
torque command output of the speed regulator
and will filter out specific frequencies. By
filtering a specific frequency, the speed
regulator will avoid exciting a mechanical
resonance if one exists at that frequency.
Speed Feedback
Speed Deviation High
(Speed Deviation Alarm)
Figure 32: Speed Deviation Example for
CLOSED LOOP (U9) i
Speed Deviation Fault Level
Speed Deviation Alarm Level
Speed Deviation Low
Level
Speed Reference
There is attenuation across a range of
frequencies, not just at the set frequency, but
also to a lesser degree. The filter starts
attenuation at frequencies lower than the notch
frequency set point. When the notch
frequency is set to low values (less than 10
Hz), the filter can interfere with the desired
response of the drive. This can be exhibited
by minor increase in the rollback of the drive at
start and some deterioration in the ability of the
drive to track an s-curve reference. Generally,
this would not be an issue if the notch
frequency were set at or above 10 Hz.
Notch Filter Example
settings:
NOTCH FILTER FRQ (A1) = 20Hz
NOTCH FILT DEPTH (A1) = 50% and 100%
0
Speed Deviation Alarm Level
5
Speed Feedback
Speed Deviation Fault Level
Figure 33: Speed Deviation Example for PM
(U9)ii
10
Attenuation
15
(dB)
20
25
30
i
ii
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) only
iii
60
1
10
Frequency
(Hz)
100
Drive A1 Submenu
ANTI-ROLLBACK
Anti-Rollback is an independent function meant to calculate the amount of torque necessary to
hold the car when load weighing is not available. See Figure 34 for help in adjusting and setting up
ARB for a HPV900 S2 drive. Please note: ARB should be a final adjustment. All adjustments in
tuning the drive for smooth car ride (high speed, slowing and stop) should occur before attempting
to tune ARB.
CAUTION
ARB cannot be used in conjunction with PreTorque. PRETORQUE SRC (C1) = NONE when ARB
SELECT (C1) is set to ENABLE.
ARB START TIME
(A1)
Drive Enable Input
to Drive
Boost Input to Drive
Run Input to Drive
ARB Active
Spd Reg Rls (Output)
Brake Pick Delay
Start of
Brake Open
Torque Reference
Speed Command
Brake Closed
Drive On
Brake
Opening
Brake Fully
Opened
Figure 34: ARB Timing Diagram
1. Set car in middle of the hoistway so
rollback will not cause the elevator to go
past the final limits while adjusting ARB.
2. Verify the following parameters are set as in
the table below:
Parameter Name
Default
Value
Initial
Start
Value
ARB SELECT (C1)
DISABLE
ENABLE
ARB START TIME (A1)
0.00s
0.00s
ARB DECAY RATE (A1)
0.990s
0.990s
ARB INERTIA (A1)
1.00s
Set to
Inertia (A1)
ARB TORQUE TIME (A1)
0.01s
0.01s
5
5
ARB DEADBAND (A1)
3. Once Anti-Rollback has been enabled, six
parameters will help adjust the software to
work best in the application
ARB START TIME (A1) introduces a delay
to the start of the ARB sequence so that it
starts as the brake starts to pick. ARB will
not become activated until ARB START
TIME (A1) has occurred. Setting this value
too long will cause major rollback to occur.
Setting this value too short may cause
issues with the drive reacting to noise on the
speed feedback channels and start ARB too
early which may result in motor vibration.
Adjust the ARB START TIME (A1) to begin
just as the brake is lifting, a good starting
point is the same as BRAKE PICK TIME (if
used).
61
Drive A1 Submenu
ALARM! ARB START TIME HIGH
If this alarm is displayed, it is an indication
that ARB saw sheave movement before
ARB was active. Decrease the value of
ARB START TIME (A1) in this instance.
Sheave Movement
ARB TORQUE TIME (A1) determines the
angle of torque ramp applied when ARB is
introduced. The higher the number, the
smoother the torque will be introduced,
however, this may cause more rollback. if
set too low a bump may be felt in the car
as the torque is applied too sharply.
ARB DECAY RATE (A1) determines the
slew rate for torque introduction while in
ARB mode. The higher the value, the
more torque change may occur while the
lower the value, the less torque change
may occur. Setting this value to the
maximum 0.99 indicates limited decay.
The faster the brake lifts, the higher this
value should be.
ARB DEADBAND (A1) determines the
amount of encoder pulses the drive should
ignore before recognizing rollback is
occurring. Lowering this value may allow
the drive to catch rollback quicker however
it also makes it more likely to react to
electrical noise or mechanical float as
torque is applied to the motor, particularly
noticeable when the car is balanced.
4. Start by giving the car a zero speed
command with full load, worst case
scenario and adjust the above to achieve
as little movement as is possible without
causing the motor to growl. After the ARB
parameters have been adjusted, set the
car controller to give the drive a non-zero
speed command and fine tune if required.
The drive will exit ARB mode when it see
a non-zero speed command, adjust when
this non-zero speed command is given to
the drive to occur directly after the brake
has fully lifted.
5. For advanced setup, if the analogue
outputs are not in use and an oscilloscope
is available, set analog output 1 (gain of 1)
to ARB STATE and analog output 2 (gain
of 1) to TORQUE REF to help determine if
ARB INERTIA (A1), ARB TORQUE TIME
(A1) and ARB DECAY RATE (A1) are
optimized.
ARB START TIME
(A1)
Spd Reg Rls (Output)
Sheave Movement
Brake Start Opening Point
Figure 35: ARB Start Time set too long
ARB
START
TIME
(A1)
Instability may occur
due to noise
Sheave Movement
Brake Start Opening Point
Figure 36: ARB Start Time set too short
Once ARB Start Time has been adjusted to
occur right when the brake is beginning to
open, the next step is to adjust the ARB
INERTIA
ARB INERTIA (A1) is the Inertia/Gain setting
when the drive is in ARB Mode. Setting this
value too high may cause instability in the
motor. If the motor growls or vibrates, lower
this setting. Setting this parameter too low
may cause excessive rollback. It is best to
start this value at same value of system inertia
(see INERTIA (A1)) then slowly increase as
required.
Sheave Movement
ARB
ACTIVE
Major Rollback
Figure 37: ARB INERTIA (A1) too low
Begin by adjusting ARB START TIME (A1).
Below are some expected results based on
timing of this parameter
Spd Reg Rls (Output)
ARB
ACTIVE
Motor Growls
Figure 38: ARB INERTIA (A1) too high
62
Drive A1 Submenu
MSPD DELAY 1-4
(Multi-step Speed Delay)
These four parameters determine the
recognition time delay for a multi-step speed
commands defined by MLT-SPD TO DLY1-4
(C1) parameters.
Speed Command 2 commanded
(Slow down switch activated)
Zero speed commanded
(Stop switch activated)
When setting up an elevator, slow-down and
stop switches are set at fixed locations in the
shaft. Once the drive is tuned, it might require
the user to move the switches in the shaft in
order to minimize the time spent at leveling
speed. Under "normal” operation, the drive
speed reference follows the speed command.
By configuring for “delayed” operation and
setting speed command 1 for a delay (MLTSPD TO DLY 1 = MSPD 1), the recognition of
the speed command change from speed
command 1 to any other speed command (in
this case speed command 2) will be delayed
by the setting of MSPD DELAY 1 (A1)
parameter.
Speed Command 1
Speed Command 2
speed
command
speed
reference
(normal)
speed
reference
(delayed)
Speed Command 1
delay time = 0.3 sec
(MSPD DELAY 1 = 0.3 sec)
63
Travel time
saved
S-Curves A2 Submenu
There are four S-curve patterns available in
the drive and each S-curve is customized by
six parameters:
Parameters for S-curve-0 (SC0):
 ACCEL RATE 0, DECEL RATE 0, ACCEL
JERK IN 0, ACCEL JERK OUT 0, DECEL
JERK IN 0, and DECEL JERK OUT 0
Parameters for S-curve-1 (SC1):
 ACCEL RATE 1, DECEL RATE 1, ACCEL
JERK IN 1, ACCEL JERK OUT 1, DECEL
JERK IN 1, and DECEL JERK OUT 1
Parameters for S-curve-2 (SC2):
 ACCEL RATE 2, DECEL RATE 2, ACCEL
JERK IN 2, ACCEL JERK OUT 2, DECEL
JERK IN 2, DECEL JERK OUT 2
Parameters for S-curve-3 (SC3):
 ACCEL RATE 3, DECEL RATE 3, ACCEL
JERK IN 3, ACCEL JERK OUT 3, DECEL
JERK IN 3, DECEL JERK OUT 3
S-Curves A2 Submenu
Detailed descriptions
The HPV 900 Series 2 speed command is
passed through an internal S-curve in order to
produce the speed reference. In general, the
S-curve function takes an arbitrary speed
command and generates a speed reference
subject to the conditions that the maximum
accel, decel and jerk rates not be exceeded.
The speed command is typically the target
speed that the reference is headed to.
Note: If the car controller is feeding the drive a
speed profile including s-curves, the s-curve
settings on the drive need to be placed out of
the way. In those cases, set ACCEL RATE 0
and DECEL RATE 0 to the maximum (7.99
ft/s2 or 3.999 m/ s2) and set ACCEL JERK IN 0,
ACCEL JERK OUT 0, DECEL JERK IN 0, and
DECEL JERK OUT 0 to the minimum (0.0 ft/ s2
or 0.00 m/s2).
S-Curve Pattern Selection
The default S-curve pattern is S-curve-0
(SC0). To make the other patterns available,
the user must assign S-CURVE SEL 0 and/or
S-CURVE SEL 1 as logic input(s). The logic
input(s) can then be used to select one of the
S-curve patterns, as follows:
Below shows the six parameters associated
with an S-Curve data set:
 Accel- Maximum allowed acceleration rate
(ft/s2 or m/s2)
 Decel - Maximum allowed deceleration rate
(ft/s2 or m/s2)
 Accel Jerk In - Maximum allowed change in
acceleration towards Accel (ft/s3 or m/s3)
 Accel Jerk Out - Maximum allowed change
in acceleration from Accel (ft/s3 or m/s3)
 Decel Jerk In - Maximum allowed change in
deceleration towards Decel (ft/s3 or m/s3)
 Decel Jerk Out - Maximum allowed change
in deceleration from Decel (ft/s3 or m/s3)
The S-curves are specified by four parameters:
acceleration rate (ft/s2 or m/s2), deceleration
rate (ft/s2 or m/s2), leveling jerk rate (ft/s3 or
m/s3 ), and jerk rate (ft/s3 or m/s3 ).
Logic Inputs
Assigned
S-curves
Available
None
SC0 only
SEL 0 only
SC0 or SC1
SEL 1 only
SC0 or SC2
SEL 0 & SEL 1
SC0, SC1,
SC2 or SC3
S-curve Availability
logic input
S-CURVE
S-curve
SEL 1
SEL 0
selected
0
0
SCO
0
1
SC1
1
0
SC2
1
1
SC3
Selecting S-curves
Since an adjustable jerk rate is helpful for
smooth landings, the jerk rates are split for
ease in elevator fine-tuning. The jerk rate
parameters specify: acceleration from the floor
(ACCEL JERK IN), jerk out of acceleration
(ACCEL JERK OUT), jerk into deceleration
(DECEL JERK IN), and the leveling into the
floor (DECEL JERK OUT).
The jerk rates can be turned off by setting the
jerk rates to zero.
The accel / decel rates can also be turned off
by setting them to zero. But, setting the accel /
decel rates to zero is not recommended.
S-Curve
64
S-Curves A2 Submenu
Parameter
Description
Accel Rate 0
Acceleration rate limit
Decel Rate 0
Deceleration rate limit
Accel Jerk In 0
Rate of increase of acceleration, up to ACCEL
RATE, when increasing elevator speed
Accel Jerk Out 0
Rate of decrease of acceleration to zero when
approaching contract elevator speed
Decel Jerk In 0
Rate of increase of deceleration, up to DECEL
RATE, when decreasing elevator speed
Decel Jerk Out 0
Rate of decrease of deceleration to zero when
slowing the elevator to leveling speed
Accel Rate 1
Acceleration rate limit
Decel Rate 1
Deceleration rate limit
Accel Jerk In 1
Rate of increase of acceleration, up to ACCEL
RATE, when increasing elevator speed
Accel Jerk Out 1
Rate of decrease of acceleration to zero when
approaching contract elevator speed
Decel Jerk In 1
Rate of increase of deceleration, up to DECEL
RATE, when decreasing elevator speed
Decel Jerk Out 1
Rate of decrease of deceleration to zero when
slowing the elevator to leveling speed
Accel Rate 2
Acceleration rate limit
Decel Rate 2
Deceleration rate limit
Accel Jerk In 2
Rate of increase of acceleration, up to ACCEL
RATE, when increasing elevator speed
Accel Jerk Out 2
Rate of decrease of acceleration to zero when
approaching contract elevator speed
Decel Jerk In 2
Rate of increase of deceleration, up to DECEL
RATE, when decreasing elevator speed
Decel Jerk Out 2
Rate of decrease of deceleration to zero when
slowing the elevator to leveling speed
Accel Rate 3
Acceleration rate limit
Decel Rate 3
Deceleration rate limit
Accel Jerk In 3
Rate of increase of acceleration, up to ACCEL
RATE, when increasing elevator speed
Accel Jerk Out 3
Rate of decrease of acceleration to zero when
approaching contract elevator speed
Decel Jerk In 3
Rate of increase of deceleration, up to DECEL
RATE, when decreasing elevator speed
Decel Jerk Out 3
Rate of decrease of deceleration to zero when
slowing the elevator to leveling speed
Units
Range
Default
ft/s2
m/s2
ft/s2
m/s2
3
ft/s
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
3
ft/s
m/s3
ft/s2
m/s2
2
ft/s
m/s2
3
ft/s
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
3
ft/s
m/s3
3
ft/s
m/s3
ft/s2
m/s2
2
ft/s
m/s2
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
3
ft/s
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
2
ft/s
m/s2
2
ft/s
m/s2
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
3
ft/s
m/s3
ft/s3
0.00 – 7.99
0.000 – 3.999
0.00 – 7.99
0.000 – 3.999
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.00 – 7.99
0.000 – 3.999
0.00 – 7.99
0.000 – 3.999
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.00 – 7.99
0.000 – 3.999
0.00 – 7.99
0.000 – 3.999
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.00 – 7.99
0.000 – 3.999
0.00 – 7.99
0.000 – 3.999
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
3.00
0.800
3.00
0.800
8.0
0.60
8.0
0.60
8.0
0.60
8.0
0.60
3.00
0.800
3.00
0.800
8.0
0.60
8.0
0.60
8.0
0.60
8.0
0.60
3.00
0.800
3.00
0.800
8.0
0.60
8.0
0.60
8.0
0.60
8.0
0.60
3.00
0.800
3.00
0.800
8.0
0.60
8.0
0.60
8.0
0.60
8.0
m/s3
0.00 – 9.99
0.60
Table 10: S-Curve A2 Submenu
65
Run
Hidden
lock
item
out
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Multistep Ref A3 Submenu
An example of the use of the multi-step
command is as follows:
 All speed commands are positive.
 CMD0 specifies zero speed.
 CMD1 specifies leveling speed.
 CMD2 specifies inspection speed.
 CMD3 specifies an overspeed limit.
 CMD4 – CMD15 specify different top
speeds depending on number of floors in
the run.
Multistep Ref A3 Submenu
Detailed descriptions (non DCP
operation)
The multi-step speed reference function is one
possible way for the drive to accept speed
command. To use this function, the user can
enter up to fifteen speed commands (CMD1 –
CMD15) and assign four logic inputs as speed
command selections.
For typical use, the user will have all speed
commands to be positive, in which case a logic
input s (UP/DWN or RUNUP & RUNDOWN)
must also be specified to determine up or
down direction. It is possible for the user to
specify both positive and negative values for
CMD1 - CMD15, in which case logic input
bit(s) are not needed.
Note: CMD0 is reserved for zero speed,
therefore is not accessible to the user for
programming.
During operation, the user will encode a binary
signal on the four logic inputs that determines
which speed command the software should
use. The user need not use all four speed
command selection bits; if no logic input is
specified for one of the selection bits, that bit is
always zero. For instance, if no logic input is
specified for the most significant bit (B3), that
bit will be zero and the user can select from
CMD0 - CMD7.
Detailed descriptions (DCP operation)
If the drive is being controlled serially via DCP
(serial mode set to DCP3 or DCP4) then the
user has the ability to set 7 speed commands
within this menu. Additionally within this menu
the user can also adjust some additional DCP
specific threshold settings which are used to
provide feedback to the control system serially.
IMPORTANT
Since these speed commands are selected
with external contacts, a new command
selection must be present for 50ms before it is
recognized.
B3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
logic input
STEP REF
B2
B1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
B0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
During operation in DCP3 mode the control
system will select which speed command the
drive should run at serially, in which direction
the elevator should travel and will also will
remove the applicable high speed command
(V1, V2, V3 & V4) when approaching floor
level and replace with a leveling speed
command (V0). On nearing arrival at floor level
the control system will remove the V0 speed
command and the drive will slow the motor to a
stop, the brake will set and travel will complete.
multi-step
speed
command
CMD0
CMD1
CMD2
CMD3
CMD4
CMD5
CMD6
CMD7
CMD8
CMD9
CMD10
CMD11
CMD12
CMD13
CMD14
CMD15
During DCP4 operation the control system
largely leaves the drive to control the slow
down and stopping sequence by simply
advising the drive the exact distance from the
desired floor at any given point in time, the
drive than calculates based on its S-Curves
(A2) the point at which it must slow to allow the
elevator to stop directly at the floor level
without a leveling speed. When the machine
stops the brake sets and travel will complete.
Multi-step Selection
66
Multistep Ref A3 Submenu
Parameter
Description
Units
Range
Default
Speed Command 1i
Multi-step speed
command #1
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
Speed Command 2i
Speed Command 3i
Speed Command 4i
Speed Command 5i
Speed Command 6i
Speed Command 7i
Speed Command 8i
Speed Command 9i
Speed Command 10i
Speed Command 11i
Speed Command 12i
Speed Command 13i
Speed Command 14i
Speed Command 15i
V0ii
VNii
i
ii
Multi-step speed
command #2
Multi-step speed
command #3
Multi-step speed
command #4
Multi-step speed
command #5
Multi-step speed
command #6
Multi-step speed
command #7
Multi-step speed
command #8
Multi-step speed
command #9
Multi-step speed
command #10
Multi-step speed
command #11
Multi-step speed
command #12
Multi-step speed
command #13
Multi-step speed
command #14
Multi-step speed
command #15
Leveling Speed
Re-Leveling Speed
Parameter only accessible when SERIAL MODE (C1) is set to None, Mode1, Mode2 or Mode3
Parameter only accessible when SERIAL MODE (C1) is set to DCP3 or DCP4
67
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Multistep Ref A3 Submenu
Parameter
Description
i
Speed Reference 1
V1ii
V2ii
V3ii
V4ii
VIii
Unlock Spd Levelii
Lvling Spd Levelii
Border Spd Levelii
Over Spd Levelii
Re-level Spd Hiii
Re-level Spd Lowii
Speed Reference 2
Speed Reference 3
Speed Reference 4
Inspection Speed
When the elevator is
traveling at or below this
speed the drive will
advise the control
system serially (used for
pre-opening of doors)
When the elevator is
traveling at or below this
speed the drive will
advise the control
system serially (used by
the control system when
releveling with the doors
open)
When the elevator is
traveling at or below this
speed the drive will
advise the control
system serially (used for
speed monitoring on
approaching terminal
floors)
The drive advises the
control system serially if
the car exceeds this % of
contract speed
For Magnetek personnel
– Used when optimizing
final stopping sequence
(DCP4 only)
For Magnetek personnel
– Used when optimizing
final stopping sequence
(DCP4 only)
Units
Range
Default
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
0.00 – 600.0
8.0
m/sec
0.00 – 300.0
0.800
ft/min
0.00 – 600.0
3.0
m/sec
0.00 – 300.0
0.300
ft/min
0.00 – 600.0
10.0
m/sec
0.00 – 300.0
1.000
%
99.0 – 150.0
105
ft/min
0.00 – 600.0
000.5
m/sec
0.00 – 3.00
0.050
ft/min
0.00 – 600.0
000.5
m/sec
0.00 – 3.00
0.005
Table 11: Multistep Ref A3 Submenu
i
ii
Parameter only accessible when SERIAL MODE (C1) is set to None, Mode1, Mode2 or Mode3
Parameter only accessible when SERIAL MODE (C1) is set to DCP3 or DCP4
68
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Power Convert A4 Submenu
Power Convert A4 Submenu
NOTE: When Hidden item appears above a
parameter description, it indicates that its
appearance in the list is controlled by the
HIDDEN ITEMS setting. See details on page
112.
NOTE: When Run lock out appears above a
parameter description, the parameter cannot
be changed when the drive is in the RUN
mode.
Hidden
Item
Run
lock
out
N
N
80
Y
N
70
Y
N
10.0
N
N
0.0
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Default
Parameter
Description
(Input Line to Line Voltage) This
Input L-L Volts parameter sets the input voltage or
AC line input voltage to the drive.
(Undervoltage Alarm Level) This
parameter sets the level (as a
percentage of the INPUT L-L
UV Alarm Level
VOLTS) at which an under voltage
alarm will be declared. Units in
percent of nominal bus.
(Undervoltage Fault Level) This
parameter sets the level (as a
percentage of the INPUT L-L
UV Fault Level
VOLTS) at which an under voltage
fault will occur. Units in percent of
nominal bus.
(Carrier Frequency) This parameter
sets the PWM or ‘carrier’ frequency
of the drive. The carrier is defaulted
at 10.0 kHz, which is well out of
PWM
audible range. The drive does not
Frequency
derate when the PWM frequency is
set to 10kHz or below. For more
information on derating see page
15.
(External Reactance) This
parameter sets the externally
Extern
connected reactance (as a
Reactance
percentage of base impedance)
between the drive and the motor.
Units in percent of reactance.
(Current Regulator Differential Gain
for Flux Generation)
The differential gain for the current
regulator flux generation. This
Id Reg Diff Gain
parameter is meant for advanced
operation; therefore, the parameter
will rarely need to be changed from
the default value.
(Current Regulator Proportional
Gain for Flux Generation) The
proportional gain for the current
Id Reg Prop
regulator flux generation. This
Gain
parameter is meant for advanced
operation; therefore, the parameter
will rarely need to be changed from
the default value.
Units
Range
Vrms
110 – 480
%
50 – 99
90
%
40 – 99
80
kHz
2.5 – 16.0
%
0.0 – 10.0
METRIC
(U3)
ENGLISH
(U3)
0
1.00i,iii
none
0.00 – 1.20
0.00ii
0.30
none
i,iii
0.15 – 3.00
0.700 ii
i
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
iii
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
ii
69
Pwr Convert A4 Submenu
Default
Parameter
Description
Units
(Current Regulator Integral Gain for
Flux Generationii) The integral gain
for the current regulator flux
Id Reg Intg
generation. This parameter is
ii
none
ii
Gain
meant for advanced operation,
therefore, the parameter will rarely
need to be changed from the default
value.
(Current Regulator Differential Gain
for Torque Generation) The
differential gain for the current
regulation of motor torque. This
Iq Reg Diff Gain
none
parameter is meant for advanced
operation; therefore, the parameter
will rarely need to be changed from
the default value.
(Current Regulator Proportional
Gain for Torque Generation) The
proportional gain for the current
Iq Reg Prop
regulator torque generation. This
none
Gain
parameter is meant for advanced
operation; therefore, the parameter
will rarely need to be changed from
the default value.
(Current Regulator Integral Gain for
ii
Torque Generation )The integral
gain for the current regulator torque
Iq Reg Intg generation. This parameter is
noneii
ii
Gain
meant for advanced operation,
therefore, the parameter will rarely
need to be changed from the default
value.
This parameter is used to manually
offset the absolute position
feedback for testing purposes. This
parameter is only valid when
Fine Tune
ENCODER SELECT (C1) =
degii
Ofstii
ENDAT. WARNING: Changing this
parameter can lead to motor
runaway. It should always be set to
zero for normal operation. Locked
by ENGR PARM LOCK (C1).
For Magnetek personnel – This
parameter is used to manually set
non-zero current reference for flux
Id Ref
production. This needs to be zero
ii
none
Threshldii
for normal operation as flux in PM
motors is produced by permanent
magnets. Locked by ENGR PARM
LOCK (C1).
i
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
iii
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
ii
70
Range
0.00 – 2.00ii
ENGLISH
(U3)
METRIC
(U3)
1.00ii
1.00
Hidden
Item
Run
lock
out
N
ii
Nii
Y
N
Y
N
i,iii
0.00 – 1.20
0.00 ii
0.30 i,iii
0.15 – 3.00
0.700 ii
0.00 – 2.00ii
1.00ii
Nii
Nii
-75.00 –
+75.00ii
0.00
ii
Yii
Nii
0.00 – 0.20ii
0.00ii
Yii
Nii
Pwr Convert A4 Submenu
Hidden
Item
Run
lock
out
0.000
Yii
Nii
0.70 – 1.00ii
0.95ii
Yii
Nii
noneii
0.05 – 1.99ii
1.00ii
Nii
Nii
%ii
0.0 – 20.0ii
2.0ii
Nii
Nii
noneiii 0.00 – 1.50iii
0.50iii
Y
iii
Niii
noneiii 0.00 – 1.50iii
0.30iii
Y
iii
Niii
5.0iii
Y
iii
Niii
Default
Parameter
Flux Weaken
Rateii
Flux Weaken
Levii
Align Vlt
ii
Factor
Brake Opn
Flt Lvii
Id Dist Loop
iii
Gn
Iq Dist Loop
Gniii
Id Dist Loop
Fciii
Description
ii
(Flux Weakening Slew Rate ) This
parameter determines the slew rate
of the flux weakening controls. The
higher this parameter is, the faster
flux weakening will respond to the
voltage limit. Setting this parameter
to zero will disable it. For more
information, see Flux Weakening at
Voltage Limits on page 74. Locked
by ENGR PARM LOCK (C1).
(Flux Weakening Levelii)
This parameter determines how
close to the voltage limit the drive
will get before it will flux weaken.
For more information, see Flux
Weakening at Voltage Limits on
page 74. Locked by ENGR PARM
LOCK (C1).
(Open Loop Alignment Voltage
Reference Scaling Factorii) This
parameter is used to scale open
loop voltage reference at the initial
phase of the open loop alignment.
(Brake Fault Levelii) This parameter
determines the level of speed
feedback the drive sees before
declaring the fault BRAKE IS OPEN.
This is only valid during either the
Auto-Tune or Auto Alignment
procedures. Units are in percent of
contract speed.
(Distortion Loop Gain on Flux
iii
Current Generation ) This
parameter is meant for advanced
operation; therefore, the parameter
will rarely need to be changed from
the default value.
(Distortion Loop Gain on Torque
Current Generationiii) This
parameter is meant for advanced
operation; therefore, the parameter
will rarely need to be changed from
the default value.
(Corner Frequency on Distortion
iii
Loop for Flux Current ) This
parameter is the high-pass corner
frequency on the distortion loop
regulator for flux current. This
parameter is meant for advanced
operation; therefore, the parameter
will rarely need to be changed from
the default value.
Units
Range
noneii
0.000 –
1.000ii
noneii
seciii
i
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
iii
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
ii
71
0.1 – 30.0iii
ENGLISH
(U3)
METRIC
(U3)
ii
Pwr Convert A4 Submenu
Default
Parameter
Description
Units
Range
(Corner Frequency on Distortion
Loop for Torque Currentiii) The
parameter is the high-pass corner
frequency on the distortion loop
Iq Dist Loop
seciii
0.1 – 30.0iii
regulator for torque current. This
iii
Fc
parameter is meant for advanced
operation; therefore, the parameter
will rarely need to be changed from
the default value.
(Current Regulator Crossover
Frequencyiii) Transition frequency
between control at low frequency
and higher frequency. This
I Reg Cross
iii
0.0 – 300.0iii
%
parameter is meant for advanced
iii
Freq
operation; therefore, the parameter
will rarely need to be changed from
the default value. Units in percent
of DC Stop Freq.
(Distortion Loop Rolloff Frequencyiii)
The frequency at which the
distortion loops begins to be phased
Dist Lp Off
Hziii
0.0 – 99.9iii
out. This parameter is meant for
iii
Freq
advanced operation; therefore, the
parameter will rarely need to be
changed from the default value.
(Current Limit Integral Gainiii) The
Stall Prevention (Current Limit)
function’s integral gain. This
determines the response of the
function. Stall prevention causes
the drive to deviate from the
commanded speed to limit motor
current to a user set level. When
the motoring current limit is reached
ILimit Integ (MTR TORQUE LIMIT(A1)), the stall
iii
0.00 – 9.99iii
none
iii
Gn
prevention function will reduce
speed. When the regenerating
current limit is reached (REGEN
TORQ LIMIT(A1)), the stall
prevention function will increase
speed in an effort to shed load. Stall
prevention can optionally be
disabled in regeneration by the Stall
Prevention Regen Enable (STALLP
REGEN ENA(C1)) parameter.
i
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
iii
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
ii
72
ENGLISH
(U3)
METRIC
(U3)
Hidden
Item
5.0iii
Y
100.0iii
Y
60.0iii
Y
1.00iii
N
Run
lock
out
iii
Niii
iii
Niii
iii
Niii
iii
Niii
Pwr Convert A4 Submenu
Default
Parameter
Hunt Prev
iii
Gain
Hunt Prev
Timeiii
Switching
iii
Delay
Vc
iii
Correction
Load Sense
Time
Description
Units
Range
iii
(Hunt Prevent Gain ) Determines
the response to changes in torque
(torque slew rate gain). Increasing
the gain slows drive torque
response (more dampening). Be
cautious not to set the parameter
too high or the drive will become
unstable.
NOTE: it is usually best to leave this
noneiii 0.00 – 4.00iii
parameter set at the default of 1.0
second.
Hunting can occur following a load
change, but it may also occur when
the motor is settling into a steady
speed. Hunting may cause the
motor to vibrate at lower speeds.
The Hunt Prevention function will
help to reduce or suppress this
oscillation.
iii
(Hunt Prevention Time Constant )
Hunt prevention filter time constant.
Adjusted for hunt prevention
response and stability. By
increasing the value of the
parameter, the response time of the
hunt prevention function will become
slower. Reducing the parameter to a
lower value makes the hunt
prevention function respond more
quickly. Note: the function works
0.001 –
iii
better with a lower time constant.
sec
7.000iii
NOTE: it is usually best to leave this
parameter set at the default of 0.2
seconds.
Hunting can occur following a load
change, but it may also occur when
the motor is settling into a steady
speed. Hunting may cause the
motor to vibrate at lower speeds.
The Hunt Prevention function will
help to reduce or suppress this
oscillation.
iii
(Transistor Switching Delay ) This
iii
0 - 10iii
sec
parameter is hardware dependent
and should not be adjusted.
iii
(Conduction Voltage Correction )
This parameter is hardware
iii
0.00 – 5.00iii
V
dependent and should not be
adjusted.
(Load Sense Time) Load Sense
Sec
0.00 – 1.50
Time is only used when SERIAL
MODE (C1) = DCP3 or DCP4.
i
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
iii
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
ii
73
ENGLISH
(U3)
METRIC
(U3)
Hidden
Item
1.00iii
N
0.200iii
N
0iii
Y
2.50iii
0.00
Run
lock
out
iii
Niii
iii
Niii
iii
Niii
Y
iii
Niii
N
N
Pwr Convert A4 Submenu
Default
Parameter
Autoalign
Voltsii
Fan Off Delay
Description
(Auto Alignment Voltageii) This
parameter is used during Auto
Alignment. This parameter should
only be adjusted if a SPD DEV
FAULT following an auto alignment.
Default value is 10.
(Fan Off Delay) This parameter sets
the amount of time the drive will wait
after the run has been removed until
the fans turn off. Setting this value
to maximum of 999 indicates the
fans will never shut off.
Hidden
Item
Run
lock
out
Units
Range
%ii
5 – 20ii
10ii
N
ii
Nii
Sec
0 – 999
60
N
N
ENGLISH
(U3)
METRIC
(U3)
Table 12: Power Convert A4 Submenu
The parameter Flux Weakening Rate (FLUX
WEAKEN RATE, A4) is used to set how fast
flux weakening occurs when the output voltage
reaches the limit. Set this to a minimum value
that ensures successful acceleration of the
fully loaded car for more gradual flux
weakening.
FLUX WEAKENINGii AT VOLTAGE LIMITS
Flux Weakening Parameters
The following HPV 900 S2 PM parameters
affect flux weakening:
 Flux Weakening Slew (FLUX WEAKEN
RATE (A4))
 Flux Weakening Level (FLUX WEAKEN
LEV (A4))
With flux weakening enabled, the HPV 900 S2
PM will automatically adjust the current to keep
the output voltage from reaching the voltage
limits. The HPV 900 S2 PM can begin flux
weakening before the motor reaches the
voltage limit or at the very limit. The limit
depends upon the setting of FLUX WEAKEN
LEV (A4). The sooner the flux weakening
begins, the more voltage margin is available to
compensate transient disturbances. However,
the set point must be set higher than rated
motor voltage such that the full flux (NO flux
weakening) is available for cruising speed.
Permanent magnets are used to generate a
constant flux linkage in PM synchronous
motors. Under normal operating conditions,
the PM drive only controls torque production
as the machine is permanently excited.
Rarely, is there a need to reduce the flux level
in a PM motor.
However, with an elevator application, the
need may arise to reduce the flux level if the
input voltage to the drive is relatively low in
comparison to the maximum motor voltage.
The drive is capable of supplying more current
with the same terminal voltage as the counter
electromotive force (CEMF) is lower at a given
speed.
The flux weakening can also lead to an abrupt
reduction of torque producing capability of the
motor. Different motors have different flux
weakening capabilities. In some cases the
maximum torque increase cannot be achieved.
Even then, it may be worth using flux
weakening as it allows the drive to accelerate
to full speed on a compromised curve without
declaring current regulator fault.
In order to weaken the flux in a PM motor, an
additional current component is injected and
the current required to produce certain torque
will increase. This increased current demand
will reduce the efficiency of the system and
increase thermal stress on the drive and the
motor. For these reasons, flux weakening
should be used if only absolutely necessary.
This feature is disabled by default (FLUX
WEAKEN RATE (A4) = 0).
When the drive is flux weakening, the monitor
function D-CURR REFERENCE (D2) will be
negative. It is advisable to verify the reference
is zero when the car is running fully loaded at
constant speed.
i
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
iii
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
ii
74
Pwr Convert A4 Submenu
NOTE: When Hidden Item appears above a
parameter description, it indicates that its
appearance in the list is controlled by the
HIDDEN ITEMS setting. See details on page
112.
NOTE: When Run lock out appears above a
parameter description, the parameter cannot
be changed when the drive is in the RUN
mode.
Motor A5 Submenu
This sub-menu contains parameters, which are
programmed with information about the motor
being controlled by the drive.
IMPORTANT
The parameters in this sub-menu defined the
motor model, which is very important for
proper operation. Ensure that the data is
accurate.
Default
Parameter
Description
Units
Range
ENGLISH METRIC
(U3)
(U3)
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
(Motor Identification) This parameter
allows for the selection of motor
parameters. A listing of each Motor ID
with its corresponding set of motor
parameters is shown below.
motor parameter
Motor ID
Motor ID
6 pole
4 pole
i,iii
dflti,iii
dflt
Rated Mtr Power 0.0 HP 0.0 HP
Rated Mtr Volts
0.0 V
0.0 V
Rated Excit Freq 0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
Rated Motor Curr 0.0 A
0.0 A
Motor Poles
0
0
Rated Mtr Speed 0.0 rpm 0.0 rpm
% No Load Curr 35.00% 45.00%
Stator Leakage X 9.00%
7.50%
Rotor Leakage X 9.00%
7.50%
Stator Resist
1.50%
1.50%
Motor Iron Loss
0.50%
0.50%
Motor Mech Loss 1.00%
1.00%
Flux Sat Break
75%
75%
Flux Sat Slope 1 0%
0%
Flux Sat Slope 2 50%
50%
4 POLE
 4 pole dflti,iii DFLT i,iii
i,iii
none  6 pole dflt PM
 PM dfltii
Dfltii
Table 13: Motor ID Defaults
NOTE: The default motor selections need
to have the motor nameplate information
entered in the appropriate motor
parameters. The other motor parameters
are already set to nominal values.
IMPORTANT
Whichever Motor ID is used, the Adaptive
Tune Procedure should be followed to
obtain maximum motor performance. See
Using the Adaptive Tune on page 139 or
Auto Tune on page 153 to Obtain
Maximum Motor Performance.
i
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
iii
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
ii
75
4 POLE
DFLTi,iii
PM
Dfltii
Ni
Yi
Motor A5 Submenu
Default
Parameter
Description
(Rated Motor Power)
This parameter sets the rated power in
Rated Mtr
horsepower (HP) or kilowatts (kW) of the
Pwr
motor. Note: value should be obtained
from the motor nameplate
(Rated Motor Voltage)
Rated Mtr This parameter sets the rated motor
Volts
voltage. Note: value should be obtained
from the motor nameplate
(Rated Motor Excitation Frequencyi,iii)
This parameter sets the excitation
Rated Excit
frequency of the motor. Note: value
i,iii
Freq
should be obtained from the motor
nameplate
(Rated Motor Amps) This parameter sets
Rated
the rated motor current. Note: value
Motor Curr should be obtained from the motor
nameplate.
(Motor Poles) This parameter sets the
number of poles in the motor.
Motor
NOTE: This must be an even number or
Poles
a Setup Fault #3 will occur. Note: value
should be obtained from the motor
nameplate.
(Rated Motor Speed)
This parameter sets the rated rpm of the
motor (nameplate speed). NOTE: This is
a function of the motor only and does not
need to be the same as the CONTRACT
MTR SPD (A1) parameter setting. Note:
value should be obtained from the motor
nameplate. Rated Mtr Speed is defined
Rated Mtr as the synchronous speed minus the slip.
At times, the motor manufacturer will
Speed
place the synchronous speed on the data
nameplate. The Adaptive Tune
procedure on page 139 calculates the
amount of slip of the motor.
 rated 
120  excitation 
 frequency 
 synchronou s 


 speed of  

 motor
# of Poles


(Percent No Load Currenti,iii)
This parameter sets the percent no load
current of the motor. This parameter sets
the window (25%) around which the
% No Load
adaptive tune can adjust the motor’s
Currenti,iii
percent no load current. Units in percent
of current. For more information on the
adaptive tune, see Adaptive Tune on
page 139.
i
ii
Units
Range
ENGLISH METRIC
(U3)
(U3)
HP
1.0 – 500.0
0.0
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
N
Y
N
Y
kW
0.75 – 300.00
0.00
Volts
85.0 – 575.0
0.0
Hzi,iii
5.0 – 400.0i,iii
0.0i,iii
Amps
1.0 – 800.0
0.0
N
Y
none
2 – 128
4
N
Y
RPM
1.0 – 3000.0
0.0
N
Y
%i,iii
10.0 – 80.0i,iii per MOTOR IDi,iii
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
76
i,iii
N
i,iii
N
Yi,iii
Ni,iii
Motor A5 Submenu
Default
Parameter
Stator
Leakage
Xi,iii
Rotor
Leakage
Xi,iii
Flux Sat
i
Break
Flux Sat
i
Slope 1
Flux Sat
i
Slope 2
Motor
Min
Voltsiii
Motor
Min
Freqiii
Motor
Mid
Voltsiii
Description
i,iii
(Stator Leakage Reactance )
This parameter sets the stator reactance
leakage, as a percent of the BASE
IMPEDANCE, which appears in the
%i,iii
Power Data display. Note: The base
impedance is based on the RATED MTR
PWR and RATED MTR VOLTS
parameters.
(Rotor Leakage Reactancei,iii) This
parameter sets the rotor reactance
%i,iii
leakage, as a percent of the BASE
IMPEDANCE, which appears in the
Power Data D2 Submenu.
(Flux Saturation Break Point i)
This parameter sets the flux saturation
i
%
curve slope change point. Units in
percent of flux.
(Flux Saturation Slope #1 i)
This parameter sets the flux saturation
curve slope for low fluxes. Units are PU
PUi
slope 100%. NOTE: Performance may
be unstable if FLUX SAT SLOPE 1 is set
to 0 and FLUX SAT SLOPE 2 is set to 0.
(Flux Saturation Slope #2 i)
This parameter sets the flux saturation
curve slope for high fluxes. Units are PU
PU i
slope 100%. NOTE: Performance may
be unstable if FLUX SAT SLOPE 1 is set
to 0 and FLUX SAT SLOPE 2 is set to 0.
(V/Hz Pattern Voltage at Minimum
Frequencyiii) This parameter sets voltage
at the V/Hz pattern minimum frequency.
Note: a SETUP FLT #9 will occur if the
Voltsiii
below formula is not meet.
 MOTOR

 MIN
 VOLTS

ii
  MOTOR
 
   MID
  VOLTS
 
  RATED
 
   MTR
  VOLTS
 
 MOTOR

 MIN
 FREQ

 MOTOR



   MID
 FREQ



Hziii
  RATED
 
   MTR
  VOLTS
 
ENGLISH METRIC
(U3)
(U3)
0.0 – 20.0i,iii
per MOTOR IDi,iii
Y
0.0 – 20.0i,iii
per MOTOR IDi,iii
0 – 100 i
i,iii
Ni,iii
Y
i,iii
Ni,iii
75 i
Yi
Yi
0 – 200 i
0i
Yi
Yi
0 – 200 i
50 i
Yi
Yi
0.1 – 100.0iii
Per IDiii
N
iii
Yiii
0.1 – 10.0iii
1.0iii
N
iii
Y
0.1 – 575.0iii
Per IDiii
N
iii
Yiii
iii





 RATED



   EXCIT
 FREQ



(V/Hz Pattern Voltage at Middle
Frequencyiii) This parameter sets rated
voltage at the V/Hz pattern middle
frequency. This setting is limited by the
motor’s rated voltage (RATED MTR
iii
VOLTS(A5)). Note: a SETUP FLT #9 will Volts
occur if the below formula is not meet.
  MOTOR
 
   MID
  VOLTS
 
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
Range





(V/Hz Pattern Minimum Frequencyiii) This
parameter sets minimum frequency used
to define the V/Hz pattern. Note: a
SETUP FLT #9 will occur if the below
formula is not meet.
 MOTOR

 MIN
 VOLTS

i
Units





Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
77
Motor A5 Submenu
Default
Parameter
Motor
Mid
iii
Freq
Ovld Start
Level
Ovld Time
Out
Description
Range
ENGLISH METRIC
(U3)
(U3)
Hziii
0.1 – 40.0iii
3.0iii
N
Yiii
%
100 – 150
110
Y
Y
sec
5.0 – 120.0
60.0
Y
Y
Y
N
(V/Hz Pattern Middle Frequencyiii) This
parameter sets middle frequency used to
define the V/Hz pattern. Note: a SETUP
FLT #9 will occur if the below formula is
not meet.
 MOTOR

 MIN
 FREQ

 MOTOR



   MID
 FREQ



 RATED



   EXCIT
 FREQ






:
 40%
 rated

motor
 current






This is the other parameter used to define
the overload curve. For more information,
see OVLD START LEVEL on page 79.
(Stator Resistance) This parameter sets
the amount of resistance in the motor
Stator
stator, as a percent of the BASE
Resist
IMPEDANCE, which appears in the
Power Data D2 Submenu.
(Motor Iron Losses) This parameter sets
Motor Iron
the motor iron loss at rated frequency.
Loss
Units in percent of rated power.
(Motor Mechanical Losses)
Motor Mech This parameter sets the motor mechanical
Loss
losses at rated frequency. Units in
percent of rated power.
(Magnet/Flux Axis Equivalent Circuit
ii
Inductance ) This parameter sets amount
D Axis
of inductance in flux producing equivalent
Inductanc circuit of the vector controlled PM motor.
eii
Higher inductances are used for higher
horsepower motors., but it is best if
obtained from motor specifications.
(Torque Axis Equivalent Circuit
Inductanceii) This parameter sets
Q Axis
amount of inductance in torque producing
Inductanc equivalent circuit of the vector controlled
ii
e
PM motor. Higher inductances are used
for higher horsepower motors., but it is
best if obtained from motor specifications.
i
ii
iii





(Motor Overload Start Level)
This parameter defines maximum current
at which motor can run continuously. This
parameter is also one of the two
parameters that define the motor overload
curve. Units in percent of rated current.
For more information, see OVLD START
LEVEL on page 79.
(Motor Overload Time Out)
This parameter defines the amount of
time before a motor overload alarm
occurs when the motor is running at the
current level defined below:
 OVLD
 START

 LEVEL
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
Units
1.5i,iii
%
ii
7.0
%
0.0 – 15.0
0.5
Y
N
%
0.0 – 15.0
1.0
Y
N
mH
ii
0.50 – 100.00ii 10.00ii
30.00ii
Nii
Nii
mHii
0.50 – 100.00ii 10.00ii
30.00ii
Nii
Nii
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
78
0.0 – 20.0
Motor A5 Submenu
Default
Parameter
Description
Units
(Torque Constant Scaleii) The drive
automatically calculates the torque
Trq Const
constant. This value can scale the
ii
Scale
calculated torque constant to provide
better performance.
ii
(Encoder Angle Offset ) This parameter
contains the value of the alignment
Encoder determined during the alignment
Ang Ofstii procedure. For more information on the
alignment procedure, see Magnetek PM
Start-Up Procedure on page 146.
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
Range
ENGLISH METRIC
(U3)
(U3)
none
0.50 – 2.00ii
0.78ii
Nii
Nii
noneii
0 – 35999ii
30000ii
Nii
Yii
ii
Table 14: Motor A5 Submenu
The motor overload alarm can also be
assigned to a logic output.
OVLD START LEVEL
(Motor Overload Start Level)
This parameter defines maximum current at
which motor can run continuously. This
parameter is also one of the two parameters
that define the motor overload curve.
Under the POWER DATA display sub-menu,
the MOTOR OVERLOAD (D2) value displays
the percentage of motor overload trip level
reached. Once this value reaches 100% the
motor has exceeded its user defined overload
curve and a motor overload alarm is declared
by the drive.
The motor overload parameters can be
adjusted by the user. The following two
parameters are used to define the motor
overload curve.
 motor current overload start level (OVLD
START LEVEL(A5)) parameter
 motor current time out (OVLD TIME
OUT(A5)) parameter
Three overload curves are shown. Curve #1 is
the default motor overload curve. The
parameter settings that define the three
overload curves are shown.
OVLD
OVLD
START
TIME
OUT
LEVEL
60 sec
curve #1
110%
curve #2
110%
40 sec
curve #3
120%
70 sec
Motor Overload Parameters
When the motor had exceeded the user
defined motor overload curve, the drive will
declare a motor overload alarm.
READY
RUN
USER
FAULT
READY
D2
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
Motor Overload
+00100
%
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
The drive will only declare a motor overload
and the user is responsible for action.
But, if the user wants the drive to declare a
fault on a motor overload the following need to
be completed:
 logic output configured to MTR
OVERLOAD
 logic input configured to EXT FAULT
 wire the EXT FAULT logic input terminal to
the MTR OVERLOAD logic output terminal
 wire the logic input common terminal to the
logic output common
With the above set-up, the drive will then
declare an External Fault on a motor overload.
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
ALARM!
MTR OVERLOAD
SUB MENU
RUN
DATA ENTRY
79
Motor A5 Submenu
10,000
1000
default
motor
overload
trip time
(seconds)
Curve #1
curve #3
100
Curve #2
OLVD TIME
OUT = 70 sec
Curve #3
curve #1
OLVD TIME
OUT = 60 sec
curve #2
OLVD TIME
OUT = 40 sec
10
110%
130%
150%
170%
190%
210%
current (percentage of rated motor current)
curve #1
OLVD START
LEVEL = 110%
curve #2
curve #3
OLVD START OLVD START
LEVEL = 110% LEVEL = 120%
Motor Overload Curve
80
230%
250%
User Switches C1 Submenu
Configure C0 Menu
User Switches C1 Submenu
Default
Parameter
Spd
Command
Src
Run
Command
Src
Motor
Rotation
Description
Choices
(Speed Command Source)
This parameter designates the source of
the drive’s speed command.
The three possible sources for the speed
command are following:
 Serial Channel – Over the serial
communication terminals located on
the drive control board (either speed
profile or multi-step speed commands)
 serial – speed profile
 ser mult step – serial multi-step
speed commands (only used in
serial mode 2)
 Analog Channel – a bipolar (10V)
signal. Available with the analog
channel is a Speed Command
Multiplier (SPD COMMAND
MULT(A1)) and Speed Command Bias
(SPD COMMAND BIAS(A1)). These
parameters are used to scale the
user’s analog speed command to the
proper range for use by the drive
software.
 Multi-Step Command - user defined
fifteen discrete speed commands
(CMD1 - CMD15). Four logic inputs
are used as speed command
selections (CMD0 is reserved for zero
speed. But, the user can specify
CMD1 - CMD15 to be any speed
command either positive or negative)
(Run Command Source)
This parameter allows the user to choose
the source of the run command from one
of the following sources: an external run
signal from a logic input (external tb), a run
signal transferred across a serial channel
(serial), or a signal from both the serial
channel and a logic input (serial+extrn). If
a signal is required from a logic input
(either external tb or serial+extrn), the Run
signal on TB1 must be selected.
(Motor Rotation)
This parameter allows the user to change
the direction of the motor rotation. As an
example, if the car controller is
commanding the up direction and the car
is actually going in a down direction, this
parameter can be changed to allow the
motor rotation to match the car controller
command.
81




analog input
multi-step
serial
ser mult step
 external tb
 serial
 serial+extrn
 forward
 reverse
ENGLISH METRIC
(U3)
(U3)
Run
Hidden
lock
item
out
MULTI-STEP
Y
Y
EXTERNAL TB
Y
Y
FORWARD
Y
Y
User Switches C1 Submenu
Default
Parameter
Description
Choices
(Encoder Selectionii) HPV900 S2 PM
drives can run either with an incremental
Encoder
encoder or with an Heidenhain Endat
ii
Select
encoder. This parameter sets the
feedback option for the drive.
(Encoder Connection)
Encoder
This parameter allows the user to
Connect
electronically switch A and /A signals from
the encoder without moving any wiring.
i,ii
(Encoder Fault Enable )
This parameter allows the user to
temporarily disable the Encoder Fault.
Adding this feature allows the user to
temporarily disable the Encoder Fault
during the initial start-up process, when
the motor model (defined by the A5 Motor
Parameters) is not clearly defined.
Encoder
When the Encoder Fault is disabled
i,ii
Fault
(ENCODER FAULT (C1) = disabled), the
drive will display the warning message
“EncoderFault OFF”, every time the RUN
command is removed.
IMPORTANT: After the motor parameters
in A5 have been established, the Encoder
Fault should be enabled (ENCODER
FAULT (C1) = enabled).
(Contactor Confirm Source)
This switch selects if hardware
confirmation of motor contactor closure is
Cont Confirm necessary before drive attempts to pass
Src
current through motor. If hardware
confirmation is available set to EXTERNAL
TB and select the Contact Cnfirm signal
on a logic input terminal.
i
(Fast Flux Enable )
This parameter addresses the method the
HPV 900 Series 2 uses to build up flux in
the motor. Enabling the Fast Flux function
Fast Fluxi
can decrease the motor fluxing time
significantly. By decreasing the motor’s
flux time, the starting takeoff time will also
be decreased. For more information, see
Fast Flux on page 92.
(High / Low Gain Sourcei,ii)
HI/LO Gain
High / low gain change switch source. For
Srci,ii
more information, see HI/LO GAIN SRC
on page 92.
ii
(Current Regulator Inner Loop ) This
switch is used to disable/enable the
I-Reg Inner
current regulator inner loop function. It is
ii
Loop
used to enhance the current loop
performance.
i,ii
(Ramp Stop Select ) Chooses between
Ramped Stop normal stop and torque ramp down stop.
i,ii
Sel
For more information, see RAMPED
STOP SEL on page 93.
i
ii
 endat
ii
 incremental
82
Run
Hidden
lock
item
out
ii
 forward
 reverse
INCREMENTAL
ii
Y
ii
Y
FORWARD
Y
Y
i,ii
 disable
i,ii
 enable
ENABLE
 none
 external tb
 disable
i
 enable
NONE
i,ii
EXTERNAL TB
i
DISABLE
 external tb
i,ii,ii
 serial
i
 internal
i
i,ii
Y
ii
i,ii
Y
Y
Y
i
Y
Y
i
i,ii
 disabled
ii
 enabled low
ii
 enabled high
INTERNAL
i,ii
Y
ii
N
i,ii
Y
i,ii
Y
ii
N
i,ii
ii
DISABLED
i,ii
 none
i,ii
 ramp on stop
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
ENGLISH METRIC
(U3)
(U3)
NONE
i,ii
Y
ii
i,ii
User Switches C1 Submenu
Default
Parameter
Ramp Down
En Srci,ii
S-Curve
Abort
DB
Protection
Spd Ref
Release
Brake Pick
Src
i
ii
Description
Choices
i,ii
(Ramp Down Enable Source )
If RUN LOGIC is selected, the user can
remove the run command and the drive
will delay in dropping the run command
until torque ramp down stop function is
complete.
If EXTERNAL TB or SERIAL is selected,
the user must keep the run command
while allowing the Torque Ramp Down
Stop function to be completed.
(S-Curve Abort)
This parameter, S-CURVE ABORT (C1),
addresses how the S-Curve Speed
Reference Generator handles a reduction
in the speed command before the S-Curve
Generator has reached its target speed.
For more information, see S-Curve Abort
on page 94.
(Dynamic Braking Resistor Protection
Selection) The dynamic braking IGBT is
limited as to when it can be turned “on”
(i.e. send power to the dynamic braking
resistors).
The dynamic braking IGBT is allowed to
be “on” while the drive is running (i.e. while
the speed regulator is released) and for a
period of ten (10) seconds after the drive
is stopped. If the dynamic braking IGBT is
still “on” ten seconds after the drive stops
running, the drive will turn “off” the
dynamic braking IGBT (thus stop sending
power to the dynamic braking resistors)
and declare a “DB VOLTAGE” fault or
alarm (whether fault or alarm, depends on
setting of this parameter).
(Speed Reference Release)
The user can select when the Speed
Reference Release signal is asserted:
 If the user does not want the drive to
wait for the mechanical brake to be
picked then SPD REF RELEASE can
be made equal to REG RELEASE
 If the user does want the drive to wait
for the brake to be picked then SPD
REF RELEASE is not asserted until
BRAKE PICKED becomes true.
(Brake Pick Source)
If the BRAKE PICK SRC (C1) is set to
INTERNAL, the HPV 900 Series 2 will
attempt to pick (lift) the brake when
magnetizing current has been developed
in the motor.
 external tb
i,ii
 run logic
i,ii
 serial
 fault
 alarm
 reg release
 brake picked
 internal
 serial
83
Run
Hidden
lock
item
out
i,ii
 disable
 enable
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
ENGLISH METRIC
(U3)
(U3)
i,ii
EXTERNAL TB
i,ii
Y
i,ii
Y
DISABLE ENABLE
Y
Y
FAULT
Y
Y
REG
BRAKE
RELEASE PICKED
Y
Y
INTERNAL
Y
Y
User Switches C1 Submenu
Default
Parameter
Brake Pick
Cnfm
Motor Ovrld
Sel
Stopping
Mode
Description
Choices
(Brake Pick Confirm)
If this switch is set to EXTERNAL TB, the
HPV 900 Series 2 will wait for brake pick
confirmation before releasing the speed
reference. When set to EXTERNAL TB,
the MECH BRK PICK signal on TB1 must
also be selected.
(Motor Overload Select)
This parameter selects the action to be
taken by drive when declaring a user
selectable Motor Overload. When the
motor overload level is reached, the
options are:
 Alarm – the drive only declares a
motor overload and the user is
responsible for action
 Flt immediate – the drive will
immediately declare a fault and turnoff the drive’s output
 Fault at stop – the drive will delay
declaring a fault until the run command
is removed
(Multi-step Stopping Mode Selection)
When the speed command source is set to
multi-step (SPD COMMAND SRC
(C1)=multi-step), the parameter,
STOPPING MODE (C1), determines the
stopping mode of the HPV 900 Series 2 .
The two selectable methods for the
Stopping Mode parameter are “Immediate”
and “Ramp to stop”.
Note: If the SPD COMMAND SRC (C1)
parameter is set to any other definition
other than “multi-step”, the drive will
behave to the “immediate” stopping mode
(independent of the setting of the
STOPPING MODE (C1) parameter).
The “Immediate” stopping mode requires
the drive to be at zero speed prior to
removing the “Run” command. The
“Immediate“ selection is how the HPV 900
Series 2 has traditionally behaved prior to
the addition of this parameter.
The “Ramp to stop” stopping mode is
intended for use when removing the “Run”
command prior to the drive reaching zero
speed (as defined by the AB ZERO SPD
LEV (A1) parameter). When the “Run”
command is removed and the speed
reference is above zero speed, the speed
reference will ramp to zero speed following
the selected s-curve.
84
ENGLISH METRIC
(U3)
(U3)
Run
Hidden
lock
item
out
 none
 external tb
 internal time
NONE
Y
Y
 alarm
 flt immediate
 fault at stop
ALARM
Y
Y
 immediate
 ramp to stop
IMMEDIATE
Y
Y
User Switches C1 Submenu
Default
Parameter
Auto Stop
Stall Test
iii
Ena
Stall Prev
iii
Ena
Serial Mode
i
ii
Description
Choices
(Auto Stop Function Enable)
The Auto Stop function determines how
the drive logic will respond to a zero or
non-zero speed command. The function
will only work when the speed command
source is either multi-step or serial (SPD
COMMAND SRC (C1)=multi-step or
serial). For more information, see Auto
Stop on page 95.
iii
(Stall Test Enable ) When enabled, the
function checks that motor current goes at
or above a percentage (defined by STALL
TEST LVL(A1)) for defined amount of time
(defined by STALL FAULT TIME(A1)). If
the motor current exceeds the defined
parameters a STALL TEST FAULT will be
declared.
iii
(Regeneration Stall Prevention Enable )
When enabled, the Stall Prevention
(Current Limit) function is enabled during
regeneration. When the defined
regeneration current limit is reached
(REGEN TORQ LIMIT(A1)), the stall
prevention function will increase speed in
an effort to shed load. Also, the
responsiveness of the stall prevention
function is determined by the Current Limit
Integral Gain (ILIMT INTEG GAIN(A4))
parameter.
(Serial Mode Selection)
This parameter selects between serial
protocols. The choices are:
 Mode 1 – selects the Magnetek
standard protocol.
 Mode 2 – selects a Magnetek
alternative protocol.
 Mode 3 - selects a Magnetek
alternative protocol.
 DCP3 – Drive Control Position
Protocol 3 .
 DCP4 – Drive Control Position
Protocol 4
 disable
 enable
85
Run
Hidden
lock
item
out
DISABLE
Y
iii
N
iii
 disable
iii
 enable
ENABLE
 disable
iii
 enable
DISABLE
iii
Y
iii
Y
iii
N
iii
Y
iii
Y
Y
iii






Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
ENGLISH METRIC
(U3)
(U3)
None
mode 1
mode 2
mode 3
DCP3
DCP4
NONE
User Switches C1 Submenu
Default
Parameter
Description
Choices
(Serial Mode 2 Fault Mode)
Used only with serial protocol (mode 2)
This parameter defines the reaction to a
serial communications fault while in Serial
Mode 2. There are three possible
settings:
 Immediate – upon sensing a serial
communications fault while in the run
mode will result in an immediate stop.
The equivalent to removal of the “Drive
Enable” logic input.
 Run Remove – upon sensing a serial
communications fault while in the run
mode, the drive will react in the same
manner that removal of the run
command would react. In this case,
Ser2 Flt Mode
the type of stop will be defined by the
STOPPING MODE (C1) parameter.
 Rescue – upon sensing a serial
communications fault while in the run
mode, an attempt will be made to
continue to run at a low speed to the
next floor. Upon sensing the fault, the
drive will decelerate to a creep speed
and continue to run at that speed until
the first of the two following
termination conditions are reached.
 The hardware “Drive Enable” logic
input is removed.
 A timer set by parameter SER2
RS CPR TIME (A1) has elapsed.
(Drive Fast Disable)
Drv Fast
Addresses how fast the drive responds to
Disable
the removal of the DRIVE ENABLE logic
input.
(Speed Regulator Typei,ii) Chooses speed
regulator: Ereg or PI regulator. Magnetek
recommends the use of the Elevator
Speed Regulator (Ereg) for better elevator
performance. If set to external regulator,
the drive will be configured as a torque
controller.
IMPORTANT
This assumes the car controller is doing its
Speed Reg
i,ii
own closed-loop speed regulation. (i.e. a
Type
completely closed outer speed loop with
the car controller having its own encoder
feedback).
The source of the external torque
command is determined by the EXT
TORQ CMD SRC (C1) parameter.
For more information, see SPEED REG
TYPE on page 95.
i
ii
 Immediate
 run remove
 rescue
 Disable
 Enable
86
Run
Hidden
lock
item
out
IMMEDIATE
Y
Y
DISABLE
Y
Y
i,ii
 elev spd reg
i,ii
 pi speed reg
i,ii
 external reg
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
ENGLISH METRIC
(U3)
(U3)
ELEV SPD REG
i,ii
i,ii
Y
i,ii
Y
User Switches C1 Submenu
Default
Parameter
Description
Choices
(Brake Hold Source) If set to internal, the
drive will command the mechanical brake
to hold mode until confirmation of brake
picked exists.
(Brake Pick Fault Enable) When this
parameter is set to ENABLE, the brake
Brk Pick Flt
pick command and confirmation must
Ena
match within the specified time in BRK
PICK TIME (A1) parameter or a brake pick
fault is declared.
(Brake Hold Fault Enable) When this
parameter is set to ENABLE, the brake
Brk Hold Flt
hold command and confirmation must
Ena
match within the specified time in BRK
HOLD TIME (A1) parameter or a brake
hold fault is declared.
(Torque Command Sourcei,ii) Sets the
source of the external torque command
when the SPEED REG TYPE (C1) is set
to external reg. NOTE:
 if SPEED REG TYPE is set to external
reg and EXT TORQ CMD SRC is set to
Ext Torq Cmd
serial, the drive is a torque controller
i,ii
Src
 if SPEED REG TYPE is set for a speed
regulator (either pi speed reg or elev spd
reg) and EXT TORQ CMD SRC is set to
either serial, the torque command is an
auxiliary torque command (torque
feedforward command)
Brake Hold
Src
i
ii
87
Run
Hidden
lock
item
out
 internal
 serial
INTERNAL
Y
Y
 disable
 enable
DISABLE
Y
Y
 disable
 enable
DISABLE
Y
Y
i,ii
 none
i,ii
 serial
i,ii
 analog input
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
ENGLISH METRIC
(U3)
(U3)
NONE
i,ii
i,ii
Y
i,ii
Y
User Switches C1 Submenu
Default
Parameter
Fault Reset
Src
Description
Choices
(Fault Reset Source) This parameter
determines the source of the drive’s
external fault reset from one of the
following sources: an external fault reset
signal from a logic input (external tb), a
fault reset signal transferred across a
serial channel (serial), or the drive
automatically resets the faults (automatic).
The user also has the option to reset faults
directly through the operator.
Automatic Fault Reset
If the fault reset source is set to automatic,
the faults will be reset according to the
setting of the FLT RESET DELAY (A1)
and FLT RESETS/HOUR (A1)
 external tb
parameters. When a logic input is defined  serial
as “fault reset” and this logic input signal is  automatic
transitioned from false to true: an active
fault will be reset and automatic fault reset
counter (defined by FLT
RESETS/HOUR(A1)) will be reset to zero.
CAUTION
If the run signal is asserted at the time of a
fault reset, the drive will immediately go
into a run state. Unless using the autofault reset function (FAULT RESET SRC
(C1)=automatic), then the run command
needs to be cycled to be reset
automatically, but will reset if initiated by a
logic input without cycling the run
command.
(Overspeed Test Source)
This switch determines the source of the
overspeed test. Operation of the
Overspd Test overspeed test function is specified by the  external tb
 serial
Src
OVRSPEED MULT (A1) parameter.
Regardless of the setting of this
parameter, the user can call for the
overspeed test via the Digital Operator.
88
ENGLISH METRIC
(U3)
(U3)
Run
Hidden
lock
item
out
EXTERNAL TB
Y
Y
EXTERNAL TB
Y
Y
User Switches C1 Submenu
Default
Parameter
PreTorque
Sourcei,ii
PreTorque
Latchi,ii
i
ii
Description
Choices
(Pre-Torque Sourcei,ii) This switch
determines if a pre torque command is
used and with what source.
Pre-torque is the value of torque that the
drive should produce as soon as the
speed regulator is released to prevent
rollback due to unbalanced elevator loads.
This ‘priming’ of the speed regulator is
done with the pre-torque command, which
is used when the speed regulator release
is asserted.
The two possible sources for the pretorque command are following:

serial channel

analog channel
The serial channel is RS-422 or 485
depending on configuration. The analog
pre-torque signal is bipolar (±10V).
Available with the analog channel is a PreTorque Command Multiplier (PRE
TORQUE MULT (A1)) and Pre-Torque
Bias (PRE TORQUE BIAS(A1)). These
parameters are used to scale the user’s
analog pre-torque command to the proper
range for use by the drive software.
i,ii
(Pre-Torque Latch )
This parameter determines if the pretorque signal is latched.
NOTE: If PreTorque Source has been set
to NONE, the setting does not have any
effect on the operation of the drive.
Some car controllers send both pre-torque
and speed commands. To facilitate this,
the HPV 900 Series 2 has the option of
latching the pre-torque command.
If pre-torque latching is selected using the
Pre-Torque Latch parameter, a FALSE to
TRUE transition on the pre-torque latch
clock latches the value on the pre-torque
channel into the drive. This channel is
allowed to change any time except during
this transition without affecting the value of
the latched pre-torque command.
The Pre-Torque Latch Clock controls
when the pre-torque command is latched.
The Pre-Torque Latch clock parameter
(PTorq LATCH CLCK) determines the
source of this latch control. The two
choices for latch control are the serial
channel or a logic input (EXTERNAL TB).
The speed regulator uses the latched pretorque command when the internal Speed
Regulator Release signal is asserted.
Once the pre-torque command is used the
latch and the pre-torque command is
cleared.
89
Run
Hidden
lock
item
out
i,ii
 none
i,ii
 analog input
i,ii
 serial
NONE
i,ii
i,ii
 latched
i,ii
 not latched
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
ENGLISH METRIC
(U3)
(U3)
NOT LATCHED
i,ii
Y
i,ii
Y
Y
i,ii
Y
i,ii
i,ii
User Switches C1 Submenu
Default
Parameter
PTorq Latch
Clcki,ii
Dir Confirm
Mains Dip
Ena
Description
Choices
i,ii
(Pre-Torque Latch Clock )
If the PRE-TORQUE LATCH has been set
to LATCHED, then this parameter chooses
the source for latch control. If set to
EXTERNAL TB, the Pre-Trq Latch signal
on TB1 must be selected.
(Direction Confirm)
When enabled, the function allows
confirmation of the polarity of the initial
analog speed command via the Run Up or
Run Down logic input commands.

If the Run Up logic input is selected
and true with the polarity of the analog
signal positive, then the analog speed
command is accepted unchanged.

If the logic input Run Down logic input
is selected and true with the polarity
of the analog speed command
negative, the analog speed command
is accepted unchanged.

If however, the logic input Run Up is
true and the polarity is negative or the
logic input Run Down is true and the
polarity is positive, then the speed
command is held at zero.
(Mains Dip Enable)
When enabled, the function will reduce the
speed (by the percentage defined by the
MAINS DIP SPEED parameter) when the
drive goes into ‘low voltage’ mode. ‘Low
voltage’ mode is defined as when the drive
declares a UV alarm, which is defined by
the Input line-to-line voltage (INPUT L-L
VOLTS) parameter and the Undervoltage
Alarm Level (UV ALARM LEVEL)
Mlt-Spd to
Dly 1
Mlt-Spd to
Dly 2
(Multi-step Speed Command Delay x)
This parameter assigns multi-step speed
command to recognition delay timer x as
defined by the MSPD DELAY x (A1)
parameter. For more information, see
MULTI-STEP COMMAND DELAYS on
page Error! Bookmark not defined..
Mlt-Spd to
Dly 3
i
ii
i,ii
 serial
i,ii
 external tb
 disabled
 enabled
 disable
 enable
















Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
90
ENGLISH METRIC
(U3)
(U3)
none
mspd 1
mspd 2
mspd 3
mspd 4
mspd 5
mspd 6
mspd 7
mspd 8
mspd 9
mspd 10
mspd 11
mspd 12
mspd 13
mspd 14
mspd 15
i,ii
EXTERNAL TB
Run
Hidden
lock
item
out
i,ii
Y
i,ii
Y
DISABLED
Y
Y
DISABLE
Y
Y
NONE
Y
Y
NONE
Y
Y
NONE
Y
Y
User Switches C1 Submenu
Default
Parameter
Description
Choices
ENGLISH METRIC
(U3)
(U3)
Mlt-Spd to
Dly 4
Priority Msg
ARB
Selecti,ii
Drv Enable
Src
Rec Travel
Dir
(Priority Message Enabling)
With Priority Message disabled the user
will not see priority messages meaning
faults and alarms will not be displayed on
the operator, but the faults will be placed
into the fault history and active fault lists
with the Fault LED on. Leave Priority
Message enabled when drive is not being
worked on.
(Anti-Rollback Selectii)
With ARB SELECT set to enable, the drive
will calculate pretorque values when
movement is seen on the shaft. For
information on how to setup ARB, see on
page 61.
(Drive Enable Source) This parameter
allows the user to choose the source of
the drive enable command from one of the
following sources: an external run signal
from a logic input (external tb1), a drive
enable signal transferred across a serial
channel (serial), or a signal from both the
serial channel and a logic input
(serial+extrn). If a signal is required from
a logic input (either externaltb1 or
serial+extrn), the drive enable signal on
TB1 must be selected.
(Recommended Travel Direction) This
parameter allows the user to enable and
select the appropriate installation type to
allow the drive to travel in the lightest load
direction (generally for use with a UPS to
allow the rescue of trapped passengers
when mains power is not available). This
function can be enabled by assertion of
any logic input (C2) configured to ‘REC
TRAVEL EN’
NONE
Y
Y
 Enable
 Disable
ENABLE
Y
N
 enable
ii
 disable
DISABLE
N
ii
Y
EXTERNAL TB
N
Y
NONE
N
Y
ii
 external tb
 serial
 serial+extrn
 none
 geared
 gearless
Table 15: User Switches C1 Submenu
i
ii
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
91
Run
Hidden
lock
item
out
ii
ii
User Switches C1 Submenu
Detailed descriptions
HI/LO GAIN SRCi,ii
(High / Low Gain Source)
This parameter determines the source of the
high / low gain switch. Note: this parameter is
only accessible and available during closed
loop operation.
i
FAST FLUX
(Fast Flux Enable)
This parameter addresses the method the
HPV 900 Series 2 uses to build up flux in the
motor. Enabling the Fast Flux function can
decrease the motor fluxing time significantly.
By decreasing the motor’s flux time, the
starting takeoff time will also be decreased.
The speed regulator high / low gain function
was developed in response to high
performance elevator requirements where the
resonant nature of the elevator system
interferes with the speed response of the drive.
Certain motors will have a noticeably long
fluxing time, which is indicated by the time
between the run command being issued and
the speed regulator release output going true.
Enabling the Fast Flux function will reduce this
delay.
When the speed response (gain) is set to high
levels, the resonant characteristics created by
the spring action of the elevator ropes can
cause car vibration. To solve this problem, the
speed regulator is set to a low enough
response (gain) so that the resonant
characteristics of the ropes are not excited.
Fast Flux Function with FAST FLUX = disabled
In this example, the motor fluxing time was 109
msec.
This is accomplished by controlling the
sensitivity or response of the speed regulator
via the high / low gain switch and gain reduce
multiplier.
By using the gain reduce multiplier; the user
can specify a lower response (gain) for the
speed regulator when the drive is at higher
speeds. The gain reduce multiplier (GAIN
REDUCE MULT(A1)) tells the software how
much lower, as a percentage, the speed
regulator response (gain) should be.
The high / low gain switch determines when
the HPV 900 Series 2 is in ‘low gain’ mode. In
the ‘low gain’ mode, the gain reduce multiplier
has an effect on the speed regulator’s
response (gain).
Fast Flux Function with FAST FLUX = enabled
With the same motor example, the motor
fluxing time was reduced to 46 msec.
The drive allows for the high / low gain switch
to be controlled either externally or internally.
The high / low gain source parameter (HI/LO
GAIN SRC) allows for this external or internal
selection.
The high / low gain switch can be controlled
externally by either:
 a logic input
 the serial channel
The high / low gain switch can also be
controlled internal by:
 the gain change level parameter (GAIN
CHNG LEVEL), which defines a
percentage of contract speed
i
ii
With the drive set to internal control, the speed
regulator will go into ‘low gain’ mode when the
drive senses the motor is above a defined
speed level. The defined speed level is
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9)
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9)
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9)
iii
92
User Switches C1 Submenu
RAMPED STOP SELi,ii
(Ramp Stop Select) This parameter allows
the selection of the Torque Ramp Down Stop
function. This function is used to gradually
remove the torque command after the elevator
has stopped and the mechanical brake has
been set. This prevents a shock and possible
‘bump’ felt in the elevator from the torque
signal going to zero too quickly.
determined by the gain change level
parameter.
An example of internal high / low gain control
is shown below.
HPV 900 Series 2 Parameter
Settings
HI/LO GAIN SRC = internal
GAIN REDUCE MULT = 80%
GAIN CHNG LEVEL = 10 %
100%
contract
speed
10%
contract
speed
0%
contract
speed
Response of
Speed
Regulator
8.0 rad/sec
A function unique to elevators involves the
interaction between the motor torque and the
mechanical brake that holds the elevator.
Under full load conditions at the end of a run, if
the brake is set and the motor torque is
removed quickly, some brake slippage may
occur. Therefore, the option of gradually
reducing the motor torque is provided by the
Torque Ramp Down Stop function.
speed
reference
low gain
mode
Response of
Speed
Regulator
Response of
Speed Regulator
10.0 rad/sec
10%
contract
speed
Upon being enabled by the Ramped Stop
Select Parameter (RAMPED STOP SEL(C1)),
the torque command is linearly ramped to zero
from the value that was present when the
‘Ramp Down Enable’ was selected.
0%
contract
speed
The Ramp Down Enable has the following
three possible sources:
 An input logic bit (EXTERNAL TB1)
 The run logic – initiated by the removal of
the run command
 The serial channel
Response of
Speed Regulator
10.0 rad/sec
The Ramp Down Enable Source parameter
(RAMP DOWN EN SRC(C1)) is used to select
one of the above options.
High / Low Gain Examplei,ii
A method of providing the Ramp Down Enable
would be with a logic signal (EXTERNAL TB1)
that is dedicated to that function. The Ramp
Down Enable would be asserted while the Run
command is still present and remain there until
the ramp is completed, after which the Run
command would be removed.
The RUN LOGIC option to trigger the Ramp
Down Enable from the Run command is
provided. In this case, removal of the Run
command enables the Ramp Down Stop
Function.
The time it takes for the HPV 900 Series 2 to
perform its ramped stop is determined by the
Ramped Stop Time Parameter. The Ramped
Stop Time parameter (RAMPED STOP
TIME(A1)) selects the amount of time it would
take for the drive to ramp from the rated torque
to zero torque.
i
ii
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9)
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9)
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9)
iii
93
User Switches C1 Submenu
the speed command occurs from a high-speed
command (which was not yet achieved on the
output of the S-Curve) to a low speed
command. Note that the speed reference (SCurve output) continued to increase after the
speed command was reduced. This increase
is speed was necessary to avoid violation of
the jerk rate setting.
S-CURVE ABORT
This parameter, S-CURVE ABORT (C1),
addresses how the HPV 900 Series 2’s SCurve Speed Reference Generator handles a
reduction in the speed command before the SCurve Generator has reached its target speed.
Note: the default for the S-CURVE ABORT
(C1) parameter is disabled.
S-curve Function with S-CURVE ABORT =
enabled
S-curve Function with S-CURVE ABORT =
disabled
In Figure 40 below, the optional S-Curve abort
has been selected. In this case when the
speed command is reduced, the speed
reference immediately starts to reduce
violating the jerk limit (thus no jerk out phase),
which could be felt in the elevator.
With a normal S-curve function, a change in
the speed command is never allowed to violate
the defined acceleration or jerk rates. If a
reduction in the speed command is issued
before the S-Curve generator has reached its
target speed, then the jerk rate dictates what
speed is reached before the speed may be
reduced.
For optional S-Curve abort to be active
requires that:

Figure 39 below shows this type of operation.
Note the jerk rates are very low to exaggerate
proportion of S in the curve to clearly show the
overshoot in speed so that the maximum jerk
rate is not violated. In this figure, a reduction in

The speed command source must be
selected as Multi-step (SPD COMMAND
SRC=multi-step).
The S-curve Abort function must be
ENABLED (S-CURVE ABORT = enabled).
speed command
speed reduction
speed reference
Figure 39: Normal S-curve Abort
speed command
speed reduction
speed reference
Figure 40: Optional S-curve Abort
94
User Switches C1 Submenu
options and an option for turning off the
internal speed regulator:
 Elevator Speed Regulator (Ereg)
 PI Speed Regulator
 External Speed Regulator
AUTO STOP
(Auto Stop Function Enable)
When the speed command source is set to
multi-step or serial (SPD COMMAND SRC
(C1)=multi-step or serial), the parameter
determines the stopping mode of the drive.
The two selectable methods for the
STOPPING MODE (C1) parameter are
“Immediate” and “Ramp to stop”.
The Auto Stop function determines how the
drive logic will respond to a zero or non-zero
speed command. The function will only work
when the speed command source is either
multi-step or serial (SPD COMMAND SRC
(C1)=multi-step or serial).
The Elevator Speed Regulator is
recommended for use with elevator
applications but is not required. The regulator
type can be changed by using the SPEED
REG TYPE (C1) parameter.
Elevator Speed Regulator (Ereg)
The use of the Elevator Speed Regulator
allows the overall closed loop response
between speed reference and speed to be
ideal for elevator applications. The desirable
features of the Elevator Speed Regulator are:
 no overshoot at the end of accel period
 no overshoot at the end of decel period
Disabled: When the Auto Stop function is
disabled, the magnitude of the speed
command plays no part in the logical starting
or stopping of the drive.
One characteristic of the Elevator Speed
Regulator is that during the accel / decel
period the speed feedback does not match the
speed reference creating a speed error or
tracking delay. As an example, the Elevator
Speed Regulator’s speed response is shown
for a ramped speed reference below.
no
commanded
speed
overshoot
speed
Enabled: When the Auto Stop function is
enabled and the speed command source is
either multi-step or serial, the following
changes occurs to the start and stop
sequence:
 Both a Run command and a non-zero
speed command are required to start the
drive
 Either the removal of the Run command or
the setting the speed command to zero will
initiate a stop.
Remember, when the auto stop function is
enabled (AUTO STOP (C1)=enabled) both a
non-zero multi-step/serial speed command
AND the run command are required to start the
drive. It makes no difference which signal is
enabled first; the drive does not start until both
are present. When initiating a stop, which
signal is removed first does make a difference.
speed
reference
speed error
speed
feedback
tracking delay
Ereg Example
SPEED REG TYPEi,ii
(Speed Regulator Type)
This switch toggles between the Elevator
Speed Regulator (Ereg) and the PI Speed
Regulator. Magnetek recommends the use of
the Elevator Speed Regulator for better
elevator performance. If this parameter is set
to external regulator, the drive will be
configured as a torque controller.
The Elevator Speed Regulator is tuned by:
 System Inertia parameter (INERTIA(A1)),
which is easy to obtain by using the drive
software to estimate the system inertia.
 Response parameter (RESPONSE(A1)),
which is the overall regulator bandwidth in
radians per sec. This parameter defines
the responsiveness of the speed regulator.
The tracking delay shown is defined as
(1/RESPONSE) seconds. The tracking delay
is not affected by the gain reduce multiplier.
The source of the external torque command is
determined by the EXT TORQ CMD SRC (C1)
parameter. The HPV 900 Series 2 has the
following three closed loop speed regulation
i
ii
time
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9)
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9)
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9)
iii
95
User Switches C1 Submenu
The inner loop crossover parameter (INNER
LOOP XOVER(A1)) should not need to be
changed. But if the number is changed, it
must satisfy the following formula:
inner
MULTI-STEP COMMAND DELAYS
When setting up an elevator, slow-down and
stop switches are set at fixed locations in the
shaft. Once the drive is tuned, it might require
the user to move the switches in the shaft in
order to minimize the time spent at leveling
speed.
Under "normal” operation, the drive speed
reference follows the speed command. By
configuring for “delayed” operation and setting
speed command 1 for a delay (MLT-SPD TO
DLY 1 = MSPD 1), the recognition of the speed
command change from speed command 1 to
any other speed command (in this case speed
command 2) will be delayed by the setting of
MSPD DELAY 1 (A1) parameter.
gain
 response 
loop
crossover
reduce
multiplier
PI Speed Regulator
When the Proportional plus Integral (PI) speed
regulator is used, the response to a speed
reference is different. As an example, the PI
Speed Regulator’s speed response is shown
below for a ramped speed reference. With the
PI speed regulator, the end of each accel and
decel period, there will be an overshoot. The
amount of overshoot will be a function of the
defined phase margin and response
parameters.
Speed Command 2 commanded
(Slow down switch activated)
Because of this overshoot, the PI regulator is
not recommended for elevator control
overshoot commanded
speed
speed
Speed Command 1
speed
reference
Zero speed commanded
(Stop switch activated)
Speed Command 2
speed
command
zero tracking delay
speed
reference
(normal)
speed
feedback
speed
reference
(delayed)
time
PI Speed Regulator Example
Speed Command 1
delay time = 0.3 sec
(MSPD DELAY 1 = 0.3 sec)
The PI Speed Regulator is tuned by:
 System Inertia parameter (INERTIA(A1)),
which is easy to obtain by using the drive
software to estimate the system inertia.
 Response parameter
(RESPONSE(A1)), which is the overall
regulator bandwidth in radians per sec.
This parameter defines the
responsiveness of the speed regulator.
 Speed Phase Margin parameter (SPD
PHASE MARGIN(A1)) is used only by
the PI Speed Regulator to define the
phase margin of the speed regulator.
96
Travel time
saved
Logic Inputs C2 Submenu
HIDDEN ITEMS setting. See details on page
112.
NOTE: When Run lock out appears with the
parameter description, the parameter cannot
be changed when the drive is in the RUN
mode.
NOTE: The current setting of each parameter
is displayed in all caps; all other choices in the
list are displayed in lower case.
Logic Inputs C2 Submenu
NOTE: The user can assign particular
functions to each input terminal. Only one
function per terminal is allowed and multiple
terminals cannot have the same function.
When a function is assigned to an input
terminal, it is removed from the list of possible
selections for subsequent terminals.
NOTE: When Hidden Item appears with the
parameter description, it indicates that its
appearance in the list is controlled by the
Parameter
Description
Default
ENGLISH (U3)
METRIC (U3)
Hidden
Item
Logic Input 1
Logic Input 2
Logic Input 3
Logic Input 4
Logic Input 5
Logic Input 6
Logic Input 7
Logic Input 8
Logic Input 9
Logic Input 1
Logic Input 2
Logic Input 3
Logic Input 4
Logic Input 5
Logic Input 6
Logic Input 7
Logic Input 8
Logic Input 9
choices…
choice descriptions…
(Contactor Confirm) Closure of the auxiliary contacts confirming closure of the motor
contactor.
(Drive Enable) Must be asserted to permit drive to run. This does not initiate run, just
permits initiation.
(External Fault 1) User input fault #1
Closure of this contact will cause the drive
(External Fault 2) User input fault #2
to declare a fault and perform a fault
shutdown.
(External Fault 3) User input fault #3
(External / Fault 4) User input fault #4. Opening of this contact will cause the drive to
declare a fault and perform a fault shutdown.
(Fault Reset) If the FAULT RESET SRC (C1) is set to EXTERNAL TB1, the drive’s fault
circuit will be reset when this signal is true. If the FAULT RESET SRC switch is set to
AUTOMATIC, the drive’s fault circuit will be reset when this signal is true and the automatic
fault reset counter, defined by FLT RESETS/HOUR, will be reset to zero. NOTE: this input
is edge sensitive and the fault is reset on the transition from false to true.
(Low Gain Selection) If the HI/LO GAIN SRC switch is set to EXTERNAL TB1, the low gain
mode is chosen for the speed regulator when this signal is true.
(Mains Dip Selection) Requests the drive to enter mains dip mode. Only valid when MAINS
DIP (C1) = EXTERNAL TB.
(Mechanical Brake Hold) Auxiliary contact closures confirming when the mechanical brake
is in the hold mode (engaged).
(Mechanical Brake Pick) Auxiliary contacts from mechanical brake. Asserted when brake is
picked (lifted).
(Normally Closed Contact Confirm) Opening of the auxiliary contacts confirming closure of
the motor contactor.
(No Function) Input not assigned. When this setting is selected for one of the TB1 input
terminals, any logic input connected to that terminal will have no effect on drive operation.
(Overspeed Test Source) This function works only if the OVRSPEED TEST SRC switch is
set to EXTERNAL TB1. A true signal on this input applies the OVERSPEED MULT to the
speed command for the next run. After the run command has dropped, the drive returns to
‘normal’ mode and must be re-configured to perform the overspeed function again. The
OVERSPEED FLT level is also increased by the OVERSPEED MULT, allowing the elevator
to overspeed without tripping out on an overspeed fault.
NOTE: This input must be taken false then true each time that an overspeed test is run. If
the input is left in the true, it is ignored after the first overspeed test.
contact cfirm
drive enable
extrn fault 1
extrn fault 2
extrn fault 3
extrn /flt 4
fault reset
low gain sel
mains dip
mech brake hold
mech brake pick
nc ctct cfirm
no function
ospd test src
DRIVE ENABLE
RUN
CONTACT CFIRM
FAULT RESET
RUN UP
UP/DWN
RUN DOWN
S-CURVE SEL 0
STEP REF B0
STEP REF B1
STEP REF B2
EXTRN FAULT 1
FAULT RESET
97
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Run
lock out
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Logic Inputs C2 Submenu
choices…
pre-trq latch
choice descriptions…
(Pre-Torque Latch) Transition from false to true latches pre torque command.
(Quick Stop) This functions works when quick stop input becomes true, the drive will ramp
to zero speed quickly using the deceleration curve of DECEL RATE 3, DECEL JERK IN 3,
and DECEL JERK OUT 3 settings. Once the rising edge of QUICK STOP EN occurs, the
drive will force a zero speed reference and hold zero speed until either the removal of the
run command or removal of the drive enable.
Run (Logic Input)
Drive Enable (Logic Input)
quick stop
QUICK STOP EN (Logic Input)
Speed Reference
SPD REG RLS (Logic Output)
Rising edge of
QUICK STOP
Once the rising edge of
QUICK STOP EN occurs, the
drive will force a zero speed
reference and hold zero
speed until either the removal
of the run command or
removal of the drive enable
Run Command
removed drive
output off
s-curve sel 0
(Recommended Travel Enable) When this input is given, the drive will automatically select
travel direction to ensure the lowest current draw from the mains supply based on feedback
from the encoder as the mechanical brake is lifting (usually used with a UPS as a means to
rescue trapped passengers where mains power is not available).
(Run) If drive is enabled through the DRIVE ENABLE logic input, this function will start drive
operation.
(Run Down) If drive is enabled through the DRIVE ENABLE logic input, this function will
start drive operation with negative speed commands.
Note: if both RUN UP and RUN DOWN are true then the run is not recognized.
Note: if DIR CONFIRM (C1) is enabled, this input will not change the polarity of the speed
command and will be used to confirm the polarity of the analog speed command as well as
starting the operation of the drive.
(Run Up) If drive is enabled through the DRIVE ENABLE logic input, this function will start
drive operation with positive speed commands.
Note: if both RUN UP and RUN DOWN are true then the run is not recognized.
Note: if DIR CONFIRM (C1) is enabled, this input is also used to confirm the polarity of the
analog speed command as well as starting the operation of the drive.
These two bits are used to select one of four
(S-Curve Select 0) Bit 0 of S-curve selection
s-curve sel 1
(S-Curve Select 1) Bit 1 of S-curve selection
rec travel en
run
run down
run up
ser2 insp ena
step ref b0
step ref b1
step ref b2
step ref b3
trq ramp down
up/dwn
s-curve selections. For more information, see
S-Curve A2 Submenu on page 64
(Serial Mode 2 Inspection Enable) defines one of the two sources of inspection run
command (only serial mode 2)
(Step Reference Bit 0) Bit 0 of multi-step speed
command selection
Four inputs, which must be used
(Step Reference Bit 1) Bit 1 of multi-step speed
together as a 4-bit command for multicommand selection
step speed selection. For more
(Step Reference Bit 2) Bit 2 of multi-step speed
information, see Multi-step Ref A3
command selection
Submenu on page 66.
(Step Reference Bit 3) Bit 3 of multi-step speed
command selection
(Torque Ramp Down) Asserting this ramps torque output to zero at “Ramped Stop Time
parameter” rate.
(Up/Dwn) This logic can be used to change the sign of the speed command.
false = no inversion, true = inverted.
Table 16: Logic Inputs C2 Submenu
98
Logic Outputs C3 Submenu
Logic Outputs C3 Submenu
LOGIC OUTPUT x
(Logic Outputs 1-4)
This parameter defines the function of the logic
outputs.
NOTE: The current setting of each parameter
is displayed in all caps; all other choices in the
list are displayed in lower case.
RELAY COIL x
(Relay Logic Outputs 1-2)
This parameter defines the function of the
relay logic outputs.
NOTE: The current setting of each parameter
is displayed in all caps; all other choices in the
list are displayed in lower case.
Default
Parameter
Description
Logic Output 1
Logic Output 2
Logic Output 3
Logic Output 4
Relay Coil 1
Relay Coil 2
READY TO RUN
logic output #1
RUN COMMANDED
logic output #2
MTR OVERLOAD
ZERO SPEED
logic output #3
ENCODER FLT
logic output #4
FAULT
READY TO RUN
relay output #1
SPEED REG RLS
BRAKE PICK
relay output #2
User LED located at the
ALARM
top of the operator
User LED
choices…
ENGLISH (U3)
METRIC (U3)
Hidden Run
item
lockout
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
choice descriptions…
alarm
alarm+flt
(Alarm) The output is true when an alarm is declared by the drive.
(Alarm and/or Fault) The output is true when a fault and/or an alarm is declared by the drive.
(At Mid Speed) The output is true when the speed is above the level set by AT MID SPEED (A1)
at mid speed
parameter.
(Auto Brake) The output is controlled by the Auto Brake function and is used to open the
auto brake
mechanical brake.
(Brake Alarm) The output is true when the dynamic brake resistor is in an overcurrent condition
brake alarm
and the drive is in a run condition.
(Brake Hold) The output is true when the brake pick confirmation is received. It is used to show
brake hold
the mechanical brake is remaining open. This function is used with brakes that need to have
less than 100% voltage to hold the brake open.
(Brake Pick) The output is true when the speed regulator is released and is used to open the
brake pick
mechanical brake.
(Brake Hold Fault) The output is true when the brake hold command and the brake feedback do
brk hold flt
not match for the user specified time.
(Brake IGBT Fault) The output is true when the dynamic brake resistor is in an overcurrent
brk igbt flt
condition and the drive is not in a run condition.
(Brake Pick Fault) The output is true when the brake pick command and the brake feedback do
brk pick flt
not match for the user specified time.
(Car Going Down) The output is true when the motor moves in negative direction faster than the
car going dwn
user specified speed.
(Car Going Up) The output is true when motor moves in positive direction faster than user
car going up
specified speed.
(Charging Fault) The output is true when the DC bus voltage has not stabilized above the
charge fault
voltage fault level or the charge contactor has not closed after charging.
(Close Motor Contactor) The output is true when the run command is given, the drive is enabled,
close contact
the software has initialized, and no faults are present.
(Contactor Fault) The output is true when the command to close the contactor and the contactor
contactor flt
feedback do not match before the user specified time.
(Current Regulator Fault) The output is true when the actual current measurement does not
curr reg flt
match commanded current.
drv overload
(Drive Overload) The output is true when the drive has exceeded the drive overload curve.
encoder flt
(Encoder Fault) The output is true when the drive is declaring an encoder fault
(External Fan Indicator) The output is true when the drive fan is on and false when the drive fan
ext fan en
is off.
fan alarm
(Fan Alarm) The output is true when the fan on the drive is not functioning.
fault
(Fault) The output is true when a fault is declared by the drive.
(Fault Reset Output) The output is true when a fault reset is requested by the drive. The drive
flt reset out
will only issue a fault reset command when FAULT RESET SRC (C1) is set to automatic.
99
Logic Outputs C3 Submenu
choices…
flux confirm
fuse fault
ground fault
in low gain
motor trq lim
mtr overload
no function
not alarm
over curr flt
overspeed flt
overtemp flt
overvolt flt
ovrtemp
alarm
phase fault
ramp down
ena
ready to run
rec travl dir
rec travel on
regen trq lim
run
commanded
run confirm
speed dev
speed dev
low
speed ref rls
Spd ref rel2
choice descriptions…
(Motor Flux Confirmation) The output is true when the drive has confirmed there is enough flux
to issue a speed regulator release (the drive’s estimate of flux must reach 75% of reference).
(Fuse Fault) The output is true when the DC bus fuse has blown.
(Ground Fault) The output is true when the sum of all phase current exceeds 50% of rated
current of the drive.
(In Low Gain) The output is true when the speed regulator is in “low gain” mode.
(Motor Torque Limit) The output is true when the torque limit has been reached while the drive is
in the motoring mode. The motoring mode is defined as the drive delivering energy to the motor.
(Motor Overload) The output is true when the motor has exceeded the user defined motor
overload curve.
(No Function) This setting indicates that the terminal or relay will not change state for any
operating condition; i.e. the output signal will be constantly false.
(Not Alarm) The output is true when an alarm is NOT present.
(Motor overload current fault) The output is true when the phase current has exceeded 300% of
rated current.
(Overspeed Fault) The output is true when the motor has gone beyond the user defined
percentage contract speed for a specified amount of time.
(Heatsink Over Temperature Fault) The output is true when the drive’s heatsink has exceeded
90C (194F).
(Over Voltage Fault) The output is true when the DC bus voltage exceeds 850VDC for a 460V
class drive or 425VDC for a 230V class drive.
(Drive Over Temperature Alarm) The output is true when the drive’s heatsink temperature has
exceeded 80C (176F).
(Phase Loss) The output is true when the drive senses an open motor phase.
(Ramp Down Enable) The output is true after a torque ramp down stop has been initiated by
either a logic input, the serial channel, or internally by the drive. When this output is true the
torque is being ramped to zero.
(Ready to Run) The output is true when the drive’s software has been initialized and no faults
are present.
(Recommended Travel Direction) This output advises the travel direction of the elevator when
the travel direction feature is active. A high output is given when the elevator is traveling up, a
low output is given when the elevator is traveling down
(Recommended Travel On) This output goes high after the run is initiated when the
Recommended Travel Dir (C1) is set to ‘geared’ or ‘gearless’ and the drive receives a
Recommended Travel En logic input (C2) and the recommended travel direction feature is active
(Regeneration Torque Limit) The output is true when the torque limit has been reached while the
drive is in the regenerative mode. The regenerative mode is defined as when the motor is
returning energy to the drive. When the drive is in regenerative mode, the energy is dissipated
via the dynamic brake circuitry (internal brake IGBT and external brake resistor).
(Run Commanded) The output is true when the drive is being commanded to run.
(Run Command Confirm) The output is true after the software has initialized, no faults are
present, the drive has been commanded to run, the contactor has closed and the IGBTs are
firing.
(Speed Deviation) The output is true when the speed feedback is failing to properly track the
speed reference. The speed deviation needs to be above a user defined level. (Speed Dev. =
reference – feedback)
(Speed Deviation Low Level) The output is true when the speed feedback is properly tracking
the speed reference. The speed deviation needs to be within a user defined range for a user
defined period of time. (Speed Dev. = reference – feedback)
(Speed Reference Release) The output is true when the flux is confirmed and drive is NOT in
DC injection.
(Speed Reference Release 2) The output is true when:

software initialized and no faults present

drive being commanded to run (contact confirm true, if used)

not in DC injection

SPEED COMMAND SRC(C1) parameter = multi-step
100
Logic Outputs C3 Submenu
choices…
choice descriptions…
(Speed Regulator Release) The output is true when the flux is confirmed at 75% and brake is
commanded to be picked (if used)
internal connection
READY TO RUN
internal connection
FLUX CONFIRM
software ready and no
faults are present
speed reg rls
Drive Internal Signals
RUN or RUN UP or
RUN DOWN
Speed Regulator Release
Speed Reference Release
DRIVE ENABLE
Drive Internal Signal
Run Confirm
CONTACT CFIRM
(if used)
stltst active
Undervolt flt
Up to speed
uv alarm
Zero speed
(Stall Test Active) The output is true when the drive is declaring a Stall Test Fault. The Stall
Test Fault checks that motor current goes at or above a percentage (defined by STALL TEST
LVL(A1)) for defined amount of time (defined by STALL FAULT TIME(A1)). If the motor current
exceeds the defined parameters a STALL TEST FAULT will be declared.
(Low Voltage Fault) The output is true when the DC bus voltage drops below the user specified
percent of the input line-to-line voltage.
(Up to Speed) The output is true when the motor speed is above the user specified speed
(Low Voltage Alarm) The output is true when the DC bus voltage drops below the user specified
percent of the input line-to-line voltage.
(Zero Speed) The output is true when the motor speed is below the user specified speed for the
user specified time.
Table 17: Logic Outputs C3 Submenu
101
Analog Outputs C4 Submenu
Analog Outputs C4 Submenu
ANALOG OUTPUT 1
(Analog Outputs 1)
Default: SPEED REF
This parameter defines the function of the
analog output #1.
NOTE: The current setting of each parameter
is displayed in all caps; all other choices in the
list are displayed in lower case.
Parameter
Description
Analog Output 1
Analog Output 2
analog output #1
analog output #2
ANALOG OUTPUT 2
(Analog Outputs 2)
Default: SPEED FEEDBACK
This parameter defines the function of the
analog output #2.
NOTE: The current setting of each parameter
is displayed in all caps; all other choices in the
list are displayed in lower case.
Default
ENGLISH (U3)
choices…
METRIC (U3)
SPEED REF
SPEED COMMAND
SPEED FEEDBACK
power output
pretorque ref
choice descriptions…
(Absolute Position Binary) Raw absolute position reading from the
absolute encoder.
(Auxiliary Torque Command) Additional torque command from
auxiliary source, when used.
(DC Bus Voltage Output) Measured DC bus voltage.
(Current Output) Percent motor current.
(D-Axis Current Reference) D-Axis current component that does not
contribute to torque production and is generally kept at zero. It will be
non-zero at no-load and flux-weakening.
(Drive Overload) Percent of drive overload trip level reached.
(Flux Producing Current) Measured flux producing current.
(Flux Output) Measured flux output.
(Flux Reference) Flux reference used by vector control
(Flux Producing Voltage) Flux producing voltage reference.
(Frequency Output) Electrical frequency.
(Motor Overload) Percent of motor overload trip level reached.
(No Function) This setting indicates that the analog output will not
change state for any operating condition; i.e. the output signal will be
constantly false.
(Power Output) Calculated power output.
(PreTorque Reference) Pre-torque reference.
slip frequency
(Motor Slip Frequency) Commanded slip frequency.
abs pos bin
aux torq cmd
bus voltage
current out
d-current ref
drv overload
flux current
flux output
flux ref
flux voltage
frequency out
mtr overload
no function
(Speed Regulator Torque Command) Torque command from speed
regulator.
speed command (Speed Command) Speed command before S-Curve
speed error
(Speed Error) Speed reference minus speed feedback.
speed feedbk
(Speed Feedback) Speed feedback used by speed regulator.
speed ref
(Speed Reference) Speed reference after S-Curve
(Tachometer Rate Command) Torque command from tach rate gain
tach rate cmd
function.
(Polarity Error Signal) Magnet polarity estimation error signal used for
theta e
PM motor characterization with respect to quick align.
torq current
(Torque Producing Current) Measured torque producing current.
torq voltage
(Torque Producing Voltage) Torque producing voltage reference.
torque output
(Torque Output) Calculated torque output.
torque ref
(Torque Reference) Torque reference used by vector control.
voltage out
(Voltage Output) RMS motor terminal voltage.
spd rg tq cmd
Table 18: Analog Outputs C4 Submenu
102
Hidden
item
Y
Y
Run
lock
out
N
N
D/A units…
Counts
% rated torque
% of peak in
% rated current
%
% of trip point
% rated current
% rated flux
% rated flux
% rated volts
% rated freq
% of trip point
None
% rated power
% base torque
% rated
frequency
% base torque
% rated speed
% rated speed
% rated speed
% rated speed
% base torque
Internal drive unit
% rated current
% rated volts
% rated torque
% base torque
% rated volts
Display D0 Menu
Display D0 Menu
Elevator Data D1 Submenu
Parameter
Speed Command
Speed Reference
Speed Feedback
Encoder Speed
Speed Errori,ii
Est Inertiai,ii
Description
(Speed Command) Monitors the speed command before the
speed reference generator (input to the S-Curve). This command
comes from multi-step references, speed command from analog
channel, or the serial channel.
(Speed Reference) Monitors the speed reference being used by
the drive. This is the speed command after passing through the
speed reference generator (which uses a S-Curve).
(Speed Feedback) Monitors the speed feedback coming from the
encoder. It is based on contract speed, motor rpm and encoder
pulses per revolution. The drive converts from motor RPM to
linear speed using the relationship between the CONTRACT CAR
SPD (A1) and CONTRACT MTR SPD (A1) parameters.
(Encoder Speed) Monitors encoder speed in rpm.
(Speed Errori,ii) Monitors the speed error between the speed
reference and the speed feedback. It is equal to the following
equation:
 speed
  speed
 speed

  
 
error
 reference   feedback 
(Estimated Inertiai,ii) Estimated elevator system inertia.
(Logic Outputs Status) This display shows the condition of the
logic outputs. (1=true 0=false)
READY
RUN
D1
Logic Outputs
User LED
USER
Hidden
item
ft/min or
m/s
N
ft/min or
m/s
N
ft/min or
m/s
N
rpm
N
ft/min or
m/si,ii
Ni,ii
secsi,ii
Ni,ii
1=true
0=false
N
1=true
0=false
N
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
Logic Outputs
000-0000
Relay Coil 2
FAULT
Units
Logic Output 1
DATA ENTRY
Logic
Output 4
SUB MENU
Relay Coil 1
(Logic Inputs Status) This display shows the condition of the
logic inputs. (1=true 0=false)
READY
RUN
D1
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
SUB MENU
Logic Input 9
ii
FAULT
Logic Inputs
0-0000-0000
Logic Inputs
i
USER
DATA ENTRY
Logic Input 1
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
103
Display D0 Menu
Parameter
Description
Units
Hidden
item
1=true
0=false
N
(Serial Communications Logic Inputs)
READY
RUN
D1
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
Rx Logic In
00-0000
Bit 5
Bit 0
SUB MENU
Rx Logic In
DATA ENTRY
Bit Name Description/Reason
0 AUX_RUN_BIT Serial Run Command bit from car controller
AUX_FLT_RST_REQ_BIT Serial Fault Reset Request from
1
car controller
AUX_PT_CLK_BIT Serial Pre-Torque Latch Clock Bit from
2
car controller
AUX_LOW_GAIN_BIT Serial Low PI Gain Control Bit from
3
car controller
AUX_RAMP_DWN_EN_BIT Serial Ramp Down Enable Bit
4
from car controller
AUX_BRAKE_PICK_BIT Serial Brake Pick Command Bit
5
from car controller
AUX_BRAKE_HOLD_BIT Serial Brake Hold Command Bit
6
from car controller
AUX_OSPD_TST_BIT Serial Overspeed Test Request Bit
7
from car controller
104
Display D0 Menu
Parameter
Description
Units
Hidden
item
1=true
0=falsei,ii
Ni,ii
(Start Logic Statusi,ii) This display shows the condition of certain
starting logic bits. (1=true 0=false)
READY
RUN
D1
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
Start Logic
000-0000-0000-0000
Bit 14
Bit 0
SUB MENU
Start Logici,ii
i
ii
DATA ENTRY
Bit Name Description/Reason
0 RUN_BIT Software recognized input run command
BRAKE_RUN_BIT Run command after internal brake
1
control delay
DRIVE_RUN)BIT Drive Run command after all drop out
2
delays
RDY_FOR_RUN_BIT Drive is ready for run command, no
3
faults present
CLOSE_CONTACTOR_BIT Indicates the drive is enabled,
4 run command has been received, the software is initialized
and no faults are present
CNTCT_CONFIRM_BIT Software indication that it has
5
received the confirmation that the contactor has closed
RAMP_DWN_EN_BIT Bit is true after a torque ramp down
6 stop has been initiated by either a logic input, the serial
channel, or internally by the drive.
RUN_CONFIRM_BIT When 1, no faults are present, drive
7 has been commanded to run, the contactor has closed and
the IGBTs are firing
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
105
Display D0 Menu
Parameter
Start Logici,ii
(continued)
Description
Bit Name Description/Reason
SPD_REG_REL_BIT Bit is true when the speed regulator is
8
released.
SPD_REF_REL_BIT Bit is true when the speed regulator is
9 release if SPD REF RLS (C1) = SPD REG RLS, else, the
bit is true when the brake confirm has become active
BRAKE_PICK_BIT Bit is true when the speed regulator is
10
released and is used to open the mechanical brake
BRAKE_IS_PICKED_BIT Bit is true when brake confirm is
11
active
BRAKE_HOLD_BIT Bit is true when the brake pick
12
confirmation is received
LOW_GAIN_BIT Bit is true when the speed regulator is in
13
“low gain” mode
DOWN_BIT Bit is true when a down direction command has
14
been received
Units
Hidden
item
1=true
0=falsei,ii
Ni,ii
(Serial Communications Statusi,ii)
Serial communication status display.
READY
RUN
D1
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
Rx Com Status
000-0000-0000-0000
Bit 15
Rx Com Statusi,ii
14
i
ii
Bit 0
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
Bit Severity Name Description/Reason
0 Info
RX_INVALID_SETUP_ID; Invalid setup id on setup msg
1 Info
RX_SETUP_IN_RUN; A setup message to write was
received while the serial run bit was set.
2 Fatal
RX_TIMEOUT; A COMM FAULT was declared because
of a communication time-out.
3 Info /
RX_INVALID_CHECKSUM; If COMM FAULT was
Fatal
declared because of bad message checksums.
1=true,
4 Info
RX_INVALID_MESSAGE; Invalid header character in
0=falsei,ii
message.
5 Info
RX_FIFO_OVERRUN; Overflow has occurred.
6 Info
RX_INVALID_RUN_ID; Set if the Cmd_Id sent in the
RUN MESSAGE is not in range.
7 Info
RX_INVALID_MONITOR_ID (Not available in Mode 2)
Set if the Monitor_Id received in the run message is not
in range.
8 Info
RX_INVALID_FAULT_ID; Set if the Fault_Id sent in the
setup message is not in range.
9 Info
RX_FAULT_DETECTED; COMM FAULT has been
detected
10 Info
Fault_Mode_2 (Not available in Mode 1) Immediate
Shutdown Mode
11 Info
Fault_Mode_2_Run_Removal (Not available in Mode
1) Run Removal Shutdown Mode
12 Info
Fault_Mode_2_Rescue (Not available in Mode 1)
Rescue Shutdown Mode
13 Info
Fault_Mode_3 (Not available in Mode 1 or 2) Immediate
Shutdown Fault
N/a
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
106
Ni,ii
Display D0 Menu
Parameter
Description
15 Fatal
RX Error Count
Pre-Torque Refi,ii
Spd Reg Torq
Cmdi,ii
Tach Rate Cmdi,ii
FF Torque Cmdi,ii
Enc Position
Enc Revolutions
Units
Hidden
item
none
N
% rated
torquei,ii
Ni,ii
% rated
torquei,ii
Ni,ii
% rated
torquei,ii
% rated
torquei,ii
Ni,ii
None
N
None
N
1=true,
0=false
N
RX_COMM_FAULT; COMM FAULT has been declared
by the drive
(Serial Communication Error Counter) This function will monitor
invalid serial messages and increase the count per invalid
message. This is used as a diagnostic tool.
(Pre-Torque Referencei,ii) Monitors the pre torque reference,
coming from either analog channel #2 or the serial channel.
(Regulator Torque Commandi,ii) Monitors the speed regulator’s
torque command. This is the torque command before it passes
through the tach rate gain function or the auxiliary torque
command. It is the torque required for the motor to follow the
speed reference.
(Tachometer Rate Commandi,ii) Monitors the torque command
from the tach rate gain function, (if used).
(Feed Forward Torque Commandi,ii) Monitors the feedforward
torque command from auxiliary source, when used.
(Encoder Position) The parameter will display the position of the
rotor with respect to zero. The value will change from 0 to 65535
when the motor makes one rotation in a clockwise direction and
will count down from 65535 to 0 when the motor makes 1 full
rotation in the counter-clockwise direction. This value is reset on
every power up.
(Encoder Revolutions) This parameter will display the number of
full revolutions the motor has made. When the car is moving up,
this parameter will count from 0 to 65535. When the car is
moving down, this parameter will count from 0 to -65535. This
value is reset on every power up.
(DCP Command Monitoring) – Used for monitoring signals given
to the drive serially from the control system when using DCP.
READY
RUN
D1
USER
FAULT
Ni,ii
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
DCP Command
0000-0000
Bit 7
DCP Command
i
ii
Bit
B0
B1
BitDATA0ENTRY
SUB MENU
Name Description/Reason
B2
B3
Drive controller enable
Travel command (DCP3); Change of actual distance
(DCP4)
Stop switch
Transfer of travel commands in the 3rd
B4
B5
B6
B7
Direction of travel
Speed change
Desired distance / actual distance
Error in last replay message
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
107
Display D0 Menu
Parameter
Units
Hidden
item
1=true,
0=false
N
Description
(DCP Status Monitoring) – Used for monitoring signals given by
the drive serially to the control system when using DCP
READY
RUN
USER
D1
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
DCP Command
0000-0000
Bit 7
SUB MENU
BitDATA0ENTRY
DCP Status
Bit
S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
Name Description/Reason
Drive controller ready
Travel active
Advance warning active
General fault active
speed below leveling value (v < 0,3 m/s)
Desired distance / speed accepted (bit cleared for
emergency stop)
Mechanical brake
Error in last message received
Table 19: Elevator Data D1 Submenu
Power Data D2 Submenu
Parameter
Description
Units
DC Bus Voltage
(DC Bus Voltage) Measured voltage of the DC bus.
(RMS Motor Current Output) Monitors the RMS motor
Volts
Hidden
item
N
Amps
N
Volts
N
Hz
N
% rated
torque
N
%i
Ni
RPMi
Ni
% rated
torquei,ii
Ni,ii
% rated fluxi
Ni
% rated fluxi
% rated
current
Ni
%ii
Nii
KW
N
Motor Current
Motor Voltage
Motor Frequency
Motor Torque
Est No Load Curr
%i
Est Rated RPMi
Torque Referencei,ii
Flux Referencei
Flux Outputi
% Motor Current
D-Curr
Referenceii
Power Output
i
ii
output current.
(Motor Voltage Output) Monitors the RMS motor
terminal line-line voltage.
(Motor Frequency Output) Monitors the electrical
frequency of the motor output.
(Motor Torque Output) Calculated motor output
torque in terms of percent rated torque.
(Estimated No Load Currenti) Estimated no load
current of the motor calculated by the HPV 900 Series
2’s adaptive tune.
(Estimated Rated RPMi) Estimated rated rpm of the
motor calculated by the HPV 900 Series 2’s adaptive
tune.
(Torque Referencei,ii) Monitors the torque reference
used by the drive control.
(Flux Referencei) Flux reference used by the vector
control of the drive.
(Flux Outputi) Measured value of the flux output.
(Percent Motor Current) Monitors the motor current as
a percent of rated motor current.
(D-Axis Current Referenceii) This current is the
measured D-Axis Component of Current. It will be
non-zero at no-load and flux-weakening states
(Power Output) Calculated drive power output.
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
108
N
Display D0 Menu
Parameter
Slip Frequencyi,iii
Motor Overload
Drive Overload
Flux Current
Torque Current
Flux Voltage
Torque Voltage
Base Impedance
Rated Excit Freqii
Rotor Positionii
Drive Temp
Highest Temp
Description
(Slip Frequencyi,iii) Displays the commanded slip
frequency of the motor
(Motor Overload) Displays the percentage of motor
overload trip level reached. Once this value reaches
100% the motor has exceeded its user defined
overload curve and a motor overload alarm is declared
by the drive.
(Drive Overload) Displays the percentage of drive
overload trip level reached. Once this value reaches
100% the drive has exceeded its overload curve and a
drive overload fault is declared.
(Flux Current) Displays the flux producing current of
the motor.
(Torque Current) Displays the torque producing
current of the motor.
(Flux Voltage) Displays the flux voltage reference.
(Torque Voltage) Displays the torque voltage
reference.
(Base Impedance) Displays the drive calculated base
impedance, which is based on the RATED MTR PWR
and the RATED MTR VOLTS parameters. This value
is used to calculate the Per Unit values of the system
impedances (i.e. EXTERN REACTANCE and
STATOR RESIST).
(Rated Excitation Frequency of Motorii)Motor rated
frequency calculated from rated speed and pole
number. This value should be close to motor
nameplate value if such value is given. The only
difference between two values could be result of
number rounding. Large discrepancy suggests that
inaccurate parameters are entered in A5 menu.
(Absolute Rotor Positionii) Displays the raw rotor
mechanical position reading from the absolute
encoder. May be helpful during installations to verify
encoder is being read properly.
(Drive Temperature) Displays the value of the drive
heatsink.
(Highest Temperature) Displays the highest recorded
value of the drive heatsink. May be reset to zero.
Table 20: Power Data D2 Submenu
i
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
iii
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
ii
109
Units
Hidden
item
Hzi,iii
Ni,iii
%
N
%
N
% rated
current
% rated
current
% rated volts
Y
Y
% rated volts
Y
Ohms
N
Hzii
Nii
Noneii
Nii
deg C
N
deg C
N
Y
Utility U0 Menu
Utility U0 Menu
U0
Parameter
Description
U1
PASSWORD
ENTER
PASSWORD
NEW PASSWORD
PASSWORD
LOCKOUT
HIDDEN ITEMS
For more information, see PASSWORD on page 112.
U2
HIDDEN ITEMS
U3
U4
U5
UNITS
UNITS
SELECTION
OVRSPEED TEST
OVERSPEED
TEST?
RESTORE DFLTS
Rst Drive Dflts
Rst Mtr Dflts
U6
DRIVE INFO
DRIVE VERSION
BOOT VERSION
CUBE ID
DRIVE TYPE
U7
U8
U9
HEX MONITOR
LANGUAGE SEL
LANGUAGE
SELECT
BASICS
Drive Mode
Default
Allows the user to enter in a password
12345
Choices
0 – 65535
Used to change the password
Used to enable and disable password
disabled
DISABLED
lockout
enabled
For more information, see HIDDEN ITEMS on page 112.
Selects if the “hidden” parameters will
SHOW
show items
be displayed on the Digital Operator.
ITEMS
hide items
For more information, see UNITS on page 112.
Choose either Metric units or
English
ENGLISH
standard English measurements units
Metric
For more information, see OVERSPEED TEST on page 113.
Allows for Overspeed Test to be
no
NO
enabled via the digital operator
yes
For more information, see RESTORE DFLTS on page 114.
Resets all parameters to default
values except parameters in MOTOR
A5 and Utility U menus
Resets the parameters in the MOTOR
A5 to the defaults defined by the
MOTOR ID
For more information, see DRIVE INFO on page 114.
Shows the software version of the
drive software
Shows the lower level software
version of the drive
Displays the cube identification
number of the drive. If the main
control board is replaced on the drive,
this value will need to be re-entered.
Displays the drive type as HPV900Series 2.
For Magnetek personnel, see HEX MONITOR on page 115.
For more information, see LANGUAGE SEL on page 115.
English
Selects language for operator text
ENGLISH
Deutsch
For more information, see BASICS on page 115
Open loop
Selects open-loop, closed-loop, or
CLOSED
Closed loop
permanent magnet drive operation
LOOP
PM
110
Run
Hidden
lock
item
out
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Utility U0 Menu
U0
Parameter
U10 ROTOR ALIGNii
ALIGNMENTii
BEGIN
ALIGNMENTii
ALIGNMENT
METHODii
U11 TIME
Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Second
U12 AUTOTUNE SELii
AUTOTUNE
SELECTii
U14 Power Meter
Motor Pwr
Regen Pwr
Energy Time
Energy Reset
Description
Default
For more information, see ROTOR ALIGN on page 115.
Enabling this parameter allows the
enable
alignment procedure or value
DISABLE
disable
ENCODER ANG OFST (A5) to be
changed
yes
Selecting YES beings the alignment
NO
on run
procedure
no
Chooses between open loop and auto
OPEN
open loop
align
LOOP
auto align
For more information, see TIME on page 115.
Sets the year for the real time clock
Sets the month for the real time clock
Sets the day for the real time clock
Sets the hour for the real time clock
Sets the minute for the real time clock
Sets the second for the real time clock
For more information, see AUTOTUNE on page 116.
Setting this parameter to something
disable
other than Disable allows the
DISABLE on run
AutoTune feature to run.
yes
For more information see Power Meter on page116
Displays the power (in kWh) used by
the drive since last ‘Energy Reset’
Displays the power (in kWh)
regenerated (saved) by the drive
since last ‘Energy Reset’
Displays the hours of use since last
‘Energy Reset’
This allows the user to reset all U14
counters to zero
Table 21: Utilities Menu
i
ii
Choices
Parameter accessible through CLOSED LOOP (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Parameter accessible through OPEN LOOP(U9) Operation only
iii
111
Run
Hidden
lock
item
out
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Utility U0 Menu
Detailed Description
ENTER PASSWORD Screen
PASSWORD
(Password Function)
The following three different screens are used
by the password function:
 ENTER PASSWORD
 NEW PASSWORD
 PASSWORD LOCKOUT
This screen allows the user to enter in a
password. A valid password must be entered
before enabling or disabling the password
lockout or changing to a new password.
NEW PASSWORD Screen
This screen is used to change the established
password.
Password Function
NOTE: Remember that a valid password must
be entered at the ENTER PASSWORD screen
before the established password can be
changed.
The password function allows the user to
select a six-digit number for a password. The
password function allows the user to lockout
changes to the parameters until a valid
password is entered.
PASSWORD LOCKOUT Screen
And with the password lockout enabled, all
parameters and display values will be able to
be viewed but no changes to the parameters
will be allowed until a correct password is
entered.
This screen is used to enable and disable
password lockout. The factory default for
password lockout is DISABLED.
NOTE: Remember that a valid password must
be entered at the ENTER PASSWORD screen
before the password lockout condition can be
changed.
Parameter Protection
If the password lockout is enabled, the
following message will appear on the display
when attempting to change a parameter.
READY
RUN
USER
FAULT
HIDDEN ITEMS
(Hidden Items Function)
The HIDDEN ITEMS sub-menu allows the user
to select whether or not “hidden” parameters
will be displayed on the Digital Operator.
There are two types of parameters, standard
and hidden. Standard parameters are
available at all times. Hidden parameters are
available only if activated. The default for this
function is ENABLED (meaning the hidden
parameters are visible).
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
PASSWORD PROTECTED
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
In order to change a parameter after password
lockout has been enabled, the following two
steps must be followed in the PASSWORD
sub-menu:
1) A valid password must be entered in the
ENTER PASSWORD screen.
2) The password lockout must be DISABLED
in the PASSWORD LOCKOUT screen.
UNITS
(Units Selection Function)
When the UNITS SELECTION sub-menu is
displayed, the user can choose either Metric
units or Standard English measurements units
for use by the drive’s parameters.
IMPORTANT
The unit selection must be made before
entering any setting values into the
parameters. The user cannot toggle between
units after drive has been programmed.
PASSWORD Sub-menu Protection
The following message will appear when in the
PASSWORD sub-menu, if you are trying to:
 Enable or disable the password lockout
without a valid password being entered.
 Enter a new password without a valid
password being entered.
READY
RUN
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
PLEASE ENTER
PASSWORD FIRST
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
112
Utility U0 Menu
OVERSPEED TEST
(Overspeed Test Function)
The speed command is normally limited by
Overspeed Level parameter (OVERSPEED
LEVEL(A1)), which is set as a percentage of
the contract speed (100% to 150%). But in
order to allow overspeed tests during elevator
inspections, a means is provided to multiply
the speed command by the Overspeed
Multiplier parameter (OVERSPEED
MULT(A1)).
Press the ENTER key. The sub-menu LED
will turn on, and the Digital Operator will
display:
READY
U4
The external logic input can be used by:
 Setting the Overspeed Test Source
parameter to external tb1.
 Defining a logic input terminal to ospd test
src.

Press the up arrow or down arrow key and
the display will change to:
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
Overspeed Test?
YES
SUB MENU

DATA ENTRY
Press the ENTER key to begin the
overspeed test.
The value in the Overspeed Mult parameter is
applied to the speed reference and the
overspeed level, so that the elevator can be
operated at greater than contract speed and
not trip on an Overspeed Fault.
When the Run command is remove after the
overspeed test, overspeed test reverts back to
its default of NO. In order to run another
overspeed test via the Digital Operator, the
above steps must be repeated again.
Overspeed Test via Operator
The Digital Operator can also initiate the
overspeed test by performing the following:
While the Digital Operator display shows
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
U0 UTILITY
U4 OVERSPEED TEST
SUB MENU
RUN
U4
The serial channel can be used by setting
Overspeed Test Source parameter to serial.
FAULT
DATA ENTRY
Press the ENTER key again. The sub
menu LED will go out and data entry LED
will turn on.
READY
Overspeed Test via Serial Channel
USER
TORQUE
LIMIT

NOTE: This logic input requires a transition
from false to true to be recognized - this
prevents the overspeed function from being
permanently enabled if left in the true state.
RUN
FAULT
8:55
SUB MENU
Overspeed Test via Logic Input
READY
USER
Overspeed Test?
NO
An overspeed test can be initiated by:
 an external logic input
 the serial channel
 directly from the digital operator

RUN
DATA ENTRY
113
Utility U0 Menu
Press the enter key. Scroll until the following
displays on the operator:
RESTORE DFLTS
(Restore Parameter Defaults)
Two different functions are included in this
sub-menu.
READY
RESTORE DRIVE DEFAULTS
U5
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
Press the enter key again. If the esc key is
pressed, instead the reset action will be
aborted.
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
DRIVE INFO
(Drive Information)
Four different screens are included in this submenu, each display an identification number.
Rst Drive Dflts
IDLE
SUB MENU
FAULT
Rst Mtr Dflts
Restoring
The following shows how to restore the drive
defaults:
RUN
USER
U5
This function resets all parameters to their
default values except the parameters in the
MOTOR A5 sub-menu and Utiliity U menus.
READY
RUN
DATA ENTRY
DRIVE VERSION Screen
Press the enter key. Scroll until the following
displays on the operator:
READY
RUN
U5
USER
FAULT
Shows the software version of the drive
software.
TORQUE
LIMIT
READY
8:55
U6
Rst Drive Dflts
Restoring
SUB MENU
RUN
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
Drive Version
A4810-010208
DATA ENTRY
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
BOOT VERSION Screen
Press the enter key again. If the esc key is
pressed, instead the reset action will be
aborted.
Shows the lower level software version of the
drive.
RESTORE MOTOR DEFAULTS
This function resets the parameters in the
MOTOR A5 sub-menu to the defaults defined
by the MOTOR ID parameter in that sub-menu.
READY
U6
RUN
U5
USER
FAULT
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
SUB MENU
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
Rst Motor Dflts
IDLE
SUB MENU
USER
Boot Version
A4810-000000
The following shows how to restore the motor
defaults for the defined motor ID:
READY
RUN
DATA ENTRY
114
DATA ENTRY
Utility U0 Menu
CUBE ID Screen
Displays the cube identification number of the
drive.
cube
Model
size
ID#
HPV900-4008-2E1-01
1
4008
HPV900-4012-2E1-01
2
4012
HPV900-4016-2E1-01
2
4016
HPV900-4021-2E1-01
3
4021
HPV900-4027-2E1-01
3
4027
HPV900-4034-2E1-01
4
4034
HPV900-4041-2E1-01
4
4041
HPV900-4052-2E1-01
4
4052
HPV900-4065-2E1-01
5
4065
HPV900-4072-2E1-01
5
4072
HPV900-4096-2E1-01
5
4096
HPV900-2025-2E1-01
2
2025
HPV900-2031-2E1-01
2
2031
HPV900-2041-2E1-01
3.5
2041
HPV900-2052-2E1-01
3.5
2052
HPV900-2075-2E1-01
4
2075
HPV900-2088-2E1-01
4
2088
HPV900-2098-2E1-01
5
2098
BASICS
(Basics)
When the Basics sub-menu is displayed, the
user can choose either open-loop or closedloop operation of the drive via the Operation
(U9) parameter.
READY
U9
U6
USER
FAULT
For the year, enter the last two digits
corresponding to the current year. This will
update and continue to be stored in the U11
submenu.
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
READY
RUN
U8
FAULT
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
Enter the month based off of a 12 month
calendar. This will automatically update and
continue to be stored in the U11 submenu.
LANGUAGE SEL
(Language Selection Function)
When the Language Selection sub-menu is
displayed, the user can choose either English
or Deutsch (German) for the operator’s text.
USER
USER
Year
09
DATA ENTRY
HEX MONITOR
(Hex Monitor)
The hex monitor was designed for fault and
parameter diagnostics. It is intended for use
by Magnetek personnel.
RUN
DATA ENTRY
TIME
(Time Setting Function)
The clock located at the top of the operator
under the user LED, will set after the SECOND
parameter has been enter.
U11
READY
TORQUE
LIMIT
ROTOR ALIGNii
(Rotor Alignment Function)
The Rotor Align submenu is meant for aligning
the rotor with the magnets in the motor. For a
detailed procedure see PM Start-Up Procedure
on page 146.
Drive Type
HPV900-Series 2
SUB MENU
FAULT
9:55
SUB MENU
DRIVE TYPE Screen
Shows the drive software type HPV 900
Series 2
RUN
USER
Basics
CLOSED LOOP
Cube ID Numbers
READY
RUN
READY
RUN
U11
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
Month
04
TORQUE
LIMIT
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
8:55
Language
DEUTSCH
SUB MENU
ii
DATA ENTRY
115
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Utility U0 Menu
And finally enter the seconds. This number
will be automatically stored, however, after
setting this value in the U11 submenu, it may
be viewed on the top of the display and the
U11 parameter will reset back to zero.
Next, enter the current day. This will
automatically update and continue to be stored
in the U11 submenu.
READY
RUN
U11
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
Day
23
READY
RUN
U11
SUB MENU
RUN
DATA ENTRY
U11
USER
FAULT
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
Seconds
11
The hour is based off a 24 hour clock. This
number will be automatically stored, however,
after setting this value in the U11 submenu, it
may be viewed on the top of the display and
the U11 parameter will reset back to zero.
READY
USER
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
AUTOTUNE SELii
(AutoTune Selection)
The AutoTune feature allows for the drive to
automatically measure the D and Q Axis
inductances. The procedure itself may be
found in the Appendix on page 153.
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
Hour
11
SUB MENU
Power Meter
(Energy Monitor)
Within this menu a user can monitor the power
drawn by the motor and also regenerated from
the motor in a given period. Within this menu
the user can reset all counters also if required.
Note: It is assumed a regenerative device is
fitted in conjunction with the HPV900S2 when
monitoring REGEN PWR, if this is not the case
REGEN PWR informs you how much you
could save should you add a regenerative
device
DATA ENTRY
Enter the Minute next. This number will be
automatically stored, however, after setting this
value in the U11 submenu, it may be viewed
on the top of the display and the U11
parameter will reset back to zero.
READY
RUN
U11
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
Minute
23
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
ii
116
Parameter accessibly through PM (U9) Operation only
Fault F0 Menu
Fault F0 Menu
F0
F1
parameter
ACTIVE FAULTS
F2
FAULT HISTORY
F3
SORTED HISTORY
F4
RESET FAULTS
RST ACTIVE FLTS
Description
Contains a list of the active faults
Contains a list of up to the last sixteen faults with time
stamps
Contains a list of all potential faults and the number of times
they have occurred
hidden
item
N
run
lock
out
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Clears the active faults listed in F1 submenu
Clears the Fault History listed in the F2 submenu and the
Sorted History listed in the F3 submenu
CLR FLT HIST
Detailed Descriptions
Fault History
The FAULTS F0 menu does not access
settable parameters; instead, it provides a
means of examining the drive’s active faults
and the fault history.
This menu also allows for clearing of active
faults in order to get the drive ready to return to
operation after a fault shutdown.
All faults are on the fault history. The fault
history displays the last 16 faults that have
occurred and a time stamp indicating when
each happened. The time stamp (month-dayyear hour:min:sec) is set in the U11 TIME
submenu.
Press the enter key to enter the fault history.
Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll
through the faults.
ACTIVE FAULTS
(Active Faults)
This sub-menu contains a list of the active
faults.
READY
Active Faults List
F2
F1
USER
FAULT
READY
TORQUE
LIMIT
DATA ENTRY
RUN
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
SORTED HISTORY
(Sorted History)
This sub-menu contains a list of faults to occur
on the drive with the number of times they
have occurred since the last fault history clear.
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
CHARGE FAULT
SUB MENU
FAULT
8:55
SUB MENU
Press the enter key to enter the active fault list.
Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll
through the active faults.
RUN
USER
1
CHARGE FAULT
04-22-09 15:53:58
The active fault list displays and records the
active faults. The faults will remain on the fault
list until a fault reset is initiated.
READY
RUN
Sorted History
The sorted history displays all faults and the
number of times they have occurred since that
last fault history clearing. The faults are listed
by occurrence. The most numerous
occurrences will appear at the top of the list.
DATA ENTRY
FAULT HISTORY
(Fault History)
Press the enter key to enter the sorted history
list. Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll
through the sorted history.
This sub-menu contains a list of up to the last
sixteen faults.
NOTE: The fault history is not affected by the
fault reset or a power loss. The fault history
can only be cleared by a function the F4
RESET FLTS submenu
READY
RUN
F3
117
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
1
CHARGE FAULT
00002 – counts
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
Fault F0 Menu
RESET FAULTS
(Reset Faults)
Note: if an active fault still exists on the drive,
the FAULT LED will continue to be lit. Clear
the condition causing the fault and attempt to
reset the faults again.
This sub-menu allows the user to reset both
the active fault and the fault history.
Rst Active Flts
Clr Flt Hist
The active faults may be reset by the user
function as described below.
The fault history list and sorted history list may
be reset by the user function as described
below.
While the digital operator display shows:
READY
RUN
USER
FAULT
While the digital operator display shows:
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
F0 FAULTS
F4 RESET FAULTS
READY
RUN
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
SUB MENU
F0 FAULTS
F4 RESET FAULTS
DATA ENTRY
Press the enter key. The submenu LED will
turn ON, and the Digital Operator will display:
READY
READY
RUN
RUN
F4
USER
USER
FAULT
FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
Press the enter key. The submenu LED will
turn ON, using the down arrow key, scroll until
the following displays on Digital Operator:
TORQUE
TORQUE
LIMIT
LIMIT
8:55
Rst Active Flts
IDLE
READY
READY
F4
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
RUN
F4
USER
FAULT
USER
USER
FAULT
FAULT
TORQUE
TORQUE
LIMIT
LIMIT
8:55
Clr Flt Hist
IDLE
Press the enter key, then use the down arrow
to get the following display:
READY
RUN
RUN
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
Press the enter key, then use the down arrow
to get the following display:
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
Rst Active Flts
Enter to Rst
READY
RUN
F4
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
USER
8:55
SUB MENU
RUN
F4
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
Clr Flt Hist
Enter to Clr
Press the enter key. The drive will reset the
active fault list and display the following:
READY
FAULT
DATA ENTRY
Press the enter key. The drive will reset the
active fault list and display the following:
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
Rst Active Flts
IDLE
READY
SUB MENU
RUN
F4
DATA ENTRY
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
Clr Flt Hist
IDLE
SUB MENU
118
DATA ENTRY
Maintenance
 First, check that the incoming three phase
power is disconnected
 Once the incoming three-phase power is
disconnected, it will be necessary to
discharge the DC bus with a “bleeder”
resistor.
Maintenance
Maintenance Overview
Preventive maintenance is primarily a matter of
routine inspection and cleaning. The most
important maintenance factors are the
following:
Is their sufficient airflow to cool the drive?
Has vibration loosened any connections?
The HPV 900 Series 2 needs to have sufficient
air flow for long, reliable operation.
Accumulated dust and dirt accumulation can
reduce airflow and cause the heat sinks to
overheat. The heat sinks can be kept clean by
brushing, while using a vacuum cleaner.
Periodically, check air filters on enclosure
doors, clean if dirty and replace as necessary.
Periodically, clean the cooling fans to prevent
dirt buildup. At the same time, check that the
impellers are free and not binding in the
housing.
Periodically, check all mounting and electrical
connections. Any loose hardware should be
tightened.
IMPORTANT
Use extreme caution when connecting the
bleeding resistor.
Using a 250ohm/100 watt “bleeder” resistor,
connect the resistor leads to the (B1) and (-)
terminals located on the brake resistor
terminal.
The resistor leads should be connected for 20
seconds or until the DC bus charge light
extinguishes.
Once the DC bus charge light is out, verify with
a voltmeter that no voltage exists between the
(B1) and (-) terminals.
It will be necessary to have the drive repaired
or replaced.
Reforming Bus Capacitors
The following is a procedure for reforming the
electrolytic bus capacitors.
WARNING
Hazardous voltages may exist in the drive
circuits even with drive circuit breaker in off
position. NEVER attempt preventive
maintenance unless incoming power and
control power is disconnected and locked out.
Also, ensure the DC Bus charge light is out.
If the drive has been stored for more than 9months, it is recommended that the bus
capacitors be reformed. After 18 months of
storage it is mandatory that the bus capacitors
are reformed.
The bus capacitors in the HPV 900 Series 2
can be reformed without removing them from
the drive. To reform the capacitors, voltage
must be gradually increased as follows:
Increase the AC input voltage from zero at a
very slow rate, approximately 7 VAC per
minute, reaching full rated voltage after about
an hour.
Drive Servicing
Remember when servicing the HPV 900
Series 2: Hazardous voltages may exist in the
drive circuits even with drive circuit breaker in
off position.
IMPORTANT
Use extreme caution: Do not touch any circuit
board, the drive, or motor electrical
connections without making sure that the unit
is properly grounded and that no high voltage
is present.
NEVER attempt maintenance unless:
 the incoming three phase power and control
power is disconnected and locked out.
 also, ensure the DC Bus charge light is out.
 even with the light out, we recommend that
you use a voltmeter between (+3) and (-) to
verify that no voltage is present.
If after 5 minutes the DC bus charge light
remains ON or voltage remains between
terminals (B1) and (-):
This will reform the capacitors.
Lifetime Maintenance
The HPV 900 Series 2 is an AC digital drive. It
is intended to last for twenty years in the field
assuming the drive is installed and run
according to Magnetek specifications and
recommendations. The following
recommendations for part replacement to
ensure twenty-year life is as follows:
 Fans - 3 to 8 years
depending on ambient temperature and dust
 Bus Capacitors - 8 to 15 years
depending on ambient temperature and
elevator system load profile
119
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Faults and Alarms
The HPV 900 Series 2 reports two classes of
warnings; these are identified as Faults and
Alarms.
The fault will be placed on the fault history.
The fault history displays the last 16 faults and
a time stamp indicating when each happened.
The fault history IS NOT affected by an active
fault reset or a power loss. The fault history
can be cleared via a user-initiated function.
Faults and Fault Annunciation
A fault a severe failure that will stop a drive if it
has been running and prevent the drive from
starting as long as it is present. All faults
require some type of action by the user to
clear.
READY
F2
A priority message will be seen on the Digital
Operator:
RUN
USER
FAULT
Most faults can be cleared by performing a
fault reset. The fault reset can be initiated by:
 an external logic input
 the serial channel
 automatically by the drive
DATA ENTRY
CAUTION
If the run signal is asserted at the time of a
fault reset, the drive will immediately go into a
run state.
NOTE: Clearing the fault priority message
from the display DOES NOT clear the fault
from the active fault list. The faults must be
cleared by a fault reset before the drive will
run.
CAUTION
If the run signal is asserted at the time of a
fault reset, the drive will immediately go into a
run state. Unless using the auto-fault reset
function (FAULT RESET SRC(C1)=automatic)
then the run command needs to be cycled.
The fault will be placed on the active fault list.
The active fault list will display and record
currently active faults. The faults will remain
on the fault list until an active fault reset is
initiated.
RUN
USER
FAULT
A fault reset can also be done via the Digital
Operator.
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
CHARGE FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
Fault Clearing
A priority message will overwrite whatever is
currently displayed. The user can clear this
message by pressing any key on the Digital
Operator keypad. If another fault is present,
the next fault will appear as a priority message.
READY
TORQUE
LIMIT
The user can assign a fault to an external logic
output.
TORQUE
LIMIT
CHARGE FAULT
F1
FAULT
8:55
SUB MENU
8:55
SUB MENU
USER
1
CHARGE FAULT
04-22-09 15:53:58
There are four means of fault annunciation.
READY
RUN
DATA ENTRY
120
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Guide
READY
RUN
USER
FAULT
Below lists the HPV 900 Series 2’s faults,
alarms, and operator messages along with
possible causes and corrective actions.
Note:
 fault - a severe failure that will stop a drive
if it has been running and prevent the drive
from starting as long as it is present. All
faults require some type of action by the
user to clear.
 alarm - only meant for annunciation. It will
NOT stop the operation of the drive or
prevent the drive from operating.
 operator message - operator
communications message. It will NOT
stop the operation of the drive or prevent
the drive from operating.
Status LED
READY
(red)
RUN
(red)
USER
(red)
FAULT
(red)
TORQUE
LIMIT
(red)
ESC
SUBMENU
Description
The drive is ready to run meaning:
 The software is up and ready.
 No faults are present.
The drive is in operation.
 RUN & DRIVE ENABLE
logic inputs true
 Current being sent to the motor
This LED is directly related to the
programming of USER LED (C3)
TORQUE
LIMIT
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
N/A
N/A
Check Parameter Setting
 Check setting of USER LED (C3)
Fault Present in the Drive
The drive has declared a fault.
 Use digital operator to check the fault
Incorrect Wiring
 Motor phasing should match the encoder
feedback phasing. If the phasing is not
correct, the motor will not accelerate up to
speed. It will typically oscillate back and
forth at zero speed, and the current will be
at the torque limit.
 Switch either two motor phases or swap two
encoder wires (A and /A).
Drive and/or Motor is Undersized
The drive has reached its torque limit.
 Verify drive and/or motor sizing. May need
a larger capacity HPV 900 Series 2 and or
motor.
Check Parameter Settings
 Check the torque limit parameters MTR
TORQUE LIMIT and REGEN TORQ LIMIT
(A1) – maximum 250% of drive continuous
current
 Check speed regulator parameters
RESPONSE and INERTIA (A1)
Table 22: Status LED Troubleshooting Guide
121
Troubleshooting

The following table lists the HPV 900 Series
2’s faults and alarms along with possible
causes and corrective actions.

Note:
 fault - a severe failure that will stop a drive
if it has been running and prevent the drive
from starting as long as it is present. All
faults require some type of action by the
user to clear.
Name
Alignment is
Done
(alarm)
Description
Annunciation that alignment has
finished
AT Cont Flt
Drive sees an open phase during
Autotune or Auto Align
Autotune is
Done
(alarm)
Annunciation that autotune has
finished
Bad Srl Chksm More than two messages with bad
checksums have been received over
(alarm)
the serial channel.
Brake Fault
Dynamic brake resistor overcurrent.
Brk Hold Flt
The brake hold command and the
brake feedback did not match for the
time specified with Brake Hold Time
parameter.
122
alarm - only meant for annunciation. It will
NOT stop the operation of the drive or
prevent the drive from operating.
operator message - operator
communications message. It will NOT
stop the operation of the drive or prevent
the drive from operating.
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Parameter Settings
 Alignment procedure was enabled in the
U10 submenu
 Drive had no errors and completed the
requested alignment
Check Parameter Settings and Contactor
 If using drive output to close contactor,
verify it is set to CLOSE CONTACT and
Autotune or Autoalign has been enables
using the ON RUN selection
 Verify contactor is already closed if using
Autotune or Autoalign YES selection
 Contactor or wiring hardware problem
Parameter Settings
 Autotune procedure was enabled in the
U12 submenu
 Drive had no errors and completed the
requested autotune
Electronic noise interference
 Verify there is no electronic noise
interference
Baud rate mismatch
 Baud rate mismatch is between drive
and car controller. Verify baud rate
settings.
Brake Resistor problem
 Braking Resistor is shorted.
 When this fault occurs while the elevator
is in motion, it will be declared as a
brake fault alarm until the run condition
is removed. If the drive is in regeneration
an Overvolt Fault may occur instead.
Check Parameter Settings
 Check BRAKE HOLD SRC (C1)
parameter for the correct source of
brake hold feedback
 Check BRAKE HOLD TIME (A1)
parameter for the correct brake hold
time.
If nuisance fault, the fault can be disabled by
BRK HOLD FLT ENA (C1) parameter.
Troubleshooting
Name
Brk Open Flt
Brk Pick Flt
Charge Fault
Description
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
The drive saw movement during either Elevator Brake is not set
the AutoTune (U11) or the Auto
 Verify the elevator brake is clamped and
Alignment (U12)
no visual movement occurred
Check Parameter Settings
 Check BRK FLT LEVEL (A4)
 If the brake is set, increase BRK FLT
LEVEL (A4) until fault no longer occurs
The brake pick command and the
Check Parameter Settings and
brake feedback did not match for the Mechanical Brake Pick Signal Wiring
time specified with Brake Pick Time
 Check the correct logic input is
parameter.
configured for the correct TB1 terminal
and set to MECH BRK PICK (C2)
 Check wiring between the mechanical
brake and the terminal on TB1.
 Check BRAKE PICK SRC (C1)
parameter for the correct source of
brake pick feedback
 Check BRAKE PICK TIME (A1)
parameter for the correct brake hold
time.
If nuisance fault, the fault can be disabled by
BRK PICK FLT ENA (C1) parameter.
The DC bus voltage has not stabilized DC Choke Connection
above the voltage fault level within 2  Check that the DC choke link is present
or if using DC choke, check DC choke
seconds or the charge contactor has
connections
not closed after charging.
OR
Low Input Voltage
The DC bus voltage is below the UV  Check INPUT L-L VOLTS (A4) and UV
Fault level as defined by the INPUT LFAULT LEVEL (A4) parameters
L VOLTS (A4) and UV FAULT LEVEL  Disconnect Dynamic Braking resistor
(A4) parameters
and re-try.
 Verify proper input voltage and increase,
if necessary, the input AC voltage within
the proper range
 Check for a missing input phase
 Check power line disturbances due to
starting of other equipment
Drive Accurately Reading the Dc Bus
 Measure the dc bus with a meter
between B1 and - terminals
 Compare that with the value on the
digital operator, DC BUS VOLTAGE
(D2)
Drive may need to be replaced
123
Troubleshooting
Name
Contactor Flt
Cube ID Fault
Curr Reg Flt
Description
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
The command to close the contactor Check Parameter Settings and Contactor
and the contactor feedback do not
 Check CONTACT FLT TIME (A1)
match before the time specified by the
parameter for the correct contactor fault
Contact Flt Time parameter.
time.
 Check wiring to logic input configured as
CONTACT CFIRM
 Contactor hardware problem
Run Command / Contact Confirm Timing
 Check Contact Cfirm logic input vs. Run
command
 Increase CONTACT FLT TIME (A1)
enough for both CONTACT CFIRM and
RUN to be active
If nuisance fault, the fault can be disabled by
CONT CONFIRM SRC (C1) parameter (set
to none).
The identification number for the drive Hardware Problem
is invalid.
 Power cycle the drive.
 If re-occurs, replace Drive Control board
 If re-occurs, the drive needs to be
replaced
Actual current does not match the
Current Regulation problem
command current. The drive is
 Check for a low input line
commanding more motor voltage then  Check if drive accurately reading the dc
is available on the input.
bus
 Measure the dc bus with a meter
across terminals +3 and –
 Compare that with the value on the
digital operator, DC BUS VOLTAGE
(D2)
 Complete Adaptive Tune and Inertia
procedure, see pages 139-142.
 Check for a possible motor open phase
 Check if contactor is closing.
 Check for accurate motor parameters
(A5)
 Verify motor nameplate values are
entered correctly
 Complete Adaptive Tune and Inertia
procedure, see pages 139-142.
 As a last step, calculate motor
parameters from motor’s equivalent
circuit, see page 143.
 Otherwise, replace the drive
124
Troubleshooting
Name
DB VOLTAGE
or
DB VOLTAGE
(alarm)
DCU data Flt
Dir Conflict
(alarm)
Description
Dynamic braking IGBT is still on ten
seconds after the drive stops running
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Too High of Braking Resistor Value
 Check for no braking resistor
 Possible Brake IGBT Failure
 Possible brake resistor is open
Dynamic Braking Wiring Problem
 Check dynamic brake hardware wiring
High Input Voltage
 Decrease input AC voltage with the
proper range (see specifications in
technical manual)
 Use reactor to minimize voltage spikes
Drive Accurately Reading the DC Bus
 Measure the dc bus with a meter
between B1 and - terminals
 Compare that with the value on the
digital operator, DC BUS VOLTAGE
(D2)
Hardware Problem
 Replace Drive Control board
 Replace Drive
The DCU parameters checksum is
Parameters Corrupted
invalid.
 Check & re-enter parameters and power
cycle the drive
 If re-occurs, replace Drive Control board
Declared when the speed command is Check Parameter Settings
held at zero due conflict with the
 Sensitivity determined by the ZERO
analog speed command polarity and
SPEED LEVEL (A1)
the run up / run down logic
Confirm Speed Command Polarity
DIR CONFIRM (C1) must be enabled.  Check polarity of the analog speed
command on analog channel #1
For more information on this function,
 Compare that with the RUN UP
see User Switches C1 Submenu on
(positive) and RUN DOWN (negative)
page 81.
logic input status
If nuisance, the function can be disabled by
DIR CONFIRM (C1) parameter.
125
Troubleshooting
Name
Drive Ovrload
Description
The drive has exceeded the drive
overload curve.
Drive Temp
Alarm
(alarm)
The heatsink on the drive has
exceeded 85C.
126
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Excessive Field Weakening
 Decrease FLUX WKN FACTOR (A1)
parameter
 Decrease both MTR TORQUE LIMIT
(A1) and REGEN TORQ LIMIT (A1)
parameters
 Watch for the Torque Limit LED (see
Table 22 on page 121), if lit the torque
limits or the flux weakening factor
parameters were decreased too much.
Accurate Motor Parameters
 Verify motor nameplate values are
entered correctly
 Complete Adaptive Tune and Inertia
procedure, see pages 139-142.
 As a last step, calculate motor
parameters from motor’s equivalent
circuit, see Motor Parameter
Calculations on page 143.
Excessive Current Draw
 Decrease accel/decel rate
 Is elevator car being held in position?
(i.e. mechanical brake not releasing)
 Mechanical brake may not have properly
released
Encoder Problem
 Check encoder coupling: align or replace
 Encoder failure (replace encoder)
 Check encoder count parameter
ENCODER PULSES (A1)
Motor Problem
 Check for motor failure
Drive Sizing
 Verify drive sizing. May need a larger
capacity HPV 900 Series 2
Excessive Heat
 Reduce Ambient Temperature
 Clean heat sink
 Check for cooling fan failure
Troubleshooting
Name
Encdr Crc Err
(EnDat PM)
Description
Alarm and Fault:
Absolute encoder checksum error is
detected. The alarm is posted if the
CRC error does not affect drive
operation. If the error persists, the
alarm is converted into the fault.
Encod Out of
Tol
(Incremental
PM)
Z pulse channel not pulsing within a
preset window the drive expects to
see.
127
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Noise Immunity Issue
 Make sure that the encoder cable is
properly grounded.
Encoder Problem
 Encoder wiring problem – check for
broken encoder leads.
 Encoder Power Supply folding back,
check between pins 19 and 25 for +5V
on TB1. If supply is low, verify encoder
voltage sense and ground sense wires
are not connected together.
 Encoder failure – replace encoder and
REALIGN rotor.
 Inadequate encoder type – the absolute
encoder option board will only support
sin/cos absolute encoders
Option Board Problem
 Also verify JM2 is connected to position
1-2, or 2-3
 Check power to encoder on pins 73 and
74 of the EnDat Option card
 Replace the option board
Sheave position changed
 Drive must be on looking at encoder
feedback anytime the machine moves
 Redo the alignment procedure
Encoder Problem
 Encoder wiring problem – check for
broken encoder leads.
Troubleshooting
Name
Encoder Flt
(closed loop)
EncoderFault
OFF
(alarm)
Description
The drive is in a run condition and the
encoder is:
not functioning
or
not connected.
or
phasing is not proper with the
motor.
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Encoder Should Match Motor Phasing
 Usually drive’s “HIT TORQUE LIMIT”
alarm message is displayed (depending
on setting of TRQ LIM MSG DLY (A1)
parameter)
 Switch either two motor phases or swap
two encoder wires (A and /A)
Encoder Power Supply Loss
 Check 12 or 5 volt supply on terminal
strip
Accurate Motor Parameters
 Verify motor nameplate values are
entered correctly
 Complete Adaptive Tune and Inertia
procedure
 As a last step, calculate motor
parameters from motor’s equivalent
circuit.
Response of Speed Regulator
 Enter accurate INERTIA (A1) parameter
 Increase RESPONSE (A1) parameter
Encoder Coupling Sloppy or Broken
 Check encoder to motor coupling
 Excessive Noise on Encoder Lines
 Check encoder connections. Separate
encoder leads from power wiring (cross
power lead at 90)
Other Conditions Causing Fault
 Check encoder count parameter
ENCODER PULSES (A1)
 Possible motor phase loss
Hardware Problem
 Replace Drive Control board.
When the Encoder Fault is disabled
Check Parameter Settings
(ENCODER FAULT (C1) = disabled),  Check the setting of parameter
the drive will display the warning
ENCODER FAULT (C1)
message “EncoderFault OFF”, every
time the RUN command is removed.
Extrn Fault 1
User defined external logic fault input
Extrn Fault 2
User defined external logic fault input
128
Check Parameter Settings and External
Fault Signal Wiring
 Check the correct logic input is
configured for the correct TB1 terminal
and set to EXTRN FAULT 1 (C2)
 Check external fault is on the correct
terminal on TB1.
Check Parameter Settings and External
Fault Signal Wiring
 Check the correct logic input is
configured for the correct TB1 terminal
and set to EXTRN FAULT 2 (C2)
 Check external fault is on the correct
terminal on TB1.
Troubleshooting
Name
Extrn Fault 3
Extrn Fault 4
Fuse Fault
Ground Fault
HIT TORQUE
LIMIT
(alarm)
Description
User defined external logic fault input
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Check Parameter Settings and External
Fault Signal Wiring
 Check the correct logic input is
configured for the correct TB1 terminal
and set to EXTRN FAULT 3 (C2)
 Check external fault is on the correct
terminal on TB1.
User defined external logic fault input Check Parameter Settings and External
...Opening of this contact will cause
Fault Signal Wiring
 Check the correct logic input is
the drive to declare the fault
configured for the correct TB1 terminal
and set to EXTRN /FLT 4 (C2)
 Check external fault is on the correct
terminal on TB1.
The DC bus fuse on the drive is open. Hardware Problem
 Check if motor is faulty
 Check if any output phases shorted to
ground.
 The drive may need to be replaced.
The sum of all phase currents has
Improper Wiring
exceeded 50% of the rated amps of
 Reset drive faults. Retry. If cleared,
reconnect motor and control. If problem
the drive.
continues possible short between the
motor windings and chassis
 If problem continues, check system
grounding
 Also, the drive may need to be replaced.
The drive has reached its torque limit. Incorrect Wiring
 Motor phasing should match the encoder
feedback phasing. If the phasing is not
correct, the motor will not accelerate up
to speed. It will typically oscillate back
and forth at zero speed, and the current
will be at the torque limit.
 Switch either two motor phases or swap
two encoder wires (A and /A).
Drive and/or Motor is Undersized
 Verify drive and/or motor sizing. May
need a larger capacity HPV 900 Series 2
and or motor.
Check Parameter Settings
 Check the torque limit parameters MTR
TORQUE LIMIT and REGEN TORQ
LIMIT (A1)
 Check speed regulator parameters
RESPONSE and INERTIA (A1)
 Alarm sensitivity - TRQ LIM MSG
DELAY (A1) parameter determines the
amount of time the drive is in torque limit
before the alarm message is displayed.
129
Troubleshooting
Name
Description
Motor Ovrload The motor had exceeded the user
(fault or alarm) defined motor overload curve.
Mspd Tmr Flt
Mtr Data Flt
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Verify Overload Curve Parameters
 Check both OVLD START LEVEL (A5)
and OVLD TIME OUT (A5) parameters.
Note: fault or alarm setting dependant Excessive Field Weakening
on setting of MOTOR OVRLD SEL
 Decrease FLUX WKN FACTOR (A1)
(C1) parameter.
parameter
 Decrease both MTR TORQUE LIMIT
(A1) and REGEN TORQ LIMIT (A1)
parameters
 Watch for the “Hit Torque Limit” alarm
message, if message appears the
torque limits or the flux weakening factor
parameters were decreased too much.
Accurate Motor Parameters
 Verify motor nameplate values are
entered correctly
 Complete Adaptive Tune and Inertia
procedure (see pages 139-142).
 As a last step, calculate motor
parameters from motor’s equivalent
circuit.
Excessive Current Draw
 Decrease accel/decel rate
 Is elevator car being held in position?
(i.e. mechanical brake not releasing)
 Mechanical brake may not have properly
released
Encoder Problem
 Check encoder coupling: align or replace
 Encoder failure (replace encoder)
 Check encoder count parameter
ENCODER PULSES (A1)
Motor Problem
 Check for motor failure
This fault is declared if at least two
Check Parameters Settings:
MLT-SPD TO DLY x (C1) parameters  Check MLT-SPD TO DLY 1 (C1)
are defined to the same multi-step
parameter for setting
speed command.
 Check MLT-SPD TO DLY 2 (C1)
parameter for setting
 Check MLT-SPD TO DLY 3 (C1)
parameter for setting
 Check MLT-SPD TO DLY 4 (C1)
parameter for setting
This fault is declared if any motor
Check parameter Settings:
nameplate data information in the A5  Check RATED MTR POWER (A5)
submenu is 0.
 Check RATED MTR VOLTS (A5)
 Check RATED EXCIT FREQ (A5)
 Check RATED MOTOR CURR (A5)
 Check MOTOR POLES (A5)
 Check RATED MTR SPEED (A5)
130
Troubleshooting
Name
OLA Endt Flt
(EnDat PM)
Description
Open Loop Alignment EnDat Fault
131
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Phasing Problem
 If the motor was running smoothly
immediately before the drive declared an
OLA ENDT FLT, Swap two motor leads
(e.g. U and W) to establish proper
phasing between absolute position data
(EnDat, serial) and motor.
Note: Swapping encoder leads is NOT
the same as swapping motor wiring. Do
not swap both motor phase leads and
encoder inputs at the same time.
Torque Constant Scale needs to be
adjusted
If the motor was running rough, jerky, or
stalled immediately before the drive
declared an OLA ENDT FLT, increase
the value located in TRQ CONST
SCALE (A5).
Rotor is Not Moving when Open Loop
Alignment Commanded
 Verify that the brake is picked and that
the car is properly balanced.
 Verify that the motor contactor is closed
during the alignment.
 Verify motor parameters in A5 menu.
 Increase OLA Vq REF SCALE factor to
overcome excessive static friction that
may exist in the elevator.
Run command was removed during Open
Loop Alignment
 Verify the run command stayed active
while alignment was occurring
Note: This is only true when BEGIN
ALIGNMENT? = ON RUN
Encoder Problem
 Encoder failure (replace encoder and
REALIGN the rotor).
Motor Parameter Problems
 Verify values in Motor (A5) menu are
correct
Troubleshooting
Name
OLA Inc Flt
Overcurr Flt
Overspeed Flt
(closed loop)
Description
Open Loop Alignment Incremental
Fault
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Phasing Problem – EnDat PM
 Swap two encoder leads (e.g. A and –A)
to establish proper phasing
Note: Swapping encoder leads is NOT
the same as swapping motor wiring. Do
not swap both motor phase leads and
encoder inputs at the same time.
Phasing Problem – Incremental PM
 Swap two encoder leads (e.g. A and –A)
to establish proper phasing or swap two
motor leads (e.g. U and V)
Encoder Problem
 Check encoder coupling: align or replace
 Check encoder wiring
 Encoder failure (replace encoder and
REALIGN the rotor)
 Option board failure (replace option
board).
 Z-Pulse channel not working correctly
The phase current exceeded 300% of Encoder Problem
rated current.
 Check encoder coupling: align or replace
 Encoder failure (replace encoder)
Motor Problem
 Possible motor lead short
 Check for motor failure
Excessive Load
 Verify motor and drive sizing. May need
a larger capacity HPV 900 Series 2
Accurate Motor Parameters
 Verify motor nameplate values are
entered correctly
 Complete Adaptive Tune and Inertia
procedure, see pages 139-142.
 As a last step, calculate motor
parameters from motor’s equivalent
circuit, see Motor Parameter
Calculations on page 143.
Inaccurate Parameters
 Check setting of FAST FLUX (C1)
 Disable if enabled
Timing Issue
 Check Contactor Timing
 Check for a steady RUN command
(usually only able to be viewed on a
scope)
Hardware Problem
 The drive may need to be replaced.
Generated when the motor has gone Check Parameter Settings
beyond the user defined percentage
 Check OVERSPEED LEVEL (A1)
contract speed for a specified amount
parameter for the correct level.
of time.
 Check OVERSPEED TIME (A1)
parameter for the correct time.
 Note: This fault is defined by Overspeed
Level parameter and Overspeed Time
parameter.
132
Troubleshooting
Name
Overtemp Flt
Description
The heatsink on the drive has
exceeded 95C (194F).
Overvolt Flt
The DC bus voltage of the drive
exceeded:
850 Volts for a 460V class drive
425 Volts for a 230V class drive.
Phase Loss
The drive senses an open motor
phase. The drive senses more than
one motor phase crossing zero at the
same time.
Reverse Tach
RTR NOT
ALIGN (PM)
See ENCODER FLT
Run command given before aligning
the rotor
(Clears automatically)
Ser2 Spd Flt
This fault is declared if the SER2 INSP
SPD (A1) or SER2 RS CRP SPD (A1)
parameters have exceeded contract
speed (CONTRACT CAR SPD (A1)
parameter).
Setup Fault 1
This fault is declared if the rated motor
speed and excitation frequency do not
satisfy:
  rated
 rated 
 

  # 
 
 motor   1222.3
9.6  120 excitation   
poles 




  frequency  
 speed 
…checks for too low or too high value
of slip
133
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Excessive Heat
 Reduce Ambient Temperature
 Clean heat sink
 Check for cooling fan failure
Too High of Braking Resistor Value
 Check for no braking resistor
 Possible Brake IGBT Failure
 Possible brake resistor is open
Dynamic Braking Wiring Problem
 Check dynamic brake hardware wiring
High Input Voltage
 Decrease input AC voltage with the
proper range
 Use reactor to minimize voltage spikes
Drive Accurately Reading the Dc Bus
 Measure the dc bus with a meter across
terminals B1 and –
 Compare that with the value on the
digital operator, DC BUS VOLTAGE
(D2)
Hardware Problem
 Replace Drive Control board
Motor Problem
 Check motor wiring
 Check for motor failure
 Check for bad contactor or contactor
timing issue.
See ENCODER FLT
Initial Setup Not Performed
 Perform rotor alignment
Alignment Failed
 Repeat the alignment. If any fault gets
posted during the alignment, the setup
offset will be set out of the range causing
this alignment to fault.
Check Parameters Settings:
 Check SER2 INSP SPD (A1) parameter,
if greater than CONTRACT CAR SPD
(A1) parameter.
 Check SER2 RS CRP SPD (A1)
parameter, if greater than CONTRACT
CAR SPD (A1) parameter.
Check Parameters Settings:
 Check RATED EXCIT FREQ (A5)
parameter for correct setting
 Check RATED MTR SPEED (A5)
parameter for correct setting
 Check MOTOR POLES (A5) parameter
for correct setting
Troubleshooting
Name
Setup Fault 2
(closed loop)
Description
This fault is declared if the number of
poles and encoder pulses per
revolution do not satisfy:
 encoder
 pulses

#

 poles






  64
Setup Fault 3
This fault is declared if the number of
poles is not an even number.
Setup Fault 4
(closed loop
only)
This fault is declared if the contract
motor speed (in rpm) and encoder
pulses/revolution do not satisfy:
 contract

300 , 000   motor
 speed

Setup Fault 5

  encoder
 
  pulses


 18 , 000 ,000

Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Check Parameters Settings:
 Check ENCODER PULSES (A1)
parameter for correct setting
 Check MOTOR POLES (A5) parameter
for correct setting
Check Parameters Settings:
 Check MOTOR POLES (A5) parameter
for correct setting
Check Parameters Settings:
 Check ENCODER PULSES (A1)
parameter for correct setting
 Check CONTRACT MTR SPD (A1)
parameter for correct setting
This fault is declared if the rated motor Check Parameters Settings:
power (in watts) and rated motor
 Check RATED MOTOR PWR (A5)
voltage do not satisfy:
parameter for correct setting
 Check RATED MTR VOLTS (A5)
  rated   general


parameter for correct setting
  motor   purpose
  power   current
( 0 .07184 )  

  rated   rating
  motor  
of

  drive
voltage
 
 
Setup Fault 6
Setup Fault 7
Setup Fault 8
Setup Fault 9
This fault is declared if the multi-step
speed references have exceeded a
defined limit, which is defined in terms
of a percentage of contract speed
(CONTRACT CAR SPD parameter).
This fault is declared if the run logic
inputs are defined incorrectly. You
can either choose group #1 (RUN and
UP/DWN) or group #2 (RUN UP and
RUN DOWN). But you cannot mix and
match or this fault will be declared.
This fault is declared if the DIR
CONFIRM (C1) parameter is enabled
and any of the following conditions are
not met:
A logic input (C2) must be assigned to
RUN UP.
A logic input (C2) must be assigned to
RUN DOWN.
The SPD COMMAND SRC (C1)
parameter must be set to ANALOG
INPUT
... Confirms proper set-up of Analog
Speed Command direction confirm
function
This fault is declared if the same value
is listed as multiple logic inputs
134
Check Parameters Settings:
 Check SPEED COMMAND1-16 (A3)
parameters, if greater than 110% of
CONTRACT CAR SPD (A1) parameter
Check Parameters Settings:
 Check configurations of logic inputs (C2)
– either RUN & UP/DWN or RUN UP &
RUN DOWN
Check Parameters Settings:
 Check configurations of logic inputs (C2)
for two logic input defined as RUN UP &
RUN DOWN
 Verify SPD COMMAND SRC (C1) is set
to ANALOG INPUT
 If nuisance fault and not using Up-Down
Confirm function disabled by setting the
DIR CONFIRM (C1) parameter to
DISABLED
Check Parameters Settings:
 Check configurations of logic inputs (C2)
 Verify selections are only set once
between Logic Input 1 and Logic Input 9
Troubleshooting
Name
Description
Setup Fault 10 This fault is declared if the Input L-L
Volts is set to 000.00
Setup Fault 11 This fault is declared if ENCODER
SELECT (C1) = ENDAT ABSOLUTE
and the number of pulses entered in
ENCODER PULSES (A1) is greater
than 3125
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Check Parameters Settings:
 Check Input L-L Volts (A4)
 Verify setting of Input L-L Volts matches
measure AC Input to Drive
Check Parameters Settings:
 Verify the setting of ENCODER SELECT
(C1)
 If an EnDat Absolute Encoder is used
and ENCODER SELECT (C1) is set to
ENDAT ABSOLUTE – verify the value
placed in ENCODER PULSES (A1) is
between 500 – 3125
Check Parameters Settings:
 Verify the setting of all parameters and
re-program if required
Setup Fault 12 This fault is declared if the DRIVE
MODE (U9) is changed and a
previously entered value falls outside
the acceptable range. Upon issue of
this setup fault all applicable
parameters will be restored to defaults
to bring them within the acceptable
range
The integrated power module is
Short Circuit
Overcurrent Problem
sensing an overcurrent or over
 Check for a possible short between the
temperature condition
motor windings.
 Verify dynamic brake resistor size (could
be too small)
Overtemperature Problem
 Reduce Ambient Temperature
 Clean heat sink
 Check for cooling fan failure
The drive may need to be replaced, if no
other problem found.
135
Troubleshooting
Name
Spd Dev Flt
(PM)
Description
The speed feedback is failing to
properly track the speed reference.
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Encoder Cable not properly grounded

&
Verify Encoder Cable is properly grounded
using the shield clamp provided on the
drive
Motor Runaway Condition – (PM)

Spd Dev Alm




Encoder is slipping on the shaft – fix the
encoder coupling and repeat the alignment
Wrong ENCODER ANG OFFSET (A5)
value is uploaded or entered – enter
correct value or repeat the alignment
The absolute position encoder is not in
sync with motor phasing (would be
detected during the open loop alignment,
but NOT if manual or auto alignment
methods were used). Swap two motor
leads. If Encoder Flt is set after swapping
the motor leads, switching encoder leads
(A and /A).
For Incremental PM an auto alignment will
occur at the beginning of the next run.
Verify FINE TUNE OFST (A4) is 0.00 (for
ENDAT PM) or value consistent with
previous value found during Incremental
startup.
Drive and/or Motor is Undersized


Usually drive’s “HIT TORQUE LIMIT”
alarm message is displayed (depending on
setting of TRQ LIM MSG DLY (A1)
parameter)
Verify drive and/or motor sizing. May need
a larger capacity HPV 900 PM and/or
motor.
Check Parameter Settings – PM
Usually drive’s “HIT TORQUE LIMIT”
alarm message is displayed (depending on
setting of TRQ LIM MSG DLY (A1)
parameter)
 Check speed regulator parameters
RESPONSE and INERTIA (A1)
 Fault/Alarm sensitivity – SPD DEV FLT
LVL or SPD DEV ALM LVL (A1) parameter
is set too low for required
acceleration/deceleration rate.
NOTE: Setting SPD DEV FLT LVL too high
will reduce drive’s sensitivity runaway
conditions!

Check Parameter Settings – Closed Loop
Usually drive’s “HIT TORQUE LIMIT”
alarm message is displayed (depending on
setting of TRQ LIM MSG DLY (A1)
parameter)
 Check speed regulator parameters
RESPONSE and INERTIA (A1)
 Fault/Alarm sensitivity – SPD DEV HI LVL
parameter is set too low for required
acceleration/deceleration rate.

136
Troubleshooting
Name
Srl Timeout
Description
The drive is being operated by serial
communications and one of the
following has occurred:
 Communication time-out – if the
serial run bit is set and the drive
does not receive a run-time
message for 40 msec
 Bad message checksum – drive
has detected three consecutive
bad message checksums
Start Time High The drive saw movement during ARB
mode before ARB START TIME (A1)
(alarm)
is active
Stall Fault
(open loop)
Generated when the motor current
goes at or above a percentage
(defined by STALL TEST LVL) for
defined amount of time (defined by
STALL FAULT TIME).
Tq Lim
2Hi 4cube
The torque limits (based on the
defined motor) exceed the cube’s
capacity
137
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Bad Serial Connection
 Remove and re-seat the serial cable
 Check car controller serial driver board
 Check the serial cable connected to the
drive
 Also, the drive’s control board may need
to be replaced.
Check Parameter Setting
 If not using serial communications,
check SERIAL MODE (C1) = none
Check Parameter Setting
 Lower ARB START TIME (A1) to occur
before the brake lifts
Possible noise issue
 Verify grounding shield of encoder cable
is directly wired to solid ground
Check Parameter Settings
 Check STALL TEST LVL (A1)
parameter for the correct percentage of
motor current
 Check CONTACT FLT TIME (A1)
parameter for the correct time
 If nuisance fault, the fault can be
disabled by STALL TEST ENA (C1)
parameter (set to disabled)
Excessive Current Draw
 Decrease accel/decel rate
 Is elevator car being held in position?
(i.e. mechanical brake not releasing)
 Mechanical brake may not have properly
released
Motor Problem
 Check for motor failure
Accurate Motor Parameters
 Verify motor nameplate values are
entered correctly
 Complete Adaptive Tune and Inertia
procedure
 As a last step, calculate motor
parameters from motor’s equivalent
circuit
Check Parameters Settings
 Verify motor nameplate values are
entered correctly in the A5 sub-menu
 Decrease both MTR TORQUE LIMIT
(A1) and REGEN TORQ LIMIT (A1)
parameters
Drive Sizing
 Verify drive sizing. May need a larger
capacity HPV 900 S2
Troubleshooting
Name
Undervolt Flt
Description
Generated during a run condition
when the DC bus voltage drops below
the user specified percent of the input
line-to-line voltage. The input line-toline voltage is specified by the Input LL Volts parameter and the fault level is
specified by the Undervoltage Fault
Level parameter.
Uv Alarm
(alarm)
Generated during a run condition
when the DC bus voltage drops below
the user specified percent of the input
line-to-line voltage. The input line-toline voltage is specified by the Input LL Volts parameter and the fault level is
specified by the Undervoltage Alarm
Level parameter.
V/Hz Fault
(open loop)
This fault is following two formulas are
not satisfied:
 MOTOR 
 MOTOR



 MIN
   MID
 VOLTS : 
 VOLTS




 RATED


   MTR

 VOLTS







 MOTOR

 MIN
 FREQ


 RATED


   EXCIT

 FREQ








 MOTOR


   MID

 FREQ


138
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Low Input Voltage
 Check INPUT L-L VOLTS (A4) and UV
FAULT LEVEL (A4) parameters
 Disconnect Dynamic Braking resistor
and re-try.
 Verify proper input voltage and increase,
if necessary, the input AC voltage within
the proper range
 Check for a missing input phase
 Check power line disturbances due to
starting of other equipment
Drive Accurately Reading the Dc Bus
 Measure the dc bus with a meter across
terminals B1 and –
 Compare that with the value on the
digital operator, DC BUS VOLTAGE
(D2)
Hardware Problem
 The drive may need to be replaced.
Low Input Voltage
 Check INPUT L-L VOLTS (A4) and UV
ALARM LEVEL (A4) parameters
 Disconnect Dynamic Braking resistor
and re-try.
 Verify proper input voltage and increase,
if necessary, the input AC voltage within
the proper range
 Check for a missing input phase
 Check power line disturbances due to
starting of other equipment
Drive Accurately Reading the Dc Bus
 Measure the dc bus with a meter across
terminals B1 and –
 Compare that with the value on the
digital operator, DC BUS VOLTAGE
(D2)
Hardware Problem
 The drive may need to be replaced.
Check Parameters Settings:
 Check RATED MTR VOLTS (A5)
parameter for correct setting
 Check MOTOR MID VOLTS (A5)
parameter for correct setting
 Check MOTOR MIN VOLTS (A5)
parameter for correct setting
 Check RATED EXCIT FREQ (A5)
parameter for correct setting
 Check MOTOR MID FREQ (A5)
parameter for correct setting
 Check MOTOR MIN FREQ (A5)
parameter for correct setting
Appendix – Adaptive Tune
Appendix
The default motor selections for the motor id
will place a zero values in the motor nameplate
parameters (see Figure 41). This selection will
also load nominal values for the other motor
parameters listed in Table 23
Closed Loop Adaptive Tune
The adaptive tune automatically calculates,
under certain operating conditions, the
percentage no load current and the rated rpm
(slip frequency). The HPV 900 Series 2
software uses these two adaptive tune
calculated values to obtain the maximum
performance from the motor.
 Now, enter the motor nameplate data into
the needed motor nameplate parameters
(see Figure 41)
Adaptive Tune Operating Conditions
The HPV 900 Series 2 software estimates the
motor’s percent no load current and the
motor’s rated rpm. These estimated values are
only estimated around a window of 25% of
the parameter settings for:
 percent no-load current
(% NO LOAD CURR)
 rated motor speed
(RATED MTR SPEED)
The adaptive tune will estimate:
 the motor’s percent no load current when
the motor torque is below 20%.
 the motor’s rated rpm when the motor
torque is above 30%.
READY
A5
A5
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
SUB MENU
HP
DATA ENTRY
Tuning Motor No-Load Current
With a balanced car, run the car at 70%
contract speed from top floor to the bottom
floor then back to the top floor.
 During these runs verify under DISPLAY
MENU - POWER DATA D2 that the
MOTOR TORQUE is between 15%. If the
value is larger then 15% the car is not
balanced correctly.
READY
RUN
D2
USER
SUB MENU
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
DATA ENTRY
139
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
Motor Torque
+00000
Motor ID
4 POLE DEFAULT
SUB MENU
FAULT
Min 1.0
Max 500.0
Initial Set-up
 Select a valid Motor ID or one of the two
default motors (either 4 or 6 pole) for the
MOTOR ID parameter
RUN
USER
Rated Mtr Pwr
030.0
Using the Adaptive Tune to Obtain
Maximum Motor Performance
The following is a step-by-step procedure to
optimize the window around which the
adaptive tune will estimate its two values.
NOTE: Although the listed speeds are
recommended, the adaptive tune procedure
can be ran initially at lower speeds, as long as
the speed is greater than 10% of contract
speed.
READY
RUN
%
DATA ENTRY
Appendix – Adaptive Tune
RATED
MTR
VOLTS
RATED
EXCIT
FREQ
VOLTS
MOTOR POLES
assumption of 60Hz
Rated
Speed
(RPM)
# of
motor
poles
1300-1800
900-1200
660-900
4
6
8
PHAS
RATED
MTR
POWER
HZ
H.P.
RATED
MTR
SPEED
R.P.M.
AMPS
RATED
MOTOR
CURR
Motor Nameplate
Figure 41: Motor Parameters Entered from Motor Nameplate
description
percentage no load current
stator leakage reactance
rotor leakage reactance
stator resistance
motor loss - motor iron loss
motor loss - motor mechanical loss
flux curve - flux saturation break point
flux curve - flux saturation slope #1
flux curve - flux saturation slope #2
Parameter
% NO LOAD CURR
STATOR LEAKAGE X
ROTOR LEAKAGE X
STATOR RESIST
MOTOR IRON LOSS
MOTOR MECH LOSS
FLUX SAT BREAK
FLUX SAT SLOPE 1
FLUX SAT SLOPE 2
4 pole dflt
35.0 %
9.0 %
9.0 %
1.5 %
0.5 %
1.0 %
75 %
0%
50 %
Table 23: Nominal Values for Motor Parameters
140
6 pole dflt
45.0 %
7.5 %
7.5 %
1.5 %
0.5 %
1.0 %
75 %
0%
50 %
Appendix – Adaptive Tune
Enter this estimated value into the motor
parameter.
NOTE: If you are having problems getting
the motor torque under 15% the cause
may be:
 No compensation chains
If the elevator system has no
compensation chains, achieving
balanced condition may be difficult. In
that case, the MOTOR TORQUE
should be between 15% for as much
of the run as possible.
 High elevator system friction
If the elevator system has high friction,
achieving motor torque of under 15%
may be difficult. In that case, have
less than the balance car weight in the
car, thus letting the counterweight help
to overcome the frictional losses. In
this case, the you should look only at
the estimated values in the up
direction and run the car in the up
direction a number of times before
changing any parameter settings.

READY
A5
D2
USER
FAULT
DATA ENTRY
 Continue iterating the above two steps until
the two values are within 2%. If the values
do not converge after two iterations, verify
the information entered in the initial set-up
is correct.
 After the values converge, again verify the
MOTOR TORQUE < 15% and the FLUX
REFERENCE = 100%.
Tuning Motor’s Flux Saturation Curve
With a balanced car, run the car at 100%
contract speed from top floor to the bottom
floor then back to the top floor.
 During these top / bottom runs observe
under DISPLAY MENU - POWER DATA
D2 the EST NO LOAD CURR value.
RUN
D2
TORQUE
LIMIT
USER
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
READY
D2
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
RUN
A5
DATA ENTRY
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
% No Load Curr
32.3
%
8:55
Est No Load Curr
0032.3
%
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
TORQUE
LIMIT
 Compare the displayed value EST NO
LOAD CURR with the value entered for %
NO LOAD CURR under the ADJUST
MENU - MOTOR A5
 While still performing these top / bottom
runs observe under DISPLAY MENU POWER DATA D2 the EST NO LOAD
CURR value.
RUN
FAULT
8:55
Est No Load Curr
0027.2
%
Flux Reference
+00000
%
READY
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
SUB MENU
8:55
SUB MENU
FAULT
Min 10.0
Max 80.0
READY
RUN
USER
% No Load Curr
32.3
%
Also, verify that the FLUX REFERENCE is
100%. If the value is not equal to 100%
reduce the speed to less then 70% contract
speed and check again.
READY
RUN
DATA ENTRY
DATA ENTRY

141
If the EST NO LOAD CURR is 2% larger
than the % NO LOAD CURR then,
decrease the FLUX SAT SLOPE 2 by 10%.
Appendix – Adaptive Tune
 Continue iterating the above to steps until
the two values are within 3 RPM.
 If the EST NO LOAD CURR is 2% smaller
than the % NO LOAD CURR then, increase
the FLUX SAT SLOPE 2 by 10%.
READY
RUN
USER
A5
NOTE: Remember change only the RATED
MTR SPEED parameter DO NOT change
any other parameter (these were fixed in
the previous steps).
TORQUE
LIMIT
FAULT
8:55
Flux Sat Slope 2
010
Estimating System Inertia
Min 0
Max 200
SUB MENU
The HPV 900 Series 2 software can be used to
calculate the inertia of the entire elevator,
which is used for accurate tuning of the speed
regulator.
DATA ENTRY
NOTE: If the EST NO LOAD CURR and %
NO LOAD CURR are within 2% of each
other, then continue on to Tuning the Rated
Motor RPM.
The following is a step-by-step procedure for
using the HPV 900 Series 2 to estimate the
elevator system inertia.
 Continue iterating FLUX SAT SLOPE 2 in
10% increments until the EST NO LOAD
CURR and % NO LOAD CURR are within
2% of each other.
Using the Software to Estimate the
System’s Inertia
NOTE: Remember change only the FLUX
SAT SLOP 2 parameter DO NOT change
any other parameter (these were fixed in
the previous steps).
With a balanced car, run the car at 100%
contract speed from top floor to the bottom
floor then back to the top floor.
 Observe the EST INERTIA under DISPLAY
MENU - ELEVATOR DATA D1 for both the
down and up direction.
Tuning Rated Motor RPM
With a full-load car, run the car at 100%
contract speed from top floor to the bottom
floor then back to the top floor.
 During these top / bottom runs observe
under DISPLAY MENU - POWER DATA
D2 the EST RATED RPM value.
READY
RUN
D2
USER
FAULT
READY
D1
USER
TORQUE
LIMIT
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
Est Inertia
001.95
Sec
SUB MENU
DATA ENTRY
8:55
Est Rated RPM
1130.0
RPM
SUB MENU
 Average the two values and enter the
DRIVE A1 parameter.
DATA ENTRY
READY
 Enter this estimated value into the motor
parameter.
READY
RUN
RUN
A5
USER
FAULT
A1
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
8:55
Inertia
01.95
Sec
Min 0.25
Max 50.00
TORQUE
LIMIT
SUB MENU
8:55
Rated Mtr Speed
1130.0
RPM
Min 50.0
Max 3000.0
SUB MENU
RUN
DATA ENTRY
142
DATA ENTRY
Appendix – Motor Calculations
Appendix
Motor Parameter Calculations - Induction
The following data is required:
 Rated motor power in KW (or HP)
 Rated motor frequency (f)
 Rated motor current (Irated)
 Rated motor line-to-line voltage (Vl-l)
 Equivalent single-phase circuit of the
motor
The default motor selections (4 POLE DFLT or
6 POLE DFLT will load nominal values (see
Table 13 on page 75) for the following motor
parameters: % NO LOAD CURR, STATOR
LEAKAGE X, ROTOR LEAKAGE X, STATOR
RESIST, MOTOR IRON LOSS, and MOTOR
MECH LOSS.
Rs (or R1)
Most of the time the nominal values will work
just fine. But in some cases, these motor
parameter values must be precisely calculated.
Vl-l
The following is list of data that would be
needed from a motor manufacturer in order to
precisely calculate the motor parameters.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Rfe
Lm
3
Motor Manufacturer Data
Lr (or L2)
Ls (or L1)
Rr (or R2)
slip
Rs, Rfe, Rr in ohms
Ls, Lm, Lr in henry
Rated voltage
Rated frequency
Rated kW or HP
Rated (full-load) Current (under conditions
1,2 and rated torque)
Power factor (under 1,2 and rated torque)
Rated RPM (under 1,2 and rated torque)
No load Current under 1 and 2
Iron Loss under 1 and 2
Mechanical loss under 1 and 2
Per phase Stator resistance
Stator leakage Inductance
Rotor leakage Inductance
Figure 42: Equivalent single-phase circuit
of the motor (Y connected)
Calculate Base Impedance
Calculate Zbase (base impedance)
Zbase

Vl 2 l
power (in kW)  1000
Note: KW = HP  0.746
Calculation from the Motor’s Equivalent
Circuit
Calculate Stator Resistance
Calculate Rs (STATOR RESIST) as a
percentage of the base impedance
This section details how to calculate the
following HPV 900 Series 2 motor parameters,
which are entered as a percentage of the base
impedance:
 Stator Leakage Reactance (STATOR
LEAKAGE X)
 Rotor Leakage Reactance (ROTOR
LEAKAGE X)
 Stator Resistance (STATOR RESIST)
Also,
 Motor Iron Loss (MOTOR IRON LOSS)
 Motor Mechanical Loss (MOTOR MECH
LOSS)
 Initial value for Percentage No Load
Current (% NO LOAD CURR)
Rs (%) 
Rs
(in ohms)
 100
Zbase
Note: Rs is per phase (Y connected)
143
Appendix – Motor Calculations
Calculate Stator Reactance
Calculate Motor Mechanical Loss
Calculate Ls (STATOR LEAKAGE X) as a
percentage of the base impedance
Calculate Motor Mechanical Loss (MOTOR
MECH LOSS) as a percentage of the motor’s
rated power
Ls (%) 
2f  Ls
(in henry)
Zbase
 100
total loss (in kW)
 100
power (in KW) 1000
% Mechanical Loss 
Note: if XLs are available then do not use (2f)
and Ls is per phase (Y connected)
Note: KW = HP  0.746
Calculate Rotor Reactance
Calculate Percentage No Load Current
Calculate Lr (ROTOR LEAKGE X) as a
percentage of the base impedance
Calculate Percentage No Load Current (%NO
LOAD CURR) as a percentage of the motor’s
rated current
Lr (%) 
2f  Lr
(in henry)
Zbase
 100
% no load current
Note: if XLr are available then do not use (2f)
and Lr is per phase (Y connected)
After this initial value is entered, use the
adaptive tune procedure (see Adaptive tune on
page 139) to properly tune.
Calculate Motor Iron Loss (MOTOR IRON
LOSS) as a percentage of the motor’s rated
power
1
Rfe (in ohms)
 100
power (in KW)  1000
Vl 2 l 
% Iron Loss 




2f  Lm  I rated
Note: if XLm are available then do not use (2f)
and Lm is per phase (Y connected)
Calculate Motor Iron Loss
% Iron Loss 

 Vl  l

 3

total iron loss (in kW)
 100
power (in KW)  1000
Note: KW = HP  0.74 and Rfe is per phase (Y
connected)
144
Appendix – Motor Calculations
Appendix
Motor Parameter Calculations – Permanent Magnet
There are times when the motor nameplate data does not contain rated motor
speed or possibly does not contain motor excitation frequency.
If given rated motor speed and the number of poles, use the following calculation:
Motor 
# of polesRated Motor Speed   Excitation



260
 Frequency 
If given rated excitation frequency and the number of poles, use the following
calculation:
 Rated 
2  60 Motor Excitation Frequency
  Motor 
# of poles
 Speed 







If given rated excitation frequency and the rated motor speed, use the following
calculation:
260Motor Excitation Frequency   of# 


Rated Motor Speed
Poles

145

Appendix – PM Startup Procedure
Appendix
TB2
65
A-_Sine
Shield
59
PM Start-Up Procedure
The following is a recommended PM start-up
procedure:
66
A_Sine
Common
60
67
B-_Sine
/A
61
68
B_Sine
A
62
69
DATA-
/B
63
70
DATA
B
64
71
CLK-
72
CLK
73
Common_iso
74
+5V_iso
75
SENS-
76
SENS+
77
Shield
78
Shield
to Heidenhain EnDat Encoder
EnDat Encoderi Set-Up
1) Verify the absolute encoder option card
has been installed correctly. And the
encoder has been selected and installed in
accordance with the following:
Electrical interference and mechanical
speed modulations are common problems
that can result in improper speed feedback
getting to the drive. To help avoid these
common problems, the following electrical
and mechanical considerations are
suggested.
46S04327-0010
IMPORTANT
Proper encoder speed feedback is
essential for a drive to provide proper
motor control.
Cable Shield Clamp at Drive Chassis
Figure 43: EnDat Encoder Connections
Yellow/Black
Electrical considerations
 Use one of the following Heidenhain
EnDat EncodersECN113, ECN1313,
ECN413, or ROC413
 Follow encoder manufacturer’s mounting
and wiring recommendations
 Use Heidenhain extension Cable p/n
309778-xx (with xx less than or equal to
15) to connect Encoder to Drive
Connect Encoder Cable using a
Heidenhain extension cable per Figure 43
and the encoder cable shield.
Note: For Heidenhain cable 309778-xx, see
Figure 44 for cable connections.
Green/Black
Red/Black
Blue/Black
Pink
Gray
Yellow
Violet
White/Green
Brown/Green
White
Blue
Additional jumpers on the EnDat Encoder
Card allow for encoder lengths up to 300ft
long. For Encoder Cables greater than 50ft,
JM1 should be set in position 2-3. Also, if
the sense wires are connected on pins 75
and 76, the drive will automatically adjust its
power output on pins 73 and 74. To use this
feature of the drive, verify the position of
JM2 is set to 2-3.
i
TB1
TB2
TB1
65
A-_Sine
Shield
59
66
A_Sine
67
B-_Sine
Common
60
/A
61
68
B_Sine
A
62
69
DATA-
/B
63
70
DATA
B
64
71
CLK-
72
CLK
73
Common_iso
74
+5V_iso
75
SENS-
76
SENS+
77
Shield
78
Shield
46S04327-0010
Figure 44: Heidenhain Cable Color Code
only valid when ENCODER SELECT (C1) = ENDAT
146
Appendix – PM Startup Procedure
Incremental Encoder Set-Up
1) Verify the encoder has been selected and
installed in accordance with the following:
 Supply Voltage:12VDC or 5VDC
 Capacity:
200mA or 400mA
 PPR:
600 - 40,000
 Maximum Frequency: 300 kHz
 Input:2 channel quadrature
 5 or 12 volts dc differential
(A, /A, B, /B, Z, /Z)
Motor Parameter Set-Up
1) Verify the following parameters are set
correctly with the motor nameplate data:
 Motor Id (A5)
 Rated Motor Pwr (A5)
 Rated Mtr Volts (A5)
 Rated Motor Curr (A5)
 Motor Poles (A5)
 Rated Mtr Speed (A5)
2) Verify D Axis Induct (A5) and Q Axis Induct
(A5) are between 5 and 40 mH
Electrical interference and mechanical
speed modulations are common problems
that can result in improper speed feedback
getting to the drive. To help avoid these
common problems, the following electrical
and mechanical considerations are
suggested.
Hoistway Parameter Set-Up
3) Enter / Verify following hoistway
parameters:
 Contract Car Speed (A1)
 Contract Mtr Speed (A1)
Incremental Control of Permanent Magnet
machines
There are a couple of considerations when
running permanent magnet machines with an
incremental encoder. When initially starting an
incrementally controlled PM machine, an
alignment still needs to be done to determine
the rotor position. After an alignment has been
done, run the car at 40% of contract car speed
to verify alignment is proper. Once proper
alignment has been established, the drive will
auto correct alignment using the Z-pulse
channel of the encoder.
IMPORTANT
Proper encoder speed feedback is
essential for a drive to provide proper
motor control.
Electrical considerations
 Use a 2 channel quadrature incremental
encoder with Z-Pulse
 Follow encoder manufacturer’s mounting
and wiring recommendations
to Incremental Encode r
TB1
1
A
2
/A
3
B
4
/B
5
Shield
17
+5/+12V_iso
18
common_iso
19
Z
20
/Z
WARNING
If the motor shaft is rotated at any time
while the drive is not reading the encoder
(i.e. drive is off and free fall is done), an
alignment procedure needs to be redone.
At the first run after power up, the drive will
take a couple of seconds and redo the auto
alignment to verify alignment. This will be
done with the brake set and the contactor
closed. The drive will not assert SPD REG
RLS and BRAKE PICK until after the auto
alignment is completed.
In addition, if the drive receives a SPD DEV
FAULT or ENCODER FLT, after the fault is
cleared, upon the next requested run, the drive
will redo an auto alignment. The drive will
always accept a new tuned value after SPD
DEV FLT, but will compare against the
previous working value after power-up or
ENCODER FLT.
Furthermore, if the drive is pulling more current
than expected after an alignment and outside
systems items have been checked, the user
may fine tune the alignment by changing the
Cable Shield Clamp at Drive Chassis
Figure 45: Incremental Encoder
Connections
Mechanical considerations
 Use direct motor mounting without
couplings
 Use hub or hollow shaft encoder with
concentric motor stub shaft
 If possible, use a mechanical protective
cover for exposed encoders
2) Enter / Verify the encoder pulses entered
in the ENCODER PULSES (A1) parameter
from the encoder nameplate.
147
Appendix – PM Startup Procedure
value of FINE TUNE OFST (A4). See FINE
TUNE PROCEDURE on page 154.
READY
RUN
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
10:00
Rotor Alignment Procedure
Magnetek offers two (2) methods of initial rotor
alignment with both an absolute encoder and
an incremental encoder. These include Open
Loop Alignment and Auto Alignment. A third
method, Manual Alignment, is only valid when
using an absolute encoder (EnDat). Open
Loop Alignment requires the car to be in a fully
balanced condition. Auto Alignment requires
the brake to be set while it controls current into
the motor. For Manual Alignment the encoder
value must be known and may be placed into
the ENCODER ANG OFST (A5) parameter.
The procedures for each method may be found
on the following pages:
 Open Loop Alignment Procedure may be
found on page 148
 Auto Alignment Procedure may be found
on page 150
 Manual Setup Methodi may be found on
page 151
May 4
U0 UTILITY
U10 ALIGNMENT
SUBMENU
DATA ENTRY
Press Enter, then the UP Arrow to display:
READY
RUN
U10
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
10:00
Alignment Method
Open Loop
SUBMENU
DATA ENTRY
Verify ALIGNMENT METHOD is set to
OPEN LOOP.
Scroll to ALIGNMENT and press Enter to
change parameter ALIGNMENT from
DISABLE to ENABLE. Press Enter.
READY
Open Loop Alignment
RUN
U10
1) In order to accurately measure the
alignment, the motor has to operate in a
no-load condition. This can be achieved
by…
a. Removing the ropes from the sheave
of the motor
or
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
10:00
ALIGNMENT
ENABLE
SUBMENU
DATA ENTRY
Press the down arrow to start the
alignment procedure. The Operator will
display:
b. Balancing the car in the middle of the
hoistway. With the car balanced and
positioned in the middle of the
hoistway, lift the mechanical brake
with the drive off and verify the car is
balanced. If the car moves adjust the
weights in the car accordingly (more
weights if the car moves in an upward
direction and less weights if the car
moves in a downward direction).
Note: If the car is not properly
balanced, finding initial position in the
PM motor will not work.
2) Run the Open Loop Alignment (U10) to
determine the position of the motor poles.
READY
RUN
U10
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
10:00
BEGIN ALIGNMENT?
NO
SUBMENU
DATA ENTRY
Note: If the operator displays the following
screen, verify ALIGNMENT (U10) is set to
enable, there are no active faults, and the
drive is not in a RUN mode.
READY
RUN
U10
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
10:00
NOT AVAILABLE AT THIS
TIME
SUBMENU
i
only valid when ENCODER SELECT (C1) = ENDAT
148
DATA ENTRY
Appendix – PM Startup Procedure

Press Enter to change the data from NO to
either YES or ON RUN.
Note: For either selection, any speed
command issued to the drive will be
ignored, however it may be necessary for
the car controller to anticipate the motor
moving at 1/8th rated motor speed.
READY
RUN
U10
USER
FAULT
If the alarm SPD DEV ALM is displayed,
increase the value of SPD DEV ALARM
LVL (A1) then retry procedure to see what
fault the drive may actually be getting. The
SPD DEV ALM will not allow the alignment
procedure to finish and must be moved out
of the way to proceed.
 If the fault SPD DEV FLT is displayed,
first, verify the shield of the encoder cable
is properly grounded using the provided
clamp on the drive. Then retry the
alignment procedure. If the fault still
exists, increase SPD DEV FLT LVL (A1),
and then retry alignment procedure.
 If the fault OVERCURR FLT1 is displayed;
decrease ALIGN VLT FACTOR (A4) and
retry alignment procedure
 If OLA ENDT FLT1 occurs while BEGIN
ALIGNMENT? Was set to ON RUN, verify
the run command was not removed before
the alignment was complete. In addition,
verify the brake is open and the contactor
is closed.
 If the motor was running rough, jerky, or
stalled immediately before the drive
declared an OLA ENDT FLT1, increase
the value located in TRQ CONST SCALE
(A5).
If the motor was running smoothly
immediately before the drive declared an
OLA ENDT FLT1, swap two motor leads
(e.g. U and W) to establish proper phasing
between absolute position data (EnDat,
serial) and motor.
Note: Only swap the two motor leads.
This is not the same as swapping two
encoder leads.
 If fault OLA INC FLT occurs, swap two
encoder leads (e.g. A and -A) to establish
proper phasing between incremental
position data and motor.
Note: When using an EnDat absolute
encoder, the user may not swap 2 motor
leads to clear the fault. A and –A must be
changed. When using an Incremental
encoder, either the motor wires or the
encoder wires may be changed.
9) View the value of ENCODER ANG
OFST(A5). If the value is 30000, the
alignment procedure did not work and
must be redone. When using an
incremental encoder, ENCODER ANG
OFST (A5) will auto fill with 00000.
TORQUE
LIMIT
10:00
BEGIN ALIGNMENT?
ON RUN
SUBMENU
DATA ENTRY
3) If YES is selected, the motor will
immediately start applying current to the
motor and calculating the alignment value.
4) If ON RUN is selected, the drive expects
the following items to occur:
a. Car Controller asserts DRIVE ENABLE
b. Car Controller issues Run Command
c. Drive asserts SPD_REG_RLS and
CLOSE_CONTACT (all other outputs
will operate as programmed and have
no special status or benefit during the
Alignment Procedure)
d. Motor Contactor closes
e. Drive asserts BRAKE_PICKED, if used
f. Brake is lifted
5) If ropes are attached, car will now be
hanging balanced in hoistway
6) Drive starts the Open Loop Alignment
running at approximately 1/8th of the
Contract Car Speed (A1)
7) When the Alignment is finished, the drive
will go to zero speed and simulate removal
of the run command (i.e. SPD REG RLS =
0 (false); CLOSE CONTACT = 0 (false))
even if Run Command is still being
asserted
8) Run Command is removed
During the test, the motor should rotate for
about four seconds and the RUN light will be lit
for the duration of the procedure.
 Erratic movement of the motor may occur
during acceleration and deceleration
segments of the alignment, but constant
speed operation will be smooth.
If the fault ENCDR CRC ERRi is displayed,
verify the encoder wiring as shown in
Figure 43. Also verify JM2 is connected to
position 1-2, or 2-3. Retry alignment
procedure.
i
only valid when ENCODER SELECT (C1) = ENDAT
149
Appendix – PM Startup Procedure
10) Otherwise, record value of ENCODER
ANG OFST (A5).
ENCODER ANG OFST = ___________
11) Run motor at 20% contract speed and
verify alignment is correct.

READY
RUN
U10
If the SPD DEV FLT occurs, check if
TORQ CURR (D2) is greater than 5%
(>5%). If this is the case, repeat the
alignment procedure.
12) Put ropes back onto the sheave, if
necessary and run the motor on inspection
speed and verify the direction requested is
the same as the direction of the motor.
13) If the directions do not coincide with each
other, change MOTOR ROTATION
parameter in C1.
14) Run the drive in inspection speed up and
down the hoistway.
Scroll to ALIGNMENT and press Enter to
change parameter ALIGNMENT from
DISABLE to ENABLE. Press Enter.
READY
RUN
U10
TORQUE
LIMIT
DATA ENTRY
Press the down arrow to start the
alignment procedure. The Operator will
display:
READY
RUN
U10
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
10:00
BEGIN ALIGNMENT?
NO
SUBMENU
DATA ENTRY
Note: If the operator displays the following
screen, verify ALIGNMENT (U10) is set to
enable, there are no active faults, and the
drive is not in a RUN mode.
READY
RUN
U10
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
10:00
NOT AVAILABLE AT THIS
TIME
SUBMENU
DATA ENTRY
Press Enter to change the data from NO to
either YES or ON RUN.
3) If YES is selected, the drive will
immediately start applying current to the
motor and calculating the alignment value.
4) If ON RUN is selected, the drive expects
the following sequence to occur:
a. Car Controller asserts DRIVE ENABLE
b. Car Controller issues RUN Command
TORQUE
LIMIT
May 4
U0 UTILITY
U10 ALIGNMENT
SUBMENU
FAULT
10:00
SUBMENU
1) In order to accurately measure the
alignment, the brake must be set and the
motor contactor must be closed.
Depending on the method used for
enabling Auto Alignment, drive signals
may be used in conjunction with the
contactor and the brake.
2) Run the Auto Alignment (U10) to
determine the position of the motor poles.
10:00
USER
ALIGNMENT
ENABLE
Auto Alignment is a function that will calculate
the alignment angle without the need to spin
the motor. This procedure may be done with
the brake set and the ropes on. This is
especially useful for replacement encoders.
Auto Alignment may be enabled two separate
ways, one way is to enable the function
through the operator and the other is to enable
Auto Align by giving the drive a run command.
In order for the function to properly work, all
faults must be cleared, the brake must be set
and the motor contactor must pull in.
FAULT
DATA ENTRY
Verify ALIGNMENT METHOD is set to
AUTO ALIGN.
Auto Alignment Procedure
USER
TORQUE
LIMIT
10:00
SUBMENU

RUN
FAULT
Alignment Method
AUTO ALIGN
If ropes are not attached, set INERTIA
(A1) to 0.25 seconds
READY
USER
DATA ENTRY
Press Enter, then the UP Arrow to display:
150
Appendix – PM Startup Procedure
may adjust FINE TUNE OFST (A4) to
better align the motor to the drive. The
drive will always check against the original
value on the first run after one of the
following conditions occur:
a. Power cycle
b. SPD DEV FLT
c. ENCODER FLT
Run the drive in inspection speed up and down
the hoistway.
c. Drive asserts CLOSE_CONTACT (all
other outputs will stay false during the
Alignment excluding READY TO RUN
which will stay active)
d. Motor Contactor closes
e. Drive starts the Alignment procedure
During Alignment, a slight buzzing noise
should come from the motor for approximately
two seconds and the RUN light will be lit for
the duration of the procedure.
 If the fault AT CONTACT FLT is displayed,
verify the motor contactor is closed
 If the fault BRAKE IS OPEN is displayed,
the drive has detected motion, verify the
brake is set. If brake is set and minimal
movement has occurred, increase BRK
FLT LEVEL (A4).
 ENCODER ANG OFSTi (A5) will
automatically populate
Manual Setup Method1 – Absolute Encoder
The manual setup method can be used if the
PM motor is already supplied with an offset
value predetermined by the motor
manufacturer, or when either the No Ropes
Attached Method or Ropes Attached Method
has already been applied to align the rotor and
the drive or software is replaced.
When the Alignment is finished, the drive will
simulate the removal of the run command even
if Run Command is still being asserted.
WARNING
If the encoder was removed from the
motor for any reason, the Manual Setup
Method CANNOT be used
5) View the value of ENCODER ANG OFST1
(A5). If the value is 30000, the alignment
procedure did not work and must be
redone. When using an incremental
encoder, ENCODER ANG OFST (A5) will
auto fill with 00000. Otherwise, record
value of ENCODER ANG OFSTii (A5).
1) Determine ENCODER ANG OFST value in
the A5 menu:
If replacing the FLASH, copy the
ENCODER ANG OFST (A5) value before
removing the memory and/or replacing the
drive. If the original offset value was
recorded when the alignment is first
performed, use that value.
ENCODER ANG OFST1 = ________
6) Run motor at 10% contract speed and
verify alignment is correct.

WARNING
ENCODER ANG OFST (A5) can also be
uploaded using the Magnetek Explorer.
ALIGNMENT (U10) must be enabled for
the ENCODER ANG OFST (A5) value in
the *.par file to be downloaded into the
drive.
OR
a. Find θ0_spec [in degrees] from the
manufacturer supplied data and use
the following formula to convert it.
2) Enable the Alignment in the U10 menu.
If ropes are not attached, set INERTIA
(A1) to 0.25 seconds

If the SPD DEV FLT occurs, it may
mean that the motor phasing is
incorrect. The drive requires accurate
U, V, and W phasing. An Open Loop
Alignment will automatically check
phasing.
7) Put ropes back onto the sheave, if
necessary and run the motor on inspection
speed and verify the direction requested is
the same as the direction of the motor.
8) If the directions do not coincide with each
other, change MOTOR ROTATION
parameter in C1.
9) If motor current is high while using an
incremental encoder, but running, the user
i
ii
3) Enter value determined in Step 1) into
ENCODER ANG OFST (A5).
4) Run the motor at inspection speed
WARNING
The motor may run away if the incorrect
value for ENCODER ANG OFST (A5) is
used. Be prepared to remove the run
command.
only valid when ENCODER SELECT (C1) = ENDAT
only valid when ENCODER SELECT (C1) = ENDAT
151
Appendix – PM Startup Procedure
5) Run the drive in inspection speed up and
down the hoistway.
ENCODER ANG OFST=
152
2SERIAL_CPR 0_spec []

POLES
360
Appendix – AutoTune Procedure
Appendix
Auto-Tune Procedure
Auto-Tune is a function used only on PM (U9) that will automatically calculate the D and Q Axis
Inductances and the Stator Resistance based on the calculated value of the motor’s Base Impedance.
Auto-Tune may be enabled two separate ways, one way is to enable the function through the operator
and the other is to enable Auto-Tune by giving the drive a run command. In order for the function to
properly work, all faults must be cleared, the brake must be set and the motor contactor must pull in.
Setting Auto-Tune
Note: Absolute Encoder Alignment Procedure
should precede this Auto-Tune function.
Alignment will affect the accuracy of the D and
Q Axis Stator Inductances.
1) In order to accurately measure the motor
parameters, the brake must be set and the
motor contactor must be closed.
Depending on the method used for
enabling Auto-Tune, drive signals may be
used in conjunction with the contactor and
the brake.
2) Scroll to AUTOTUNE SEL (U11) to run the
Auto-tune function. No Faults may be
present on the drive when engaging AutoTune.
READY
RUN
USER
FAULT
4) If the selection YES is made, the drive will
immediately start applying current to the
motor and calculating the motor
measurements.
5) If the selection ON RUN is made, the drive
expects the following sequence to occur
prior to the drive applying current to motor:
Command run (inspection) on the car
controller. The speed command must be
set to zero (0) speed. The following
sequence must be observed by the car
controller to properly perform Auto-Tune
via Car Controller
a. Car Controller asserts DRIVE ENABLE
b. Car Controller issues RUN Command
c. Drive asserts CLOSE_CONTACT (all
other outputs will stay false during the
Auto-Tune)
d. Motor Contactor closes
e. Drive starts the Auto-Tune procedure
f. When the Auto-Tune is finished, the
drive will simulate the removal of the run
command even if Run Command is still
being asserted.
TORQUE
LIMIT
10:00
May 4
U0 UTILITY
U12 AUTOTUNE SEL
SUBMENU
DATA ENTRY
Press Enter to display:
READY
READY
RUN
U12
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
RUN
U12
Autotune Select
DISABLE
DATA ENTRY
U12
USER
FAULT
TORQUE
LIMIT
10:00
Autotune Select
ON RUN
SUBMENU
DATA ENTRY
g.
Run Command is removed
During Auto-Tune, a slight buzzing noise
should come from the motor for approximately
two seconds and the RUN LED will be lit for
the duration of the procedure.
 If the fault CONTACTOR FLT is displayed,
verify the motor contactor is closed
 If the fault BRAKE IS OPEN is displayed, the
drive has detected motion, verify the brake is
set. If brake is set and minimal movement has
occurred, increase BRK FLT LEVEL (A4).
 The following parameters will populate:
a. D Axis Induct (A5)
b. Q Axis Induct (A5)
c. Stator Resist (A5)
Press Enter and use down arrow keys to
select ON RUN or YES to enable Auto-Tune.
Note: The contactor needs to be in for AutoTune to run. If necessary, manually hold the
contactor in while the test is running.
3) Press Enter to change the data from
DISABLE to either YES or ON RUN.
RUN
TORQUE
LIMIT
10:00
SUBMENU
READY
FAULT
ALARM!
AUTOTUNE IS DONE
10:00
SUBMENU
USER
DATA ENTRY
153
Appendix – PM Fine-Tune Alignment
7. Enable Alignment by setting ALIGNMENT
(U10) to ENABLE, then change the value
in ENCODER ANG OFSET (A5) from the
previous one, to the one calculated in the
formula above
Appendix
Fine Tune Alignment Procedure
Test Measurements (EnDat)
1. Set Id REF THRESHOLD (A4) to 0.00
2. Set FINE TUNE OFST (A4) to –30.00. If
Encoder Fault or another fault occurs, set
FINE TUNE OFST (A4) to –20.00.
3. Run car up and down and note the peak
current displayed in MOTOR CURR (D2)
in table below
4. Set FINE TUNE OFST (A4) to +10.00 and
note peak current in table below
5. Reiterate Steps 4 and 5 increasing FINE
TUNE OFST (A4) until peak current
equals the value found when FINE TUNE
OFST (A4) was set to in Step 3.
FINE TUNE
OFST (A4) Value
U10
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
8. Set FINE TUNE OFST (A4) to 0.0
9. Set Id REF THRESHOLD (A4) back to the
original value (0.10 is default value)
This completes the fine-tuning procedure for
the EnDat Alignment. With balanced car,
peak current and voltage should be the same
in both directions.
MOTOR
CURRENT (D2)
Test Measurements (Incremental)
1. Set Id REF THRESHOLD (A4) to 0.00
2. Set FINE TUNE OFST (A4) to +10.00. If
Encoder Fault or another fault occurs, set
FINE TUNE OFST (A4) to -10.00.
3. Run car in inspection in the direction of
pulling load (i.e. empty car down) and note
the peak current displayed in MOTOR
CURR (D2) in table below
4. Make the absolute value of FINE TUNE
OFST (A4) larger
5. Reiterate Steps 4 and 5 increasing FINE
TUNE OFST (A4) until current is the
lowest in the table.
Calculate new ENCODER ANG OFSET
6. With the two currents equal, use the
following formula to determine the value in
ENCODER ANG OFSET (A5)
 ENCODER 


ANG


 OFSET (A5) 


new


  FINE TUNE   FINE TUNE

 
 OFST (A4)    OFST (A4)


  negative
positive
 ENCODER 

   value
  value
ANG
 






OFSET (A5)  
360  number of poles



old

 



ALIGNMENT
ENABLE





   8192






FINE TUNE
OFST (A4) Value
MOTOR
CURRENT (D2)
Example: ENCODER ANG OFSET (A5) old value
= 185
FINE TUNE OFST positive value (A4) = 40
FINE TUNE OFST negative value (A4) = (-70)
Number of poles = 16
228   185   40  -70  8192
6. Leave FINE TUNE OFST (A4) at value
where the current draw was the lowest.
 360 16 
Enter new ENCODER ANG OFSET
154
Appendix – Open-Loop Startup
Appendix
Open-loop Start-Up Procedure

The following is a recommended open-loop
start-up procedure:
Motor Parameter Set-up
1) Select one of the four default motors (listed
in Table 24) for the MOTOR ID (A5)
parameter (or select a valid motor ID, if
available).
These typical V/Hz patterns are selectable
via the MOTOR ID (A5) are given in the
following table. It is best to start with one
of the default V/Hz patterns.
parameter
motor mid
volts (A5)
motor mid
freq (A5)
motor min
volts (A5)
motor min
freq (A5)
4
pole
400 v
4
pole
200 v
6
pole
400 v
6
pole
200 v
28.0V
14.0V
28.0V
14.0V
3.0Hz
3.0Hz
3.0Hz
3.0Hz
9.0V
4.0V
9.0V
4.0V
1.0Hz
1.0Hz
1.0Hz
1.0Hz

#
of
motor
poles
4
6
8
10
3) Use the default value of 2.5% for Stator
Resistance (STATOR RESIST(A5))
NOTE: if there are operation issues, the
stator resistance can be measured, refer
the procedure detailed on page 162.
Hoistway Parameter Set-up
4) Enter / Verify the hoistway parameters:
 CONTRACT CAR SPD (A1)
parameter programs the elevator
contract speed in ft/min or m/s.
 CONTRACT MTR SPD (A1)
parameter programs the motor speed
at elevator contract speed in RPM.
NOTE: The above two parameters create
the interaction that allow engineering units
to be used throughout the HPV 900
software.
2) Enter / Verify the following from the
motor’s nameplate:
 Motor HP or KW rating
(RATED MTR POWER(A5))
 Motor Voltage
(RATED MTR VOLTS(A5))
 Motor Excitation Frequency in Hz
(RATED EXCIT FREQ(A5))
 Rated Motor Current
(RATED MOTOR CURR(A5))
 Number of Motor Poles
(MOTOR POLES(A5))
Verify Parameters at Default
5) Verify that the following A1 and A4
parameters are set at default:
# of motor
poles
4
6
8
10
parameter name
DC START LEVEL (A1)
DC STOP LEVEL (A1)
DC STOP FREQ (A1)
DC START TIME (A1)
DC STOP TIME (A1)
SLIP COMP TIME (A1)
SLIP COMP GAIN (A1)
TORQ BOOST TIME (A1)
TORQ BOOST GAIN (A1)
MTR TORQUE LIMIT (A1)
REGEN TORQ LIMIT (A1)
ILIMT INTEG GAIN (A4)
HUNT PREV GAIN (A4)
HUNT PREV TIME (A4)
Table 25: Motor Poles Reference

rated motor
speed (rpm)
at
at
60 Hz 50 Hz
1800
1500
1200
1000
900
750
700
600
Table 26: Synchronous Motor Speeds
Reference
Table 24: V/Hz patterns via Motor ID
rated motor
speed (rpm)
1800-1500
1200-1000
900-750
720-600
97.5% of synchronous speed for
Nema type B motor design
94% of synchronous speed for
Nema type D motor design
Rated Motor Speed at full load in RPM
(RATED MTR SPEED (A5))
Note: The rated motor rpm must be full
load speed. If synchronous speed is
given, the motor rated rpm can be
estimated by:
155
default
80.0
50.0
0.5
1.00
1.00
1.50
1.00
0.05
0.00
200.0
200.0
1.00
1.00
0.20
Appendix – Open-Loop Start-Up
Motor RPM Adjustment Procedure
 Run the car in the UP direction
- measure and record the car speed
using a hand tach on the sheave
(wait for speed to stabilize)
OR
- time one complete rotation of the
sheave and record the time (in
seconds) it takes for exactly one
sheave rotation
 Run the car in the DOWN direction
- measure and record the car speed
using a hand tach on the sheave
(wait for speed to stabilize)
OR
- time one complete rotation of the
sheave and record the time (in
seconds) it takes for exactly one
sheave rotation
 If the speeds/times are different UP vs.
DOWN…increment or decrement the
RATED MTR SPEED (A5) parameter
and run UP and DOWN again
 Continue until the speeds/times UP vs.
DOWN are the same.
Note: If an OVERCURR FLT occurs,
refer to “Overcurrent Faults” in
the Performance Adjustments
section (page 158)
Note: If stalling occurs when
attempting to lift the load, refer
to “Stalling Attempting to Lift
Load” in the Performance
Adjustments section (page 157).
Additionally, sometimes the
adjustments made to help with
stalling attempting to lift load can
be set to default once the
RATED MTR SPEED (A5)
parameter is adjusted properly.
Low speed inspection mode
6) Run the drive in low speed inspection
mode and…
 Verify proper hoistway direction…can
be reversed with the MOTOR
ROTATION (C1) parameter.
 Verify that the Safety Chain /
Emergency Stop works
Adjust Motor RPM (Slip)
7) At Empty Car, run the drive at 10% of
contract speed and complete the Motor
RPM Adjustment Procedure detailed on
page 156.
8) At Full-load, run the drive at 10% of
contract speed and complete the Motor
RPM Adjustment Procedure detailed on
page 156.
High-speed mode
9) Run the drive in high-speed mode
(Balanced, Full-load and Empty Car) and
observe operation…if operational issues
please refer to the Performance
Adjustments section.
This completes the recommended open-loop
start-up procedure.
156
Appendix – Open-Loop Performance
Appendix
Open-Loop Performance Adjustments
Spotting or
Stalling Going
into Leveling
(page 159)
Rollback or
Bump at Start
(page 158)
Bump
at Stop
(page 161)
Decreasing
Take-off Time
(page 158)
Stalling
Attempting to
Lift Load (page 157)
Rollback at
Stop
(page 162)
Overcurrent
Faults (page 158)
Undershooting
Floor (page 161)
Coming into
Floor Too Fast
(page 160)
Overshooting
Floor (page 162)
...only with
Regen Load
(page 162)
Leveling Speeds/Times
Different Up vs Down
(page 160)
Leveling
Oscillation
(page 161)
Stalling Attempting to Lift Load
If the motor stalls as it attempts to lift the load,
then until resolved, try the following (in order):
1. Increase the Torque Boost Gain
parameter
2. Adjust the Motor Stator Resistance
parameter
3. Adjust the Motor Mid Voltage
parameter
Note: if no performance change is
observed after any one step, set any
changed value(s) back to the original
value(s) before proceeding onto the next
step.
Increase the Torque Boost Gain Parameter
 The Torque Boost function is defaulted
off (TORQ BOOST GAIN (A1)= 0).
 Increase the TORQ BOOST GAIN
(A1) in 0.1 intervals and observe
performance.
Adjust the Motor’s Stator Resistance
 Measure the stator resistance by
completing the procedure detailed on
page 162.

If still stalling after measuring stator
resistance, additionally increase
STATOR RESIST (A5) parameter by
increments of 0.1 and observe
performance
Adjust the Motor Mid Voltage Parameter
 Complete the Mid-volts Adjustment
Procedure detailed on page 163.
 If still stalling after completing midvolts adjustment procedure,
additionally increase MOTOR MID
VOLTS (A5) parameter by increments
of 0.5 and observe performance
Note: Avoid increasing the MOTOR MID
VOLTS (A5) parameter too high, since this
effects stopping performance (i.e. coming
into the floor too fast) or can create
Overcurrent Faults
157
Appendix – Open-Loop Performance
Overcurrent Fault
If an “OVERCURR FLT” occurs it can indicate
the s-curve settings are too high (jerk, accel,
decel rates) or too much motor voltage is
generated. Until resolved, try the following (in
order):
1. Verify Mechanical Brake Timing
2. Verify Torque Limits
3. Decrease the S-curve parameters
4. Verify Motor Min/Mid Voltage
parameters
5. Increase DC Injection Start Level
6. Measure the Motor’s Stator
Resistance
7. Decrease the Torque Boost
Note: if no change is observed after any
one step, set any changed value(s) back to
the original value(s) before proceeding
onto the next step.
Verify Mechanical Brake Timing
 The mechanical brake should be lifted
before the drive is given a non-zero
speed command
 The mechanical brake should be
picked during the DC injection start
time (DC START TIME (A1)
parameter), see “Mechanical Brake
Timing at Start” on page 163.
Verify Torque Limits
 The Torque Limits are defaulted at
200% (MTR TORQUE LIMIT(A1) and
REGEN TORQ LIMIT(A1)= 200%).
 Decrease MTR TORQUE LIMIT (A1)
and REGEN TORQ LIMIT (A1)
parameters until default (200%).
Note: may need to set torque limits
below 200% if motor’s current rating is
larger than the drive’s current rating
Decrease the S-curve Parameters
 Decrease jerk rates via
- ACCEL JERK IN x (A2),
- ACCEL JERK OUT x (A2)
- DECEL JERK IN x (A2)
- DECEL JERK OUT x (A2)
 Decrease accel/decel rates via
- ACCEL x (A2),
- DECEL x (A2)
Verify Motor Min/Mid Voltage Parameters
 MOTOR MID VOLTS (A5) and
MOTOR MIN VOLTS (A5) parameters
should usually be set at default, see
Table 24 on page 155.
 These parameters would only be
adjusted slightly with certain issues
(see Stalling Attempting to Lift Load
(page 157); Spotting or Stalling Going
Rollback or Bump at Start
If rollback is observed or a bump is felt at the
start, then until resolved, try the following (in
order):
1. Verify Mechanical Brake Timing
2. Increase DC Injection Start Level
Note: if no performance change is observed
after any one step, set any changed value(s)
back to the original value(s) before proceeding
onto the next step.
Verify Mechanical Brake Timing
 The mechanical brake should be
picked during the DC injection start
time (DC START TIME (A1)
parameter), see “Mechanical Brake
Timing at Start” on page 163.
Increase DC Injection Start Level
 Increase the DC START LEVEL (A1)
parameter by increments of 5% and
observe performance.
Decreasing Take-off Time
The following can help to decrease take-off
time, try the following (in order):
1. Increase DC Injection Start Level
2. Increase the Accel S-curve parameters
3. Increase the Torque Boost Gain
parameter
Note: if no performance change is
observed after any one step, set any
changed value(s) back to the original
value(s) before proceeding onto the next
step.
Increase DC Injection Start Level
 Increase the DC START LEVEL (A1)
parameter by increments of 5% and
observe performance.
Increase the Accel S-curve parameters
 Increase take-off jerk rate via ACCEL
JERK IN x (A2) parameter

Increase acceleration rate via ACCEL
x (A2) parameter
Note: When increasing both jerk and accel
rates, watch for Overcurrent Faults or
decreased ride quality. If these occur, set
the rates back to the original values.
Increase the Torque Boost Gain Parameter
 The Torque Boost function is defaulted
off (TORQ BOOST GAIN (A1)= 0).
 Increase the TORQ BOOST GAIN
(A1) in 0.1 intervals and observe takeoff time and performance.
Note: When increasing the torque boost,
watch for Overcurrent Faults or decreased
ride quality. If these occur, set the gain
back.
158
Appendix – Open-Loop Performance
into Leveling (page 159); or
Overshooting Floor only with Regen
Load (page 162)).
Increase DC Injection Start Level
 Increase the DC START LEVEL (A1)
parameter by increments of 5% and
observe performance.
Measuring the Stator Resistance
 Complete the procedure detailed on
page 162.
Decrease the Torque Boost
 Decrease TORQ BOOST GAIN (A1)
parameter in increments of 0.1 until
the fault goes away or zero is reached
(and the function is turned off)
 Secondly, decrease STATOR RESIST
(A5) parameter in increments of 0.1%
Note: set TORQ BOOST GAIN (A1)=0,
before adjusting STATOR RESIST
(A5))
Spotting or Stalling Going into Leveling
If the motor stalls or spots as it transitions from
deceleration to leveling speed then until
resolved, try the following (in order):
1. Decrease Decel Jerk Out and Decel
Rates
2. Increase the Torque Boost Gain
parameter
3. Measure the Stator Resistance
4. Adjust the Motor Mid Volts parameter
Note: if no performance change is
observed after any one step, set any
changed value(s) back to the original
value(s) before proceeding onto the next
step.
Decrease Decel Jerk Out and Decel Rates
 Decrease jerk rate via DECEL JERK
OUT x (A2) parameter and observe
performance
 Secondly, decrease decel rate via
DECEL RATE x (A2) parameter and
observe performance
Note: the combination of these two
parameters is usually primary cause of
spotting or stalling going into leveling
Increase the Torque Boost Gain Parameter
 The Torque Boost function is defaulted
off (TORQ BOOST GAIN (A1)= 0).
 Increase the TORQ BOOST GAIN
(A1) in 0.1 intervals and observe
performance.
Measure the Stator Resistance
 Measure the stator resistance by
completing the procedure detailed on
page 162 and observe performance.
Adjust the Motor Mid Volts parameter
 Complete the Mid-volts Adjustment
Procedure detailed on page 163 and
observe performance.
Note: Avoid increasing the MOTOR MID
VOLTS (A5) parameter too high, since this
effects stopping performance (i.e. coming
into the floor too fast) or can create
Overcurrent Faults
159
Appendix – Open-Loop Performance
Leveling Times Different Up vs. Down
If the elevator exhibits significantly different
leveling speeds/times up vs. down then until
resolved, try the following (in order):
1. Verify the Slip Compensation
parameters
2. Complete Motor RPM Adjustment
Procedure
Verify Slip Compensation parameters
 Verify SLIP COMP TIME (A1) parameter
is at default of 1.50.
 Verify SLIP COMP GAIN (A1) parameter
is at default of 1.00.
Complete Motor RPM Adjustment Procedure
 At Empty Car, run the drive at 10% of
contract speed and complete the Motor
RPM Adjustment Procedure detailed on
page 156.
 At Full-load, run the drive at 10% of
contract speed and complete the Motor
RPM Adjustment Procedure detailed on
page 156.
Coming into Floor Too Fast
If the car is coming into the floor too fast then
until resolved, try the following (in order):
1. Decrease Decel Jerk Out and Decel
Rates
2. Decrease Motor Mid Voltage
parameter
Note: if no performance change is
observed after any one step, set any
changed value(s) back to the original
value(s) before proceeding onto the next
step.
Decrease Decel Jerk Out and Decel Rates
 Decrease jerk rate via DECEL JERK
OUT x (A2) parameter and observe
performance
 Secondly, decrease decel rate via
DECEL RATE x (A2) parameter and
observe performance
Decrease the Motor Mid Voltage Parameter
 MOTOR MID VOLTS (A5) and
MOTOR MIN VOLTS (A5) parameters
should usually be set at default, see
Table 24 on page 155.
 These parameters would only be
adjusted slightly with certain issues
(see Stalling Attempting to Lift Load
(page 157); Spotting or Stalling Going
into Leveling (page 159); or
Overshooting Floor only with Regen
Load (page 162)).
 Decrease MOTOR MID VOLTS (A5)
parameter (decrease increments of 0.5
and observe performance)
Note: When decreasing the Motor Mid
Volts parameter, watch that the drive does
not start stalling (especially with full-load)
160
Appendix – Open-Loop Performance
Decrease Decel Jerk Out Rate
 Decrease jerk rate via DECEL JERK
OUT x (A2) parameter and observe
performance.
Decrease DC Injection Stop Frequency
 Decrease the DC STOP FREQ (A1)
parameter in increments of 0.1 Hz and
observe performance.
Undershooting Floor
If the car is undershooting the floor then until
resolved, try the following (in order):
1. Verify Mechanical Brake Timing
2. Increase Leveling Speed
3. Decrease Decel Jerk Out and Decel
Rates
Note: if no performance change is
observed after any one step, set any
changed value(s) back to the original
value(s) before proceeding onto the next
step.
Verify Mechanical Brake Timing
The mechanical brake should be dropped
during the DC injection stop time (DC
STOP TIME (A1) parameter), see
“Mechanical Brake Timing at Stop” on
page 163.
Increase Leveling Speed
 Increase leveling speed and observe
performance
Increase Decel Jerk Out and Decel Rates
 Decrease jerk rate via DECEL JERK
OUT x (A2) parameter and observe
performance
 Secondly, decrease decel rate via
DECEL RATE x (A2) parameter and
observe performance
Leveling Oscillation
If the elevator exhibits a leveling speed
oscillation then until resolved, try the following
(in order):
1. Increase the Hunt Prevention Time
Parameter
2. Decrease Distortion Loop Gain
parameters
Note: if no performance change is
observed after any one step, set any
changed value(s) back to the original
value(s) before proceeding onto the next
step.
Increase the Hunt Prevention Time Parameter
 The Hunt Prevention Time Constant is
defaulted as 0.2 seconds (HUNT
PREV TIME (A4)= 0.2).
 Increase the HUNT PREV TIME (A4)
parameter in 0.1 intervals and observe
performance.
 Note: if no performance change is
observed, set the values back to
default
Decrease the Distortion Loop Gain Parameters
 The Distortion Loop Gain parameters
are defaulted at Id DIST LOOP GN
(A4) = 0.50 and Iq DIST LOOP GN
(A4) = 0.30
Note: to view these parameter enabled
hidden items (HIDDEN ITEMS (U2) =
enabled)
 Decrease Id DIST LOOP GN (A4) and
Iq DIST LOOP GN (A4) parameters in
0.1 intervals and observe
performance.
 Note: if no performance change is
observed, set the values back to
default
Bump at Stop
If a bump is felt at the stop, then until resolved,
try the following (in order):
1. Verify Mechanical Brake Timing
2. Decrease Decel Jerk Out Rate
3. Decrease DC Injection Stop
Frequency
Note: if no performance change is
observed after any one step, set any
changed value(s) back to the original
value(s) before proceeding onto the next
step.
Verify Mechanical Brake Timing
The mechanical brake should be dropped
during the DC injection stop time (DC
STOP TIME (A1) parameter), see
“Mechanical Brake Timing at Stop” on
page 163.
161
Appendix – Open-Loop Performance
Overshooting Floor only with Regen Load
If the car overshoots the floor only with a regen
load (i.e. empty-up) then:
 Verify the car DOES NOT overshoot
with balanced car and empty-down…if
it does refer to Overshooting Floor
section on page 162.
 If only overshoots empty-up, increase
MOTOR MIN VOLTS (A5) in
increments of 0.1 V and observe
performance.
Note: if no performance change is
observed, set the Motor Min Volts
parameter to the original value.
Rollback at Stop
If rollback is observed at the stop, then until
resolved, try the following (in order):
1. Verify Mechanical Brake Timing
2. Decrease Decel Jerk Out Rate
3. Increase DC Injection Stop Level
Note: if no performance change is
observed after any one step, set any
changed value(s) back to the original
value(s) before proceeding onto the next
step.
Verify Mechanical Brake Timing
The mechanical brake should be dropped
during the DC injection stop time (DC
STOP TIME (A1) parameter), see
“Mechanical Brake Timing at Stop” on
page 163.
Decrease Decel Jerk Out Rate
 Decrease jerk rate via DECEL JERK
OUT x (A2) parameter and observe
performance.
Increase DC Injection Stop Level
 Increase the DC STOP LEVEL (A1)
parameter in increments of 5% and
observe performance.
Measuring Stator Resistance Procedure
The stator resistance value can be measured
by:
 Remove any two motor wires directly
at the terminals of the motor. Since
the stator resistance is low, the
resistance needs to be measured at
the motor terminals in order to avoid
the resistance of the motor wires
 Connect the two meter leads together
and measure the resistance of the
meter leads in ohms (meter
resistance). Since the stator
resistance is low, the resistance of the
meter leads need to be taken into
account.
Overshooting Floor
If the car is overshooting the floor then until
resolved, try the following (in order):
o Verify Mechanical Brake Timing
o Decrease Leveling Speed
o Increase Decel Jerk Out and Decel
Rates
o Decrease Motor Mid Voltage
parameter
Note: if no performance change is
observed after any one step, set any
changed value(s) back to the original
value(s) before proceeding onto the next
step.
Verify Mechanical Brake Timing
The mechanical brake should be dropped
during the DC injection stop time (DC
STOP TIME (A1) parameter), see
“Mechanical Brake Timing at Stop” on
page 163.
Decrease Leveling Speed
 Decrease leveling speed and observe
performance
 Note: practical minimum for leveling
speed is about 2.5 Hz.
Increase Decel Jerk Out and Decel Rates
 Increase jerk rate via DECEL JERK
OUT x (A2) parameter and observe
performance
 Secondly, increase decel rate via
DECEL RATE x (A2) parameter and
observe performance
 Note: When increasing the Decel and
Jerk Rates watch for spotting or
stalling.
Decrease the Motor Mid Voltage Parameter
 Decrease MOTOR MID VOLTS (A5)
parameter (decrease increments of 0.5
and observe performance)
 Note: When decreasing the Motor Mid
Volts parameter, watch that the drive
does not start stalling (especially with
full-load)
162
Appendix – Open-Loop Performance



Measure the resistance between the
two motor terminals in ohms (stator
resistance)
With the motor nameplate values
entered in the A5 menu, use the BASE
IMPEDANCE (D2) value (in ohms) to
calculate the STATOR RESIST (A5)
parameter (as a percentage of base
impedance):
-
stator resistance - meter resistance
 100
2 x BASE IMPEDANCE (D2)
Mid-volts Adjustment Procedure
 Run the drive (Balanced) at 10% of
contract speed
 Verify the running currents are
approximately equal in both directions.
The middle voltage level (via MOTOR
MID VOLTS (A5) parameter) should be
adjusted in 1 or 2 volt increments and the
current monitored in both the up and
down directions until the running currents
are approximately equal.
 Note: If the middle voltage is set too high,
the drive will begin to trip on over current
faults during normal operation or effect
stopping performance (i.e. coming into
the floor too fast)
 Note: If after raising the midpoint voltage
spotting again begins to occur, set mid
voltage back to previous value
Mechanical Brake Timing at Start
The mechanical brake should be picked
during the DC injection start time (DC
START TIME (A1) parameter).
 But allow 0.5 seconds for the motor to
build up flux before lifting the
mechanical brake.
 Also, do not have the DC injection last
more than 0.5 seconds after the
mechanical brake is lifted.
 If drive controls the mechanical brake,
the DC inject start time should be at
least 0.5 seconds greater than the
brake pick delay (BRAKE PICK DELAY
(A1)).
 AUTO STOP EN (C1) parameter
- Enabled - The drive will start DC
injection phase when it receives a
163
run command and a non-zero
speed command.
Disabled - The drive will start DC
injection phase when it receives a
run command.
Mechanical Brake Timing at Stop
The mechanical brake should be dropped
during the DC injection stop time (DC
STOP TIME (A1) parameter).
 But allow additional stopping dc
injection time after the mechanical
brake is dropped for it to close.
 If drive controls the mechanical brake
via BRAKE PICK logic output, the DC
inject stop time should be greater than
the brake pick delay (BRAKE PICK
DELAY (A1)) by the time it takes for the
mechanical brake to close.
 AUTO STOP ENA (C1)=DISABLED
STOPPING MODE SEL (C1) =
- RAMP
- Run command removed - the
drive will ramp to DC injection
phase.
- Commanding zero speed - the
drive will try to hold zero speed
(not DC injection).
- IMMEDIATE
- Run command removed - the
drive will immediate turn off its
outputs (coast to stop).
- Commanding zero speed - the
drive will ramp to DC injection
phase.
 AUTO STOP ENA (C1) =ENABLED
STOPPING MODE SEL (C1) =
- RAMP
- Run command removed - the
drive will ramp to DC injection
phase.
- Commanding zero speed - the
drive will ramp to DC injection
phase.
- IMMEDIATE
- Run command removed - the
drive will immediately turn off its
outputs (coast to stop).
- Commanding zero speed - the
drive will immediately turn off its
outputs (coast to stop).
Appendix – DCP 4 Setup and Calibration
If this speed is not exactly the same as the
speed displayed in the CONTRACT CAR
SPEED, use the previously noted data in to the
following formula:
Appendix
DCP 4 Setup and Calibration
The commissioning and setup of the
HPV900S2 in DCP 4 mode is relatively simple,
all that is required is the calibration of the drive
to ensure the actual elevator speed exactly
matches our commanded speed – this is
essential for accurate leveling accuracy and
good performance
  Contract  
 
 
  Car Spd    Contract   New Contract 
  Actual     Motor Spd    Motor Spd 
 

 

  Travel Spd  


Activating DCP4
It is then recommended the process is
repeated to verify the actual speed now
accurately reflects the commanded speed. If it
matches then the process is complete, if not
restart the process.
To activate DCP4 simply navigate to SERIAL
MODE (C1) parameter and change to DCP4.
Note: The control system need to have the
ability to operate in DCP4 mode and must also
have the relevant settings enabled.
Equalizing speeds
Once the elevator is traveling at contract
speed and all learn runs have been completed
the calibration can take place.
In the HPV900S2, navigate to the CONTRACT
CAR SPEED (A1) parameter and make a note
of the speed entered (this should be the same
as the V4 speed in the A3 menu of the drive).
Next navigate to the CONTRACT MOTOR
SPEED (A1) parameter and make a note of
the value also.
Next you need to run the elevator and
accurately monitor the speed at which the
elevator is traveling, this is usually possible
within the control system however if required
the speed of the elevator could be monitored
with a hand tachometer.
Take the elevator to the top floor and then run
it to the bottom floor at high speed, make a
note of the speed displayed whilst the elevator
is traveling record the actual speed the
elevator is traveling at (either from within the
control systems processor or my manually
monitoring it).
164
Appendix – DCP 4 Setup and Calibration
Appendix
Testpoints (Control Board)
T1
motor current
T10
-15VDC
(u phase)
T11
+24VDC
T3
motor current
(w phase)
T9
common
T12
+5VDC
T4
DC bus voltage
T13
+15VDC
Scaling: 3V=300V(230v class)
3V=600V(460v class)
The following testpoints are
not currently used:
T5, T6, T7, and T8
Figure 46: Main Board Testpoints
165
T2
motor current
(v phase)
Appendix – Testpoints
Appendix
Testpoints (EnDat Option Card - Power Supplies)
TP22
+5_CONV
TP13
Analog Common
TP20
Common
TP15
Analog Common
TP21
+15VDC
TP17
+3.3VDC
TP19
+1.5V
TP16
+5VDC
TP28
-15VDC
TP27
AC_ISO
TP25
+5V_ISO
TP18
-5V_ISO
TP29
C_+24VISO
TP23
Common
TP26
C_ISO
TP24
+7.5V_ISO
Figure 47: EnDat Option Card Power Supply Testpoints
166
Appendix – Testpoints
Appendix
Testpoints (EnDat Option Card - Other)
TP13
Analog Common
TP14
AOut2
TP12
AOut1
TP20
Common
JM1
Clock
Adjustment
TP15
Analog Common
TP9
A_D_M
TP9
B_D_M
TP4
EDataO
TP1
AEnc
TP3
EnDir
TP5
EClk
TP2
BEnc
JM2
Power Sense Enable
TP23
Common
Figure 48: EnDat Option Card Other Testpoints
For long encoder cables (15m/50ft), it is recommended to connect the –SENSE and +SENSE
lines into the terminal block. The drive will automatically produce proper voltage on the
encoder if JM2 is set to position 2-3. If JM2 is set to position 1-2, the remote power sense is
disabled and the sense wires do not need to be connected.
In addition to remote power sense for long cable lengths, JM1, the serial clock, should be set
to position 2-3. For shorter cable lengths, JM1 should stay in position 1-2.
167
Appendix – Elevator Duty Cycle
Appendix
The General Purpose rating defines the
maximum amount of current the drive can
produce if the drive was to run non-stop.
Elevator Duty Cycle
The HPV 900 Series 2 Ratings Table has the
following two continuous current ratings:
 Continuous Output Current
General Purpose Rating
 Continuous Output Current
Elevator Duty Cycle Rating
Rated NA*
EU*
NA*
EU*
Input Rated Rated Rated Rated
HP
kW
kW
Voltage HP
7.5
-5.5
-2
10
-7.5
-3
15
-11
-0
20
-15
-V
25
-19
-30
-22
-40
-30
-5
5
3.7
3.7
7.5
5.5
5.5
4
10
7.5
7.5
5.5
15
10
11
7.5
4
20
15
15
11
6
25
20
19
15
0
30
25
22
18.5
V
40
30
30
22
50
40
37
30
60
50
45
37
75
60
56
45
The Elevator Duty Cycle Rating defines the
maximum amount of current the drive can
produce following the worst case Elevator
System Load Profile.
Rated Current
Rated
From the
Full-Load
Elevator System
Current
Load Profile
Continuous Continuous
Output
Output
Current
Current
Maximum
General
Elevator Duty Output
Purpose
Cycle**
Current Frame
Rating
Rating
for 5 Sec Size***
25
27
62.5
2
31
33
77.5
2
41
44
102.5
4
52
56
130
4
75
80
187.5
4
88
94
220
4
98
105
245
5
8
9
20
1
12
13
30
2
16
17
40
2
21
23
52.5
3
27
29
67.5
3
34
36
85
4
41
44
102.5
4
52
56
130
4
65
70
162.5
5
72
77
180
5
96
103
240
5
Model Number****
HPV900-2025-2E1-01
HPV900-2031-2E1-01
HPV900-2041-2E1-01
HPV900-2052-2E1-01
HPV900-2075-2E1-01
HPV900-2088-2E1-01
HPV900-2098-2E1-01
HPV900-4008-2E1-01
HPV900-4012-2E1-01
HPV900-4016-2E1-01
HPV900-4021-2E1-01
HPV900-4027-2E1-01
HPV900-4034-2E1-01
HPV900-4041-2E1-01
HPV900-4052-2E1-01
HPV900-4065-2E1-01
HPV900-4072-2E1-01
HPV900-4096-2E1-01
Range for continuous current operation
NOTE:
all ratings at 60/50Hz and 10 kHz carrier frequency
all ratings for based on a geared elevator application,
For more information on altitude, temperature, and carrier frequency derating, see Drive Derating on page 15.
* NA refers to drives sold in North America and ratings are based off of 460VAC input. EU refers to drives sold in Europe and are based off of
400VAC input
** For more information on the Elevator Duty Cycle Rating, see page 168
*** Cube size dimensions, mounting holes, and weights are shown in Dimensions, Mounting Holes and Weights on page 172
**** From more information on model numbers, see page 15.
168
Appendix – Elevator Duty Cycle
event
#2
event
#1
event
#3
event
#10
250 %
event
#5
200 %
event
#9
event
#7
event
#11
100 %
time in seconds
-100 %
-200 %
event
#4
event
#12
event
#6
-250 %
event
#8
% full-load current
Assumptions:
1) Elevator is operating at full load
2) Motor/drive operating under 189 start/hr.
3) Profile is considered worst case
4) Car weight to counter-weight ratio - 60:40
Figure 49: Elevator System Load Profile
Event Description Time Current
Current
(s) (per unit) (% full load) (I²t)
1
Pre torque
1
1
100%
1.0
2
Accel up
3
2.5
250%
18.75
3
Cruise
5
1
100%
5.0
4
Decel up
3
1
100%
3.0
5
Post torque
1
1
100%
1.0
6
Rest
6
0
0%
0.0
7
8
9
10
11
12
Pre torque
Accel down
Cruise
Decel down
Post torque
Rest
Total
1
3
5
3
1
6
38
1
2
1
1
1
0
100%
200%
100%
100%
100%
0%
1.0
12
5.0
3.0
1.0
0.0
50.75
RMS Per Unit Current for Load Profile 1.16
Percentage of Full-Load Current for Load Profile 107%
Cycles per hour
95
Starts per hour
189
Table 27: Elevator System Load Profile
169
Appendix – CE Guidelines
Appendix

CE Guidelines
Below are guidelines for CE compliance.
The basic countermeasures against the above
conditions include modification of the control
panel structure. Using EMI gaskets, ferrite
cores, shielded cable, and enhanced
grounding is also beneficial. The separation of
signal and power wires is essential.
Standards
EN 12015
EN 12016
Conducted noise and radiated noise (due
to conducted noise) flowing from the
control panel into the main input cables.
Electromagnetic compatibility
Emission
Electromagnetic compatibility
Immunity
To help comply it is necessary to prevent the
leakage or penetration of radio waves through
cable entrances and installation holes in the
enclosure.
Recommended Line Filter
A line filter must be connected between the
main power supply and input three phase input
terminals to comply with the standards listed
above. Line Filter Selection on page 184 lists
the recommended line filters to be used with
HPV 900 Series 2 drives.
Modifications to the enclosure include the
following:
1. The enclosure should be made of ferrous
metal and the joints at the top, bottom, and
side panels should be continuously welded
to make them electrically conductive.
2. The paint on the joint sections should be
removed back to the bare metal to provide
good electrical conductance.
3. Be careful to avoid gaps, which could be
created when panels become warped due
to over tightening of retaining screws.
4. The section where the cabinet and door fit
should have a ridged structure to avoid
any gaps where RFI may leak.
5. There should be no conducting sections,
which are left floating electrically.
6. Both the cabinet and drive unit should be
connected to a common ground.
Installation Guidelines for EMI/RFI Issues
The HPV 900 Series 2 drive should be
installed in a control panel or metal enclosure.
Enclosure manufacturers’ designs vary and it
is not the intent of this document to cover all
designs. Some designs require different
countermeasures than other designs. This
paper covers only the general points of
enclosure design when the HPV 900 Series 2
drive is used.
Countermeasures For the Enclosure
Radio frequency interference of various
wavelengths emitted by electrical components
are scattered randomly inside a control panel.
This RFI induces noise on the cables within
the control panel. When these cables are led
out of the control panel, the cables containing
the RFI noise act as antenna and radiate noise
externally.
Enclosure Door Construction
To help comply it is necessary to reduce RFI
by eliminating gaps around doors used for
opening/closing the control panel.
1. The door should be made of ferrous metal.
2. Conductive packing should be used
between the doors and the main unit.
Assure conductivity by removing the paint
on the sections, which contact the door.
3. Be careful to avoid gaps which could be
opened when panels are warped due to
the tightening retaining screws, etc.
If drives or other control equipment are
connected to a power supply without using a
line filter, high frequency noise generated in
the equipment can flow into the power supply.
Problems related to these emissions include:
 Radiated noise from the electric
components inside the control panel or
from the connecting cables.
 Radiated noise from the cables leading out
of the control panel.
170
Appendix – CE Guidelines
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
AC main input power,
AC control input power,
output to the motor,
motor encoder/thermistor wiring,
low voltage control including analog and
digital inputs and outputs,
6. dynamic braking resistor.
Wiring External to the Enclosure
To help comply, the treatment of cables is the
most important countermeasure. The
grounding and the treatment of gaps in the
external connection sections between the
control panel and the machine are also
important. It is recommended that the OEM /
installer examine the present structure of all
cable entrances.
Wiring Internal to the Enclosure
The most effective treatment for cables is
shielding. Screened / shielded cable is
recommended within the control panel. Use
cables with a woven screen. The screen of the
cable should be securely grounded using the
largest area and shortest distance practical.
Shield terminations must be as short as
possible. It is recommended to ground the
screen of the cable by clamping the cable to
the grounding plate.
Screened/shielded cable must be used for the
motor cable (20 meters, 65 feet. max). The
screen of the motor cable must be grounded at
both ends by a short connection using as large
an area as practical. The output lead section of
the control panel should be treated to minimize
leakage of RFI by eliminating clearances. The
grounding surfaces should be metal
conductors (steel solid or flexible conduit) and
conductance should be assured by the
following:
 Ground the connectors at both ends.
 The motor should be grounded.
 Flexible conduit (metallic) connected to a
junction box should be grounded.
Panel Layout
The line filter and the drive must be mounted
on the same metal panel. The metal panel
should be securely grounded. The filter should
be mounted as close as possible to the drive.
Power cables should be kept as short as
possible.
Group the wiring external to the enclosure into
six separate steel conduits:
171
Appendix – Dimensions, Mounting Holes, & Weights
Appendix
Dimensions, Mounting Holes, & Weights
Figure 50: Frame 1 Dimensions and Mounting Holes
172
Appendix – Dimensions, Mounting Holes, & Weights
Figure 51: Frame 2 Dimensions and Mounting Holes
173
Appendix – Dimensions, Mounting Holes, & Weights
Figure 52: Frame 3 Dimensions and Mounting Holes
174
Appendix – Dimensions, Mounting Holes, & Weights
11.42in(290mm)
8.82in (224mm)
7.09in (180mm)
10.51in (267mm)
10.43in (265mm)
0.06in (2mm)
F
4-
17.95in (456.mm)
18.86in (479mm)
17.99in (457mm)
12
8.67in (220mm)
Notes: Weight = 70.6lbs (32kg)
Figure 53: Frame 3.5 Dimensions and Mounting Holes
175
Appendix – Dimensions, Mounting Holes, & Weights
Figure 54: Frame 4 Dimensions and Mounting Holes
176
Appendix – Dimensions, Mounting Holes, & Weights
Figure 55: Frame 5 Dimensions and Mounting Holes
177
Appendix – Dynamic Braking Resistor Selection
Appendix
Dynamic Braking Resistor Selection – Worm Gear
Drive Model
HPV900-4008-2E1-01
HPV900-4012-2E1-01
HPV900-4016-2E1-01
HPV900-4021-2E1-01
HPV900-4027-2E1-01
HPV900-4034-2E1-01
HPV900-4041-2E1-01
HPV900-4052-2E1-01
HPV900-4065-2E1-01
HPV900-4072-2E1-01
HPV900-4096-2E1-01
(Worm Gear)
(Worm Gear)
Magnetek Part
Number (North
America)
0.8
1.2
1.6
2.4
3.2
4.0
4.8
6.4
8.0
9.6
12.0
162 - 53
109 - 32
80 - 32
53 - 16
40 - 16
33 - 8
27 - 8
20 - 8
16 - 5.3
13 - 5.3
11 - 4
HPV-00856-DB
HPV-01735-DB
HPV-01735-DB
HPV-02523-DB
HPV-03521-DB
HPV-05308-DB
HPV-05308-DB
HPV-08709-DB
HPV-09106-DB
HPV-12906-DB
HPV-12906-DB
Resistor Value
Power
Range
Dissipation kW
Magnetek Part
Number (Europe)
DBR-4008-WG
DBR-4012/16-WG
DBR-4012/16-WG
DBR-4021/27-WG
DBR-4021/27-WG
DBR-4034/41-WG
DBR-4034/41-WG
DBR-4052-WG
DBR-4065/72-WG
DBR-4065/72-WG
DBR-4096-WG
Note: 460 V, Regeneration dc bus voltage = 800V
Table A2. 1 - 460V Brake Resistor Recommendations
Drive Model
HPV900-2025-2E1-01
HPV900-2031-2E1-01
HPV900-2041-2E1-01
HPV900-2052-2E1-01
HPV900-2075-2E1-01
HPV900-2088-2E1-01
HPV900-2098-2E1-01
(Worm Gear)
(Worm Gear)
Magnetek Part
Number (North
America)
1.2
1.6
2.4
3.2
4.0
4.8
6.4
27 - 8
20 - 8
14 - 4
10 - 4
8.3 - 2.7
6.8 - 2.7
5 - 2
HPV-01311-DB
HPV-01709-DB
HPV-02506-DB
HPV-03505-DB
HPV-04004-DB
HPV-06206-DB
HPV-06703-DB
Resistor Value
Power
Range
Dissipation kW
Magnetek Part
Number (Europe)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Note: 230 V, Regeneration dc bus voltage = 400V
Table A2. 2 - 230V Brake Resistor Recommendations
Assumptions for Brake Resistor Recommendations
1) Peak regenerative requirement is: (Cube KW) * 2.5 * (Gear Efficiency) * (Motor Efficiency). This
occurs at start of deceleration under maximum overhauling load (for counterweight < 50%, this is
full load car, start of decel going down). From peak regen power the maximum resistor is
calculated as: R = Vdc2 / Ppeak
2) Motor efficiency is 95%, jerk out is assumed to be infinite
3) 250% regenerative torque limit
4) Worm gear efficiency = 45%; planetary gears = 95%
5) For power dissipations, a 50% duty cycle is assumed (i.e. elevator runs continuously up and down
but regenerates 50% of the time). Also, 100% regenerative power required. Average power =
(Cube KW) * 1.0 * (Gear Efficiency) * (Motor Efficiency) * 0.5
6) Minimum resistor values based on 100% of device rated current.
178
Appendix – Dynamic Braking Resistor Selection
Appendix
Dynamic Braking Resistor Selection – Planetary Gear
Drive Model
HPV900-4008-2E1-01
HPV900-4012-2E1-01
HPV900-4016-2E1-01
HPV900-4021-2E1-01
HPV900-4027-2E1-01
HPV900-4034-2E1-01
HPV900-4041-2E1-01
HPV900-4052-2E1-01
HPV900-4065-2E1-01
HPV900-4072-2E1-01
HPV900-4096-2E1-01
Power
Resistor Value
Dissipation kW
Range
(Planetary Gear)
(Planetary Gear)
Magnetek Part
Number (North
America)
1.7
2.5
3.4
5
6.8
8.5
10
14
17
20
25
77  - 53 
52  - 32 
38  - 32 
25  - 16 
19  - 16 
16  - 8 
13  - 8 
9-8
7.7 - 5.3
6.3 - 5.3
5.2  - 4 
HPV-01860-DB
HPV-02536-DB
HPV-03633-DB
HPV-05519-DB
HPV-08020-DB
HPV-08709-DB
HPV-10510-DB
HPV-16808-DB
HPV-24805-DB
HPV-24805-DB
HPV-25104-DB
Magnetek Part
Number (Europe)
DBR-4008-PM
DBR-4012/16-PM
DBR-4012/16-PM
DBR-4021/27-PM
DBR-4021/27-PM
DBR-4034/41-PM
DBR-4034/41-PM
DBR-4052-PM
DBR-4065-PM
DBR-4072-PM
DBR-4096-PM
Note: 460 V, Regeneration dc bus voltage = 800V
Table A2. 3 - 460V Brake Resistor Recommendations
Drive Model
HPV900-2025-2E1-01
HPV900-2031-2E1-01
HPV900-2041-2E1-01
HPV900-2052-2E1-01
HPV900-2075-2E1-01
HPV900-2088-2E1-01
HPV900-2098-2E1-01
(Planetary Gear)
(Planetary Gear)
Magnetek Part
Number (North
America)
2.5
3.4
5
6.8
8.5
10
14
13  - 8 
9.5  - 8 
6.4  - 4 
4.7  - 4 
3.9 - 2.7
3.2 - 2.7
2.4 - 2
HPV-04109-DB
HPV-04109-DB
HPV-05505-DB
HPV-07005-DB
HPV-11803-DB
HPV-11803-DB
HPV-16802-DB
Resistor Value
Power
Range
Dissipation kW
Magnetek Part
Number (Europe)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Note: 230 V, Regeneration dc bus voltage = 400V
Table A2. 4 - 230V Brake Resistor Recommendations
Assumptions for Brake Resistor Recommendations
1) Peak regenerative requirement is: (Cube KW) * 2.5 * (Gear Efficiency) * (Motor Efficiency). This
occurs at start of deceleration under maximum overhauling load (for counterweight < 50%, this is
full load car, start of decel going down). From peak regen power the maximum resistor is
calculated as: R = Vdc2 / Ppeak
2) Motor efficiency is 95%, jerk out is assumed to be infinite
3) 250% regenerative torque limit
4) Worm gear efficiency = 45%; planetary gears = 95%
5) For power dissipations, a 50% duty cycle is assumed (i.e. elevator runs continuously up and down
but regenerates 50% of the time). Also, 100% regenerative power required. Average power =
(Cube KW) * 1.0 * (Gear Efficiency) * (Motor Efficiency) * 0.5
6) Minimum resistor values based on 100% of device rated current.
179
Appendix – Dynamic Braking Resistor Fuse Selection
Appendix
Dynamic Braking Resistor Fusing Selection
All fuses should be rated for 800VDC
Drive Model
HPV900-4008-2E1-01
HPV900-4012-2E1-01
HPV900-4016-2E1-01
HPV900-4021-2E1-01
HPV900-4027-2E1-01
HPV900-4034-2E1-01
HPV900-4041-2E1-01
HPV900-4052-2E1-01
HPV900-4065-2E1-01
HPV900-4072-2E1-01
HPV900-4096-2E1-01
Fuse Type (Bussmann pn)
FWS-10A20F
FWS-15A20F
FWJ-20A14F
FWJ-25A14F
FWJ-30A14F
FWJ-50A
FWJ-70A
FWJ-70A
FWJ-100A
FWJ-100A
FWJ-150A
Fuse Size (in Amps)
10A
15A
20A
30A
30A
50A
70A
70A
100A
100A
150A
Table 28: 460V DB Fusing Recommendations
All fuses should be rated for at least 400VDC
Drive Model
HPV900-2025-2E1-01
HPV900-2031-2E1-01
HPV900-2041-2E1-01
HPV900-2052-2E1-01
HPV900-2075-2E1-01
HPV900-2088-2E1-01
HPV900-2098-2E1-01
Fuse Type (Bussmann pn)
FWH-23A14F
FWH-40A
FWH-70B
FWH-70B
FWH-100B
FWH-100B
FWH-150B
Fuse Size (in Amps)
25A
40A
70A
70A
100A
100A
150A
Table 29: 230V DB Fusing Recommendations
IMPORTANT
Dynamic Braking Resistor Fusing:
1. Fusing is intended to limit drive damage in the
event of an external resistor failure or short circuit.
2. Fusing will NOT protect DB resistors or wiring in
the event of an overload.
3. Fuse both resistor legs mounting fuses as close to
the drive as possible.
4. Always use fast acting semiconductor type fuses of
sufficient voltage rating.
180
Appendix – Harmonic Filter Selection
Appendix
Three-Phase AC Input Reactor Selection
An input reactor can help minimize most drive nuisance tripping and faults caused by over-voltage and
input line disturbances including line spikes. The parts listed below are based on 3% impedance and
allow for ambient temperatures of 45C. All reactors listed contain the following marks: CE, UL-508, and
CSA.
Input Cube Cube
Inductance
Model
Voltage HP
KW
(mH)
5
3.7 -4008
2.10mH
7.5
5.5 -4012
1.60 mH
10
7.5 -4016
1.10 mH
15
11
-4021
0.82 mH
20
15
-4027
0.71 mH
460 V
25
18
-4034
0.55 mH
30
22
-4041
0.38 mH
40
30
-4052
0.38 mH
50
37
-4065
0.29 mH
60
45
-4072
0.29 mH
75
55
-4096
0.18 mH
Amps
11A
14A
21A
28A
35A
46A
65A
65A
83A
83A
130A
Weight
(lbs)
4.2lbs
4.3lbs
7.2lbs
9.5lbs
13lbs
17lbs
22lbs
22lbs
26lbs
26lbs
37lbs
Watts
Loss
40.9W
48.2W
57.4W
66.8W
102W
99W
105W
105W
155W
155W
152W
Magnetek Part
Number
05P00620-0150
05P00620-0165
05P00620-0151
05P00620-0152
05P00620-0153
05P00620-0164
05P00620-0155
05P00620-0155
05P00620-0156
05P00620-0156
05P00620-0169
Table 30: 460V Input Reactor Recommendations
Input Cube Cube
Inductance
Model
Voltage HP
KW
(mH)
7.5
5.5 -2025
0.39 mH
10
7.5 -2031
0.27 mH
15
11
-2041
0.19 mH
230 V
20
15
-2052
0.17 mH
25
18
-2075
0.17 mH
30
22
-2088
0.12 mH
40
30
-2098
0.08 mH
Amps
28A
55A
65A
83A
83A
104A
160A
Weight
(lbs)
5.1lbs
18lbs
18lbs
19lbs
19lbs
22lbs
34lbs
Watts
Loss
48.2W
67W
87W
119W
119W
94W
110W
Magnetek Part
Number
05P00620-0158
05P00620-0159
05P00620-0160
05P00620-0161
05P00620-0161
05P00620-0162
05P00620-0168
Table 31: 230V Input Reactor Recommendations
Manufacturer Considerations:
When selecting an input reactor, the elevator load profile needs to be taking into account.
Consider the following when selecting a manufacturer.
 Repeated 250% overloads current values
 Heating of inductors due to overloads and harmonics
 Saturation of inductor
 Life of reactor
 Ambient temperature vs. inductor current curve. The drive can operate at 45C (110F).
181
Appendix – Harmonic Filter Selection
Appendix
Three-Phase AC Harmonic Filter Selection
A harmonic filter can help minimize harmonic distortion caused by diode switching. The parts listed below
provide performance levels of 5% total harmonic current distortion (THID) and can be used to meet IEEE519. Open panel filters allow for ambient temperatures of 50C while NEMA1 filters allow for ambient
temperatures of 40C. All harmonic filters listed contain the following marks: cUL, UL-508, and CSA.
Input Cube Cube
Model
Voltage HP
KW
5
3.7 -4008
7.5
5.5 -4012
10
7.5 -4016
15
11
-4021
20
15
-4027
460 V
25
18
-4034
30
22
-4041
40
30
-4052
50
37
-4065
60
45
-4072
75
55
-4096
Amps
Watts Loss
11A
14A
21A
27A
34A
44A
52A
66A
83A
83A
103A
197
232
294
343
399
472
533
621
735
735
844
Magnetek Part Numbers
Open Panel
NEMA1
05P00058-1321
05P00058-1338
05P00058-1322
05P00058-1339
05P00058-1323
05P00058-1340
05P00058-1324
05P00058-1341
05P00058-1325
05P00058-1342
05P00058-1326
05P00058-1343
05P00058-1327
05P00058-1344
05P00058-1328
05P00058-1345
05P00058-1329
05P00058-1346
05P00058-1329
05P00058-1346
05P00058-1330
05P00058-1347
Table 32: 460V Input Reactor Recommendations
Input Cube Cube
Model
Voltage HP
KW
7.5
5.5 -2025
10
7.5 -2031
15
11
-2041
230 V
20
15
-2052
25
18
-2075
30
22
-2088
40
30
-2098
Amps
Watts Loss
27A
34A
44A
66A
83A
103A
128A
254
286
338
439
506
591
664
Magnetek Part Numbers
Open Panel
NEMA1
05P00058-1314
05P00058-1331
05P00058-1315
05P00058-1332
05P00058-1316
05P00058-1333
05P00058-1317
05P00058-1334
05P00058-1318
05P00058-1335
05P00058-1319
05P00058-1336
05P00058-1320
05P00058-1337
Table 33: 230V Input Reactor Recommendations
Manufacturer Considerations:
When selecting a harmonic filter, the elevator load profile needs to be taking into account.
Consider the following when selecting a manufacturer.
 Repeated 250% overloads current values
 Heating of inductors due to overloads and harmonics
 Saturation of inductor
 Ambient temperature vs. inductor current curve. The drive can operate at 45C (110F).
182
Appendix
AC Input Fusing Selection
Drive Model
HPV900-4008-2E1-01
HPV900-4012-2E1-01
HPV900-4016-2E1-01
HPV900-4021-2E1-01
HPV900-4027-2E1-01
HPV900-4034-2E1-01
HPV900-4041-2E1-01
HPV900-4052-2E1-01
HPV900-4065-2E1-01
HPV900-4072-2E1-01
HPV900-4096-2E1-01
Fuse
Mfg
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Recommendation 1
Fuse
Fuse Rating
Model No. (Amps/Volts)
A60Q25-2
25A/600V
A60Q30-2
30A/600V
A60Q30-2
30A/600V
A70P50-4
50A/700V
A70P70-4
70A/700V
A70P80-4
80A/700V
A70P80-4
80A/700V
A70P100-4
100A/700V
A70P125-4
125A/700V
A70P150-4
150A/700V
A70P200-4
200A/700V
Fuse Mfg
Ferraz
Ferraz
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Recommendation 2
Fuse Model
Fuse Rating
No.
(Amps/Volts)
A70QS25-14F
25A/690V
A70QS40-14F
40A/690V
FWH-80B
80A/500V
FWH-80B
80A/500V
FWH-100B
100A/500V
FWH-125B
125A/500V
FWH-125B
125A/500V
FWH-125B
125A/500V
FWH-150B
150A/500V
FWH-175B
175A/500V
FWH-200B
200A/500V
Table 34: 460V Fusing Recommendations
Drive Model
HPV900-2025-2E1-01
HPV900-2031-2E1-01
HPV900-2041-2E1-01
HPV900-2052-2E1-01
HPV900-2075-2E1-01
HPV900-2088-2E1-01
HPV900-2098-2E1-01
Fuse
Mfg
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Recommendation 1
Fuse
Fuse Rating
Model No. (Amps/Volts)
A50P50-4
50A/500V
A50P80-4
80A/500V
A50P80-4
80A/500V
A50P125-4
125A/500V
A50P150-4
150A/500V
A50P150-4
150A/500V
A50P200-4
200A/500V
Fuse Mfg
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Recommendation 2
Fuse Model
Fuse Rating
No.
(Amps/Volts)
FWH-80B
80A/500V
FWH-80B
80A/500V
FWH-80B
80A/500V
FWH-100B
100A/500V
FWH-175B
175A/500V
FWH-175B
175A/500V
FWH-225B
225A/500V
Table 35: 230V Fusing Recommendations
183
Appendix – Line Filter Selection
Appendix
Line Filter Selection
The suggested Line Filters to help meet the requirements for the following CE standards:
 EN 12015:2004
 EN 12016:2004
Note: also see CE Guidelines on page 170 for additional installation guidelines
Drive Model
HPV900-4008-2E1-01
HPV900-4012-2E1-01
HPV900-4016-2E1-01
HPV900-4021-2E1-01
HPV900-4027-2E1-01
HPV900-4034-2E1-01
HPV900-4041-2E1-01
HPV900-4052-2E1-01
HPV900-4065-2E1-01
HPV900-4072-2E1-01
HPV900-4096-2E1-01
Magnetek Filter Part Number
Stand Alone
Footprint
H9-4008/12-SA
H9-FP1
H9-4008/12-SA
H9-FP2
H9-4016/21-SA
H9-FP2
H9-4016/21-SA
H9-FP3
H9-4027-SA
H9-FP3
H9-4034/41-SA
N/A
H9-4034/41-SA
N/A
H9-4052/65-SA
N/A
H9-4052/65-SA
N/A
H9-4072-SA
N/A
H9-4096-SA
N/A
Table 36: 460V Line Filter Recommendations
Model
HPV900-2025-2E1-01
HPV900-2031-2E1-01
HPV900-2041-2E1-01
HPV900-2052-2E1-01
HPV900-2075-2E1-01
HPV900-2088-2E1-01
HPV900-2098-2E1-01
Filter Part Number
Stand Alone
Footprint
KMF-336
N/A
KMF-336
N/A
KMF-350
N/A
KMF-370
N/A
KMF-370
N/A
KMF-3100
N/A
KMF-3100
N/A
Table 37: 230V Line Filter Recommendations
184
Appendix – Selection and Mounting of Encoder
(i.e. HPV 900 Series 2 - 12VDC preferred).
For more information, see Encoder Supply
Voltage on page 189.
Appendix
Selecting and Mounting of Encoder
Mechanical Considerations
 Use direct motor mounting without
couplings. For more information, see Direct
Motor Mounting on page 185186.
 Use hub or hollow shaft encoder with
concentric motor stub shaft. For more
information, see motor stub shaft on page
186.
 If possible, use a mechanical protective
cover for exposed encoders. For more
information, see Encoder Protective Covers
on page 187.
Encoder Specification
The HPV 900 Series 2 has connections for an
incremental two-channel quadrature encoder.
For better noise immunity, the HPV 900 Series 2
provides…
 an isolated power supply, which separates
the processor power from the encoder
 optically isolated encoder signals from the
HPV 900 Series 2’s processor
Encoder Feedback
 Supply Voltage:
12VDC or 5VDC
 Capacity:
200mA or 400mA
 PPR:
600 - 40,000
 Maximum Frequency:
300 kHz
 Input:
2 channel quadrature
5 or 12 volts dc differential
(A, /A, B, /B) {Z,/Z for
Incremental PM}
Encoder Mounting
Insulating Encoder from Motor
It is preferred that both the encoder case and
shaft are insulated from the motor, in order to
minimize encoder bearing currents and ground
noise.
There will be PWM electrical noise on the motor
shaft that will take the easiest path to ground. If
the encoder is not electrically isolated from the
motor, this path could be through the encoder
bearings and/or electronics. Encoder bearing
current will reduce the life of the bearings and
create additional ground noise. The solution
would be to electrically isolate both the encoder
shaft and case from the motor.
Insulating the encoder case from the motor also
reduces ground current coupling from the motor
frame to the internal electronics of the encoder.
Ground noise from the motor frame can disturb
the operation of the encoder and propagate
down the connected cable to disturb the
transmission of the encoder signals. (i.e. there
can be coupling from the case to the internal
electronics even though a discrete capacitor is
not present)
Figure 59 shows how to insulate a hollow-shaft
encoder from the motor (similar mounting
hardware and insulating insert can be used for
hub-shaft encoders).
Encoder Considerations
Electrical interference and mechanical speed
modulations are common problems that can
result in improper speed feedback getting to the
drive. To help avoid these common problems,
the following electrical and mechanical
considerations are suggested.
IMPORTANT
Proper encoder speed feedback is essential for
a drive to provide proper motor control.
Electrical Considerations
 If possible, insulate both the encoder case
and shaft from the motor. For more
information, see Insulating Encoder from
Motor on page 185.
 Use twisted pair cable with shield tied to
chassis ground at drive end. For more
information, see Encoder Wiring on page 28.
 Use limited slew rate differential line drivers.
For more information, see Differential Line
Drivers on page 187.
 Do not allow capacitors from internal
encoder electronics to case. For more
information, see Capacitors from Electronics
to Case on page 188.
 Do not exceed the operating specification of
the encoder/drive. For more information, see
Exceeding Operating Specification on page
188.
 Use the proper encoder supply voltage and
use the highest possible voltage available
185
Appendix – Selection and Mounting of Encoder
These have no separate shaft to shaft coupling.
In addition, there may be no need for mounting
brackets or adapters.
Direct Motor Mounting
Use direct motor mounting without couplings, in
order to avoid eccentricities and to provide for
zero backlash.
Figure 57: Avoiding Couplings
Motor Stub Shaft
Figure 56: Direct Motor Mount
Use hub or hollow shaft encoder with concentric
motor stub shaft and use a flexible encoder
mount rather than a flexible shaft coupling.
Direct mounted encoders do not have shafts and
are mounted directly onto the motor shaft.
Examples include hub-shaft or hollow-shaft
models with integral flexible mounts. These
have no separate shaft to shaft coupling. In
addition, there may be no need for mounting
brackets or adapters.
Direct mounted encoders do not have shafts and
are mounted directly onto the motor shaft.
Examples include hub-shaft or hollow-shaft
models with integral flexible mounts.
Figure 58: Motor Stub Shaft
use
insulating
insert
use
insulating
hardware
Figure 59: Insulating Encoder from Motor
186
Appendix – Selection and Mounting of Encoder
It is preferred that a solid shaft extension is
specified from the motor manufacturer for a
length recommended by the encoder
manufacturer.
Although it is not the preferred method,
installations that employ a screwed on sub
shaft adapter should:
- use the original hole used to machine the
motor shaft
- use locktight to hold the thread in position
- align the stub shaft to 0.002 inches TIR or
less with a dial indicator
A hub-shaft or hollow-shaft encoder should be
mounted so that its shaft receptacle is in as
close as possible alignment with the axis of the
motor shaft. Clamp or set screws should then
be tightened to secure the encoder.
REMEMBER: If you are following the preferred
method of insulating the encoder from the
motor, install the proper insulating hardware.
NOTE: Do not defeat or restrict the flexure.
This causes failure of the encoder or driving
shaft bearings.
Differential Line Drivers
Use limited slew rate differential line drivers, in
order to minimize transmission line reflections
use type 7272 drivers.
Encoder’s line drivers transition from logic
states in a fraction of a microsecond. The fast
rise and fall times of the driver’s circuitry can
interact with the cable impedance and create
significant ringing on the receiver end of the
cable. This can interfere with the encoder
signals and the operation of the drive. To
reduce the ringing, it is recommended that the
encoder use type 7272 line drivers, which have
slower rise and fall times.
Also to improve performance, line driver
outputs should use differential pairs of
complementary outputs, each paired with its
inverse. This allows the signal to be used with
a differential line receiver, which improves the
noise margin, cancels common-mode noise
and helps to reject ringing from the cable.
Single-Ended Encoders
Although not recommended due to the
absence of noise immunity, the HPV900 S2
drive can be run with singled ended encoders.
Connections are dependent on what revision
of board is used.
For boards with T31 as part of the part
number, use connections shown in Figure 61.
Encoder Protective Covers
In order to protect the encoders from
mechanical damage, it is preferred that for
exposed encoders a mechanical protective
cover is used.
Encoders are vulnerable to mechanical
damage from impact. Encoders can be
damaged by impact during installation or
during exposed operation. Motors are even
sometimes lifted by the encoders on one end.
Therefore, it is preferred that the encoder be
protected by a cover as shown below.
T31
or
T41
TB1
Figure 60: Protective Encoder Covers
187
A
1
/A
2
B
3
/B
4
shield
5
encoder +5/12VDC power
17
encoder common
18
Appendix – Selection and Mounting of Encoder
Figure 61: Single-Ended Encoder on T31
Board
For boards with T41 as part of the part
number, use connections shown in Figure 62.
TB1
A
1
/A
2
B
3
/B
4
shield
5
encoder +5/12VDC power
17
encoder common
18
Figure 63: Encoder with a capacitor
(common to ground)
Figure 62: Single-Ended Encoder on T41
Board
Capacitors from Electronics to Case
Do not allow capacitors from internal encoder
electronics to case, in order to minimize
ground current noise injection and minimize
the coupling of high frequency noise.
Encoders are sometimes supplied with an
internal capacitor from circuit common to case
ground to drain electrical noise from common
to building ground. However, PWM drives have
extremely high frequency noise that is coupled
to the frame and shaft of the motor. A
capacitor placed between the encoder case
and the encoder electronics will couple this
noise into the encoder, where it can interfere
with normal operation.
The result is intermittent rough operation,
motor reversal or no operation at all. The
presumption is that there is a drive or encoder
problem. An improvement is to remove any
internal encoder capacitors between electrical
common and the case.
The above analysis assumes that the electrical
wiring is correct and that the shield on the
encoder cable is properly grounded, see
Encoder Wiring on page 28.
The scope traces in Figure 63 and Figure 64
show a noise comparison of output signals
from similar encoders with and without internal
capacitors, both connected to a motor with
typical PWM switching noise on the frame.
Figure 64: Encoder with no capacitor
(common to ground)
Exceeding Operating Specification
Do not exceed the operating specification of
the encoder/drive, in order to prevent the
encoder from providing incorrect data.
All encoders have inherent mechanical and
electronic limitations regarding speed. The
combination of several design factors including
bearings, frequency response of the
electronics, and PPR of the encoder, etc.
combine to determine "maximum operating
speed". Exceeding the maximum speed may
result in incorrect data or premature failure.
Both the electrical and mechanical encoder
specifications can be provided by the encoder
manufacturer.
To determine the encoder's maximum
operating speed:
Step 1: Determine maximum electronic
operating speed in RPM.
RPM 
188
Encoder freq. response (kHz) x 60
Encoder PPR
Appendix – Selection and Mounting of Encoder
Step 2:
A. If the RPM calculated in Step 1 is less than
or equal to the encoder's maximum
mechanical RPM specification, then the
RPM calculated in Step 1 is the maximum
operating speed specification for this
particular encoder application.
B. If the RPM calculated in Step 1 is greater
than the encoder's maximum mechanical
RPM specification, then the maximum
mechanical RPM specification is the
maximum operating speed for this encoder
application.
Encoder Supply Voltage
Ensure proper encoder supply voltage
and use highest possible voltage available, in
order to ensure proper operation and increase
noise immunity
Ensure that the voltage drop of the encoder
wiring is such that the minimum power supply
voltage for operating the encoder is not
violated. (i.e. 5VDC 5% power supply and
5VDC 10% encoder specification is violated
when the encoder draws 0.3 A and it is wired
with 500 ft at 22 AWG)
 Use an encoder with an internal supply
regulator
 Use a wide supply range encoder
(i.e. 5 – 15 VDC)
It is also preferred that the encoder be
powered by the HPV 900 Series 2’s 12VDC
power supply in order to help with noise
immunity by having the signals at a higher
voltage level.
Step 3:
Compare the maximum operating speed as
determined in Step 2 above with the
application requirements.
To determine if the application exceeds the
operating specification of the HPV 900 Series
2:

Calculate the maximum pulses per
revolution (PPR) for this application
(using the HPV 900 Series 2 frequency
limit of 300 kHz and 120% of the
application’s
top speed)
300,000 Hz x 60
PPR max 
max applicatio n RPM  1 . 2

Verify that the selected encoder’s PPR is
below the calculated maximum PPR
(PPRmax) for this application
189
Appendix – Suggested Wire Sizes
Appendix
Suggested Wire Sizes
Drive Model
Input Power (R,S,T) and Output
2,
Power (U,V,W), 1,
Ground Terminals
HPV900-2025-2E1-01
HPV900-2031-2E1-01
HPV900-2041-2E1-01
HPV900-2052-2E1-01
HPV900-2075-2E1-01
HPV900-2088-2E1-01
HPV900-2098-2E1-01
Wire size range
2
AWG (mm )
i
8 (8.4)
8 (8.4)1
6 (14)
4 (22)
4 (22)
2 (38)
1 (42.4)
Torque Spec lbin
(Nm)
15.6 (1.76)1
15.6 (1.76) 1
57.3 (6.47)
57.3 (6.47)
57.3 (6.47)
57.3 (6.47)
104.2 (11.76)
Wire size range
AWG (mm2)
8 (8.4) 1
8 (8.4) 1
8 (8)
8 (8)
6 (14)
4 (22)
4 (22)
Torque Spec
lbin (Nm)
15.6 (1.76)
15.6 (1.76)
57.3 (6.47)
57.3 (6.47)
57.3 (6.47)
57.3 (6.47)
57.3 (6.47)
HPV900-4008-2E1-01
HPV900-4012-2E1-01
HPV900-4016-2E1-01
HPV900-4021-2E1-01
HPV900-4027-2E1-01
HPV900-4034-2E1-01
HPV900-4041-2E1-01
HPV900-4052-2E1-01
HPV900-4065-2E1-01
HPV900-4072-2E1-01
HPV900-4096-2E1-01
14-10 (2.1-5.3)
12-10 (3.5-5.5)
10 (5.5)
8-6 (8-14)
6 (14)
6 (14)
6 (14)
4 (22)
4 (22)
2 (38)
1 (42.4)
15.6 (1.76)
15.6 (1.76)
15.6 (1.76)
26.0 (2.94)
26.0 (2.94)
26.0 (2.94)
26.0 (2.94)
26.0 (2.94)
57.3 (6.47)
57.3 (6.47)
57.3 (6.47)
12-10 (3.5-5.5)
12-10 (3.5-5.5)
10 (5.5)
8 (8)
8 (8)
8 (8)
8 (8)
6 (14)
4 (22)
4 (22)
4 (22)
15.6 (1.76)
15.6 (1.76)
15.6 (1.76)
26.0 (2.94)
26.0 (2.94)
26.0 (2.94)
26.0 (2.94)
26.0 (2.94)
57.3 (6.47)
57.3 (6.47)
57.3 (6.47)
Control Wiring Terminals
TB1
TB2
B1, B2
Drive Model
HPV900-2025-2E1-01
HPV900-2031-2E1-01
HPV900-2041-2E1-01
HPV900-2052-2E1-01
HPV900-2075-2E1-01
HPV900-2088-2E1-01
HPV900-2098-2E1-01
Wire size
range
AWG (mm2)
8 (8.4)
8 (8.4)
6 (14)
4 (22)
4 (22)
2 (38)
1 (42.4)
HPV900-4008-2E1-01 14-10 (2.1-5.3)
HPV900-4012-2E1-01 12-10 (3.5-5.5)
HPV900-4016-2E1-01
10 (5.5)
HPV900-4021-2E1-01
8-6 (8-14)
HPV900-4027-2E1-01
6 (14)
HPV900-4034-2E1-01
6 (14)
HPV900-4041-2E1-01
6 (14)
HPV900-4052-2E1-01
4 (22)
HPV900-4065-2E1-01
4 (22)
HPV900-4072-2E1-01
2 (38)
HPV900-4096-2E1-01
2 (38)
Torque
Spec lbin
(Nm)
15.6 (1.76) 1
15.6 (1.76) 1
26.0 (2.94)
26.0 (2.94)
26.0 (2.94)
26.0 (2.94)
57.3 (6.47)
Wire size
range
AWG (mm2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
Torque
Spec lbin
(Nm)
1.73 (0.2)
1.73 (0.2)
1.73 (0.2)
1.73 (0.2)
1.73 (0.2)
1.73 (0.2)
1.73 (0.2)
Wire size
range
AWG (mm2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
Torque
Spec lbin
(Nm)
4.34 (0.5)
4.34 (0.5)
4.34 (0.5)
4.34 (0.5)
4.34 (0.5)
4.34 (0.5)
4.34 (0.5)
15.6 (1.76)
15.6 (1.76)
15.6 (1.76)
26.0 (2.94)
26.0 (2.94)
26.0 (2.94)
26.0 (2.94)
26.0 (2.94)
57.3 (6.47)
57.3 (6.47)
57.3 (6.47)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
1.73 (0.2)
1.73 (0.2)
1.73 (0.2)
1.73 (0.2)
1.73 (0.2)
1.73 (0.2)
1.73 (0.2)
1.73 (0.2)
1.73 (0.2)
1.73 (0.2)
1.73 (0.2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
28-14 (0.1-2)
4.34 (0.5)
4.34 (0.5)
4.34 (0.5)
4.34 (0.5)
4.34 (0.5)
4.34 (0.5)
4.34 (0.5)
4.34 (0.5)
4.34 (0.5)
4.34 (0.5)
4.34 (0.5)
Note: wire ratings from: Table 2 – Allowable Ampacities of Insulated Copper Conductors Inside Industrial Control
Equipment Enclosures (Based on a Room Ambient Temperature of 40C (104F)) source: CAN/CSA-B44.1-M91
Table 38: Suggested Wire Sizes
i
Recommended Lug for Frame 2 is Molex 19099-0050 due to terminal size
190
Appendix – Input / Output Rating
Appendix
Input / Output Rating
Input
Output
Drive Model
Voltage
V
Current
A
HPV900-2025-2E1-01
200-240
27.7
Short
Circuit
Withstand
Rating
10KA
HPV900-2031-2E1-01
200-240
34.4
10KA
0-input voltage
31
HPV900-2041-2E1-01
200-240
45.5
10KA
0-input voltage
41
HPV900-2052-2E1-01
200-240
57.7
10KA
0-input voltage
52
HPV900-2075-2E1-01
200-240
83.3
10KA
0-input voltage
75
HPV900-2088-2E1-01
200-240
97.7
10KA
0-input voltage
88
HPV900-2098-2E1-01
200-240
108.8
10KA
0-input voltage
98
HPV900-4008-2E1-01
380-480
8.8
10KA
0-input voltage
8
380-480
13.3
10KA
0-input voltage
12
380-480
17.7
10KA
0-input voltage
16
380-480
23.3
10KA
0-input voltage
21
380-480
30.0
10KA
0-input voltage
27
380-480
37.7
10KA
0-input voltage
34
380-480
45.5
10KA
0-input voltage
41
HPV900-4052-2E1-01
380-480
57.7
10KA
0-input voltage
52
HPV900-4065-2E1-01
380-480
72.2
10KA
0-input voltage
65
HPV900-4072-2E1-01
380-480
80.0
10KA
0-input voltage
72
HPV900-4096-2E1-01
380-480
106.6
10KA
0-input voltage
96
HPV900-4012-2E1-01
HPV900-4016-2E1-01
HPV900-4021-2E1-01
HPV900-4027-2E1-01
HPV900-4034-2E1-01
HPV900-4041-2E1-01
Table 39: Input / Output Ratings
191
Voltage
V
Current
A
0-input voltage
25
Appendix – Single Phase Rating
Appendix
Single Phase Ratings
The HPV900 Series 2 drives may be run with a single phase VAC input. However, in order to run the
drive single phased, the drive must be derated by 60%. See Table 40 below for the single phased
ratings.
Rated
Input
Voltage
2
3
0
V
4
6
0
V
Continuous
Output Current
General Purpose
Rating
10
12.4
16.4
20.8
30
35.2
39.2
3.2
4.8
6.4
8.4
10.8
13.6
16.4
20.8
26
28.8
38.4
Continuous
Maximum Output
Output Current
Frame
Current
Elevator Duty Cycle
Size
for 5 Sec
Rating
10.7
13.3
17.6
22.2
32.1
37.7
42
3.4
5.1
6.8
9
11.6
14.6
17.6
22.2
27.8
30.8
41.1
25
31
41
52
75
88
98
8
12
16
21
27
34
41
52
65
72
96
Table 40: Single Phase Ratings
192
2
2
3.5
3.5
4
4
5
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
Model Number
HPV900-2025-2E1-01
HPV900-2031-2E1-01
HPV900-2041-2E1-01
HPV900-2052-2E1-01
HPV900-2075-2E1-01
HPV900-2088-2E1-01
HPV900-2098-2E1-01
HPV900-4008-2E1-01
HPV900-4012-2E1-01
HPV900-4016-2E1-01
HPV900-4021-2E1-01
HPV900-4027-2E1-01
HPV900-4034-2E1-01
HPV900-4041-2E1-01
HPV900-4052-2E1-01
HPV900-4065-2E1-01
HPV900-4072-2E1-01
HPV900-4096-2E1-01
40.3
50.3
73.8
85.1
94.7
2052
2075
2088
2098
30
2031
2041
24.6
11
kHz
2025
Drive
Model
Number
193
Table 41: 200V Series Drives Carrier Frequency Ratings
91.5
82.1
72.5
48.5
39.6
28.9
24.2
12
kHz
88.2
79.2
71.3
46.8
38.9
27.9
23.8
13
kHz
84.9
76.3
70
45.1
38.3
26.9
23.3
14
kHz
81.7
73.3
68.8
43.3
37.6
25.8
22.9
15
kHz
Continuous
Output Current
General Purpose Rating
78.4
70.4
67.5
41.6
36.9
24.8
22.5
16
kHz
102
91.9
79.7
54.3
43.5
32.4
26.5
11
kHz
98.8
88.7
78.3
52.4
42.8
31.2
26.1
12
kHz
95.3
85.5
77
50.5
42.1
30.1
25.6
13
kHz
91.7
82.4
75.6
48.7
41.3
29.0
25.2
14
kHz
88.2
79.2
74.3
46.8
40.6
27.9
24.8
15
kHz
Continuous
Output Current
Elevator Duty Cycle** Rating
84.7
76
72.9
44.9
39.8
26.8
24.3
16
kHz
237
213
184
126
101
74.9
61.5
11
kHz
229
205
181
121
99.1
72.3
60.4
12
kHz
221
198
178
117
97.4
69.8
59.4
13
kHz
212
191
175
113
95.7
67.2
58.3
14
kHz
204
183
172
108
94.0
64.6
57.3
15
kHz
Maximum Output Current
for 5 Sec
196
176
169
104
92.3
62
56.3
16
kHz
Appendix – Carrier Frequency Rating
Appendix
Carrier Frequency Ratings
The HPV900 Series 2 drives may be run with a high PWM switching Frequency. The default drive
ratings are based off of 10kHz setting. The drive will be derated according to the table below if the
setting for PWM Freq is greater than 10kHz.
33.4
40
50.3
63.9
70.2
92.8
4041
4052
4065
4072
4096
20.7
4021
4034
15.5
4016
26.1
11.8
4012
4027
7.9
11
kHz
4008
Drive
Model
Number
194
Table 42: Carrier Frequency Ratings
89.6
68.4
62.8
48.5
39
32.9
25.2
20.3
14.9
11.6
7.7
12
kHz
86.4
66.6
61.7
46.8
37.9
32.3
24.3
20
14.4
11.4
7.6
13
kHz
83.2
64.8
60.7
45.1
36.9
31.7
23.4
19.6
13.9
11.2
7.5
14
kHz
80
63
59.6
43.3
35.9
31.2
22.5
19.3
13.3
11
7.3
15
kHz
Continuous
Output Current
General Purpose Rating
76.8
61.2
58.5
41.6
34.9
30.6
21.6
18.9
12.8
10.8
7.2
16
kHz
100
75.8
69
54.3
43.2
36.1
28.2
22.3
16.7
12.7
8.5
11
kHz
96.8
73.9
67.9
52.4
42.1
35.5
27.2
21.9
16.1
12.5
8.4
12
kHz
93.3
71.9
66.7
50.5
41
34.9
26.2
21.6
15.6
12.3
8.2
13
kHz
90
70.0
65.5
48.7
39.9
34.3
25.3
21.2
15
12.1
8.1
14
kHz
86.4
68.0
64.4
46.8
38.8
33.7
24.3
20.8
14.4
11.9
7.9
15
kHz
Continuous
Output Current
Elevator Duty Cycle** Rating
82.9
66.1
63.2
44.9
37.6
33.1
23.3
20.4
13.8
11.7
7.8
16
kHz
232
118
160
126
99.9
86.6
65.3
51.6
38.7
29.5
19.7
11
kHz
224
171
157
121
97.4
82.2
63
50.8
37.3
29
19.3
12
kHz
216
167
154
117
94.8
80.8
60.8
49.9
36
28.5
19
13
kHz
208
162
152
113
92.3
79.3
58.5
49
34.7
28
18.7
14
kHz
200
158
149
108
89.7
77.9
56.3
48.1
33.3
27.5
18.3
15
kHz
Maximum Output Current
for 5 Sec
192
153
146
104
87.1
76.5
54
47.3
32
27
18
16
kHz
Appendix – Carrier Frequency Rating
Appendix
Carrier Frequency Ratings
The HPV900 Series 2 drives may be run with a high PWM switching Frequency. The default drive
ratings are based off of 10kHz setting. The drive will be derated according to the table below if the
setting for PWM Freq is greater than 10kHz.
Appendix – Power Dissipation
Appendix
Watts Loss
460V
HPV900-4008-2E1-01
HPV900-4012-2E1-01
HPV900-4016-2E1-01
HPV900-4021-2E1-01
HPV900-4027-2E1-01
HPV900-4034-2E1-01
HPV900-4041-2E1-01
HPV900-4052-2E1-01
HPV900-4065-2E1-01
HPV900-4072-2E1-01
HPV900-4096-2E1-01
Power loss
132 watts
275 watts
314 watts
360 watts
499 watts
606 watts
842 watts
1173 watts
1280 watts
1877 watts
2819 watts
230V
HPV900-2025-2E1-01
HPV900-2031-2E1-01
HPV900-2041-2E1-01
HPV900-2052-2E1-01
HPV900-2075-2E1-01
HPV900-2088-2E1-01
HPV900-2098-2E1-01
Power loss
229 watts
294 watts
378 watts
481 watts
759 watts
969 watts
989 watts
Note: values calculated from the worse case condition of 107% of general purpose continuous current rating, 10kHz carrier
frequency.
Table 43: Watts Loss per Drive Rating
195
Appendix – Relay Specifications
Appendix
Relay Specifications
RELAY 1 & 2
Contact Data
Load
Rated Load
Carry Current
Max. operating voltage
Max. operating current
Max. operating capacity
Operating Time
Figure 65: Operate Time
Resistive load
(p.f. = 1)
N.O. Contact
5A at 277VAC
10A at 125VAC
5A at 30VDC
10A
277VAC, 30VDC
10A
1,385VA, 150W
N.C. Contact
3A at 277VAC
3A at 30VDC
3A
3A
831VA, 90W
Coil Temperature Rise
Figure 66: Coil
Temperature
196
Life Expectancy
Figure 67: Relay Life
Expectancy
Appendix – Replacement Parts
Appendix
Replacement Parts
Part Number
Description
Detailed Description
HPV9-CTL0020-01
FRU,HPV900 Series 2,Ctl
PCB, Std Sfw
HPV9-ENDAT-01
FRU,HPV900 Series 2, EnDat Includes EnDat Option card and hardware
Option Card and hardware
HPV9-ENDAT-02
FRU,HPV900 Series 2, EnDat EnDat hardware only
Option Card hardware only
HPV9-TER0010
FRU,HPV900 Series 2,Control Terminal board, including terminal blocks
Terminal Board
HPV9-TER0010TB
FRU,HPV900 Series 2,Control Terminal blocks for terminal board
TBs
HPV9-OPERATOR
FRU, HPV900 Series 2
Operator, Elevator
HPV9-RS422CBL
FRU,HPV900 Series 2, Serial Includes DB9, RS422 connection to discrete wires
Cable, RS422
and instructions
HPV9-COVRTOP1
FRU,HPV900 Series 2, TOP,
FRAME 1
Includes the top front plastic cover for Frame 1
HPV9-COVRTOP2
FRU,HPV900 Series 2, TOP,
FRAME 2
Includes the top front plastic cover for Frame 2
HPV9-COVRTOP3
FRU,HPV900 Series 2, TOP,
FRAME 3
Includes the top front plastic cover for Frame 3
HPV9-COVRTOP4
FRU,HPV900 Series 2, TOP,
FRAME 4
Includes the top front metal cover for Frame 4
HPV9-COVRTOP5
FRU,HPV900 Series 2, TOP,
FRAME 5
Includes the top front metal cover for Frame 5
HPV9-COVRBOT1
FRU,HPV900 Series 2,
BOTTOM, FRAME 1
Includes the bottom front plastic cover for Frame 1
HPV9-COVRBOT2
FRU,HPV900 Series 2,
BOTTOM, FRAME 2
Includes the bottom front plastic cover for Frame 2
HPV9-COVRBOT3
FRU,HPV900 Series 2,
BOTTOM, FRAME 3
Includes the bottom front plastic cover for Frame 3
HPV9-COVRBOT4
FRU,HPV900 Series 2,
BOTTOM, FRAME 4
Includes the bottom front metal cover for Frame 4
HPV9-COVRBOT5
FRU,HPV900 Series 2,
BOTTOM, FRAME 5
Includes the bottom front metal cover for Frame 5
Includes the control PCB with standard software
Digital operator
Table 44: Replacement Parts
197
Index
Brk Open Flt ........................................................ 122
Brk Pick Flt .......................................................... 122
Brk Pick Flt Ena user switch .................................. 87
Brk Pick Flt logic output ......................................... 99
Bus Voltage analog output .................................. 102
A Ab Off Delay parameter, closed loop..................... 47
Ab Zero Spd Lev parameter, closed loop .............. 46
ABS Ref Offset parameter ..................................... 56
AC Input Fusing Values....................................... 182
AC Input Reactor Values ............................. 180, 181
Accel Jerk In parameter ........................................ 65
Accel Jerk Out parameter...................................... 65
Accel Rate parameter............................................ 65
Alarm logic output ................................................. 99
Alarm+Flt logic output ........................................... 99
Align Vlt Factor parameter ..................................... 71
Alignment Procedure ..................................... 145–50
Alignmnt is Done ................................................. 121
Ana Out Gain parameter ....................................... 54
Ana Out Offset parameter ..................................... 53
Analog Input Features ........................................... 14
Analog Input Wiring, Differential ............................ 31
Analog Output Connections .................................. 32
Analog Output Features ........................................ 15
Analog Outputs C4 Submenu .......................... 101–2
ARB Commissioning Procedure ............................ 61
ARB Deadband Parameter.................................... 56
ARB Decay Rate parameter .................................. 55
ARB Inertia parameter........................................... 55
ARB Select User Switch ........................................ 91
ARB Start Time parameter .................................... 55
ARB Torque Time.................................................. 55
AT Cont Flt .......................................................... 121
Auto Brake logic output ......................................... 99
Auto Stop user switch............................................ 85
Autoalign Volts parameter ..................................... 74
Automatic Fault Reset ........................................... 88
Autotune is Done ................................................. 121
Aux Torq Cmd analog output .............................. 102
Aux Torque Cmd display ..................................... 106
C Car Going Down logic output ................................ 99
Car Going Up logic output ..................................... 99
Carrier Frequency Ratings .......................... 192, 193
CE Line Filter Values .......................................... 183
Charge Fault logic output ...................................... 99
Charge Flt ........................................................... 122
Circuit Block Diagram ............................................ 32
Circuit Breakers................................................... 182
Close Contact logic output .................................... 99
Cont Confirm Src user switch ................................ 82
Cont Dwell Time parameter .................................. 56
Contactor DO Dly parameter ................................. 46
Contactor Flt ....................................................... 123
Contactor Flt logic output ...................................... 99
Contactor Flt Time parameter ............................... 46
Contract Car Speed parameter ............................. 44
Contract Mtr Spd parameter .................................. 44
Control Circuit ....................................................... 32
Cube ID Fault ...................................................... 123
Curr Reg Flt ........................................................ 123
Curr Reg Flt logic output ....................................... 99
Current Out analog output ................................... 102
D D Axis Induct parameter ........................................ 78
DB Fusing Values ............................................... 179
DB Protection user switch ..................................... 83
DB Voltage .......................................................... 124
DC Bus Voltage display ...................................... 107
DC Choke Connections ......................................... 32
DC Start Level parameter, open loop .................... 47
DC Start Time parameter, open loop .................... 48
DC Stop Freq parameter, open loop ..................... 47
DC Stop Level parameter, open loop .................... 47
DC Stop Time parameter, open loop..................... 48
DCP4 Setup and Calibration ............................... 163
DCU Data Flt ....................................................... 124
D-Curr Reference monitor function ..................... 107
Decel Jerk In parameter ........................................ 65
Decel Jerk Out parameter ..................................... 65
Decel Rate parameter ........................................... 65
Design Features .................................................... 15
Digital Input Features ............................................ 14
Digital Output Features ......................................... 14
Dimensions ......................................................... 171
Dir Confirm user switch ......................................... 90
Dir Conflict alarm................................................. 124
Dist LP Off Freq parameter, open loop ................. 72
Drive A1 Submenu .......................................... 41–63
Drive Dimensions ................................................ 171
Drive Info Submenu ............................................ 113
Drive Overload display ........................................ 108
Drive Ovrload Fault ............................................. 125
B Base Impedance display ..................................... 108
Basics U9 Submenu ............................................ 114
Brake Alarm logic output ....................................... 99
Brake Drop Delay parameter, open loop ............... 47
Brake Fault .......................................................... 121
Brake Hold logic output ......................................... 99
Brake Hold Src user switch ................................... 87
Brake Hold Time parameter .................................. 47
Brake Pick Cnfm user switch ................................. 84
Brake Pick Delay parameter, open loop ................ 47
Brake Pick logic output .......................................... 99
Brake Pick Src user switch .................................... 83
Brake Pick Time parameter ................................... 46
Brake Resistor Connections .................................. 32
Braking Resistor Fusing Values .......................... 179
Braking Resistor Values .............................. 177, 178
Brk Flt Level parameter ......................................... 71
Brk Hold Flt ......................................................... 121
Brk Hold Flt Ena user switch ................................. 87
Brk Hold Flt logic output ........................................ 99
Brk IGBT Flt logic output ....................................... 99
198
Drive Specifications ......................................... 14–15
Drive Temp Alarm ............................................... 125
Drive Temp display.............................................. 108
Drive Weight ........................................................ 171
Drv Enable Src user switch ................................... 91
Drv Fast Disable user switch ................................. 86
Drv Overload analog output ................................ 102
Drv Overload logic output ...................................... 99
Dynamic Braking Resistor Values ............... 177, 178
Flux Voltage analog output ................................. 102
Flux Voltage display ............................................ 108
Flux Weakening .............................................. 57, 74
Flux Weakening Lev parameter ............................ 71
Flux Weakening Rate parameter........................... 71
Flux Wkn Factor parameter, closed loop ............... 45
Frequency Out analog output .............................. 102
Fuse Fault ........................................................... 128
Fuse Fault logic output ........................................ 100
Fusing Values ............................................. 179, 182
E G Elevator Duty Cycle Current Rating .................... 167
Elevator System Load Profile .............................. 167
Enc Position display parameter ........................... 106
Enc Revolutions display parameter ..................... 106
Encdr CRC Err .................................................... 126
Encdr Flt Sense parameter ................................... 56
Encod Out of Tol ................................................. 126
Encoder ........................................................... 28–29
Encoder Ang Ofst parameter ................................. 79
Encoder Connect user switch ................................ 82
Encoder Connection Wiring ................................... 29
Encoder Fault user switch ..................................... 82
Encoder Feedback ................................................ 15
Encoder Flt .......................................................... 127
Encoder Flt logic output......................................... 99
Encoder Pulses parameter .................................... 44
Encoder Speed display parameter ...................... 103
Encoder Voltage Selection .................................... 29
Encoder Wiring ...................................................... 28
EncoderFault OFF ............................................... 127
Environmental Features ........................................ 15
EST INERTIA display .......................................... 141
Est Inertia display parameter, closed loop........... 103
EST NO LOAD CURR display ............................. 140
EST RATED RPM display ................................... 141
Est Rated RPM display, closed loop ................... 107
Estimating System Inertia.................................... 141
Ext Fan En logic output ......................................... 99
Ext Torq Cmd Src user switch ............................... 87
Ext Torque Bias parameter, closed loop ............... 53
Ext Torque Mult parameter.................................... 53
Extern Reactance parameter ................................ 69
Extrn Fault ................................................... 127, 128
Gain Chng Level parameter, closed loop ........ 45, 58
Gain Reduce Mult parameter, closed loop ............ 45
Ground Fault ....................................................... 128
Ground Fault logic output .................................... 100
H Harmonics, Reducing .................................. 180, 181
Hex Monitor Submenu ........................................ 114
Hi/Lo Gain Src user switch .............................. 82, 92
Hidden Items Submenu ....................................... 111
Highest ................................................................ 108
Hit Torque Limit ................................................... 128
Hunt Prev Gain parameter, open loop................... 73
Hunt Prev Time parameter, open loop .................. 73
I I Reg Cross Freq parameter, open loop ................ 72
Id Dist Loop Fc parameter, open loop ................... 71
Id Dist Loop Gn parameter, open loop .................. 71
Id Integral Gain parameter .................................... 70
Id Ref Threshold parameter .................................. 70
Id Reg Diff Gain parameter ................................... 69
Id Reg Prop Gain parameter ................................. 69
ILimit Integ Gain parameter, open loop ................. 72
In Low Gain logic output ...................................... 100
Inertia parameter, closed loop ....................... 44, 141
Inertia, Estimating System .................................. 141
Inner Loop Xover parameter, closed loop ............. 52
Input Fusing Values ............................................ 182
Input L-L Volts parameter ...................................... 69
Input Power ........................................................... 14
Input Power Connections ...................................... 32
Input Ratings ....................................................... 190
Input Reactor Values................................... 180, 181
Interconnections .............................................. 24–34
Introduction ..................................................... 14–15
Iq Dist Loop Fc parameter, open loop ................... 72
Iq Dist Loop Gn parameter, open loop .................. 71
Iq Integral Gain parameter .................................... 70
Iq Reg Diff Gain parameter ................................... 70
Iq Reg Prop Gain parameter ................................. 70
I-Reg Inner Loop user switch ................................ 82
F Fan Alarm logic output .......................................... 99
Fan Off Delay parameter ....................................... 74
Fast Flux user switch....................................... 82, 92
Fault logic output ................................................... 99
Fault Reset ............................................................ 88
Faults, Troubleshooting Guide .................... 120, 121
Fine Tune Ofst parameter ..................................... 70
Flt Reset Delay parameter .................................... 46
Flt Resets / Hour parameter .................................. 46
Flux Confirm logic output....................................... 99
Flux Current analog output .................................. 102
Flux Current display ............................................ 108
Flux Output display, closed loop ......................... 107
Flux Reference display, closed loop .................... 107
Flux Sat Break parameter, closed loop ................. 77
Flux Sat Slope parameter, closed loop.................. 77
L LED, Status ......................................................... 120
Line Filter Values ................................................ 183
Logic Input Connections ........................................ 25
Logic Inputs C2 Submenu ............................... 97–98
199
Over Curr Flt logic output .................................... 100
Overcurr Flt ......................................................... 131
Overspd Test Src user switch ............................... 88
Overspeed Flt...................................................... 131
Overspeed Flt logic output .................................. 100
Overspeed Level parameter .................................. 48
Overspeed Mult parameter ................................... 48
Overspeed Test Submenu .................................. 112
Overspeed Time parameter .................................. 48
Overtemp Flt ....................................................... 132
Overtemp Flt logic output .................................... 100
Overvolt Flt .......................................................... 132
Overvolt Flt logic output ...................................... 100
Ovld Start Level parameter ............................. 78, 79
Ovld Time Out parameter ................................ 78, 79
Ovrtemp Alarm logic output ................................. 100
Logic Inputs display ............................................. 103
Logic Output Connections ..................................... 27
Logic Outputs C3 Submenu .......................... 99–101
Logic Outputs display .......................................... 103
Long Encoder Cable ......................................... 166
M Mains Dip Enable user switch ............................... 90
Mains Dip Speed parameter .................................. 55
Maintenance, General ......................................... 118
Mlt-Spd to Dly user switch ..................................... 90
Model Number ....................................................... 15
Motor A5 Submenu ......................................... 74–80
Motor Calculations............................................... 144
Motor Current % display ...................................... 107
Motor Current display .......................................... 107
Motor Frequency display ..................................... 107
Motor Iron Loss parameter ............................ 78, 142
Motor Lead Connections ....................................... 32
Motor Manufacturer Data .................................... 142
Motor Mech Loss parameter ................................. 78
Motor Mech Lossparameter ................................ 142
Motor Mid Freq parameter, open loop ................... 78
Motor Mid Volts parameter, open loop .................. 77
Motor Min Freq parameter, open loop ................... 77
Motor Min Volts parameter, open loop .................. 77
Motor Overload display ................................. 79, 108
Motor Ovrld Sel user switch .................................. 84
Motor Ovrload ..................................................... 129
Motor Parameter Calculation ............................... 142
Motor Poles parameter .......................................... 76
Motor Rotation user switch .................................... 81
Motor Torque display........................................... 107
Motor Trq Lim logic output ................................... 100
Motor Voltage display .......................................... 107
Mounting Holes ................................................... 171
Mspd Delay parameter .................................... 55, 63
Mspd Tmr Flt ....................................................... 129
Mtr Overload ................................. See Motor Ovrload
Mtr Overload analog output ................................. 102
Mtr Overload logic output .................................... 100
Mtr Torque Limit parameter ................................... 44
Multistep A3 Submenu .................................... 66–68
Multi-Step Command Delays ................................. 96
Multi-Step Speed Command Debounce ................ 66
Multi-Step Speed Command Selection.................. 66
P Parameters ................................................... 34–116
PASSWORD sub-menu ...................................... 111
Performance Features .......................................... 14
Phase Fault logic output ...................................... 100
Phase Flt ............................................................. 132
PM Alignment Procedure .............................. 145–50
PM Encoder Cable Length .................................. 145
PM machine - Incremental Encoder .................... 146
Power Convert A4 Submenu ........................... 69–74
Power Output analog output ............................... 102
Power Output display .......................................... 107
Pre Torque Time parameter .................................. 53
PreTorque Bias parameter .................................... 53
PreTorque Latch user switch ................................ 89
PreTorque Mult parameter .................................... 53
Pretorque Ref analog output ............................... 102
Pre-Torque Ref display ....................................... 106
PreTorque Source user switch .............................. 89
Priority Msg user switch ........................................ 91
Protective Features ............................................... 15
PTorq Latch Clck user switch ................................ 90
PWM Frequency parameter .................................. 69
Q Q Axis Induct parameter ....................................... 78
Quick Stop ............................................................ 98
R N Ramp Down En Src user switch ............................ 83
Ramp Down Ena logic output .............................. 100
Ramped Stop Sel user switch ......................... 82, 93
Ramped Stop Time parameter ........................ 45, 59
Rated Excit Freq display ..................................... 108
Rated Excit Freq parameter .................................. 76
Rated Motor Curr parameter ................................. 76
Rated Mtr Power parameter .................................. 76
Rated Mtr Speed parameter .................................. 76
Rated Mtr Volts parameter .................................... 76
Ratings, Drive........................................................ 14
Reactor Values............................................ 180, 181
Ready to Run logic output ................................... 100
Real Time Clock Setup ......................................... 17
Reforming Bus Capacitors .................................. 118
No Load Curr % parameter ........................... 76, 142
Not Alarm logic output ......................................... 100
Notch Filt Depth parameter ................................... 51
Notch Filter Description ......................................... 60
Notch Filter Frq parameter .................................... 51
O OLA ENDT FLT ................................................... 130
OLA INC FLT ...................................................... 131
Open Loop Performance Adjustments .......... 155–62
Open Loop Start-Up Procedure ..................... 153–54
Output Power ........................................................ 14
Output Ratings .................................................... 190
200
Regen Torq Limit parameter ................................. 45
Regen Trq Lim logic output ................................. 100
Relay Output Connections .................................... 27
Remote Keypad .................................................... 15
Replacement Parts .............................................. 196
Response parameter, closed loop ......................... 44
Restore Defaults Submenu ................................. 113
Reverse Tach ...................................................... 132
Rotor Align Submenu .................................. 114, 115
Rotor Leakage X parameter .......................... 77, 142
Rotor Position monitor function ........................... 108
RTR NOT ALIGN................................................. 132
Run Command Src user switch ............................. 81
Run Commanded logic output ............................. 100
Run Confirm logic output ..................................... 100
Run Delay Timer parameter .................................. 52
Rx Com Status display ........................................ 105
Rx Error Count .................................................... 106
RX Logic Input display......................................... 104
Speed Feedbk analog output .............................. 102
Speed Ref analog output .................................... 102
Speed Ref Rls logic output .................................. 100
Speed Reference display .................................... 103
Speed Reg Rls logic output ................................. 101
Speed Reg Type user switch .......................... 86, 95
Srl Timeout Fault ................................................. 136
Stall Fault Time parameter, open loop .................. 48
Stall Prev Ena user switch, open loop ................... 85
Stall Test Ena user switch, open loop ................... 85
Stall Test Flt ........................................................ 136
Stall Test Level parameter, open loop................... 48
Standards .............................................................. 15
Start Logic display ............................................... 104
Start-Up Procedure ......................................... 15–17
Stator Leakage X parameter ......................... 77, 142
Stator Resist parameter ................................ 78, 142
Status LEDs ........................................................ 120
Stopping Mode user switch ................................... 84
Switching Delay parameter, open loop .................. 73
S T S-Curve Abort user switch..................................... 83
S-Curves A2 Submenu.................................... 64–65
Selecting Logic Input Definitions ........................... 97
Ser2 Flt Mode user switch ..................................... 86
Ser2 Flt Tol parameter .......................................... 54
Ser2 Insp Spd parameter ...................................... 54
Ser2 Rs Crp Spd parameter .................................. 54
Ser2 Rs Cpr Time parameter ................................ 54
Ser2 Spd Flt ........................................................ 132
Serial Cnt / Rev parameter .................................... 44
Serial Connections ................................................ 28
Serial Mode user switch ........................................ 85
Setup Flt ...................................................... 132, 133
Short Circuit Flt ................................................... 134
Slip Comp Gain parameter, open loop .................. 49
Slip Comp Time parameter, open loop .................. 49
Slip Frequency analog output .............................. 102
Slip Frequency display ........................................ 108
Spare Parts ......................................................... 196
Spd Command Bias parameter ............................. 52
Spd Command Mult parameter ............................. 53
Spd Command Src user switch ............................. 81
SPD DEV ............................................................ 135
Spd Dev Alm Lvl parameter .................................. 50
Spd Dev Flt Lvl parameter ..................................... 51
Spd Dev Hi Lvl parameter ..................................... 45
Spd Dev Lo Level parameter ................................. 50
Spd Dev Time parameter ...................................... 50
Spd Phase Margin parameter ............................... 52
Spd Ref Release user switch ................................ 83
Spd Reg Torq Cmd display ................................. 106
Spd Rg Tq Cmd analog output ............................ 102
Speed Command analog output .......................... 102
Speed Command display .................................... 103
Speed Dev logic output ....................................... 100
Speed Dev Low logic output................................ 100
Speed Deviation Alarm.......................................... 59
Speed Deviation Low ............................................ 59
Speed Error analog output .................................. 102
Speed Error display ............................................. 103
Speed Feedback display ..................................... 103
Speed FeedbackTracking ..................................... 59
Tach Rate Cmd analog output ............................ 102
Tach Rate Cmd display ....................................... 106
Tach Rate Gain parameter .................................... 52
Torq Boost Gain parameter, open loop ................. 50
Torq Boost Time parameter, open loop................. 50
Torq Current analog output ................................. 102
Torq Voltage analog output ................................. 102
Torque Current display........................................ 108
Torque Output analog output .............................. 102
Torque Ref analog output ................................... 102
Torque Reference display ................................... 107
Torque Voltage display ....................................... 108
TQ LIM 2HI 4CUBE............................................ 136
Troubleshooting Guide ........................................ 120
Trq Const Scale parameter ................................... 79
Trq Lim Msg Dly parameter ................................... 45
U Undervolt Flt ........................................................ 137
Undervolt Flt logic output .................................... 101
Units U0 Submenu .............................................. 111
Up to Spd Level parameter ................................... 51
Up to Speed logic output ..................................... 101
Up/Dwn Threshold parameter ............................... 51
USB Connection.................................................... 28
User Switches C1 Submenu ........................... 81–96
UV Alarm ............................................................. 137
UV Alarm Level parameter .................................... 69
UV Alarm logic output ......................................... 101
UV Fault Level parameter ..................................... 69
V V/Hz Fault ........................................................... 137
Vc Correction parameter, open loop ..................... 73
Voltage Out analog output .................................. 102
W Weight ................................................................. 171
201
Zero Speed logic output ...................................... 101
Zero Speed Time parameter ................................. 51
Z Zero Speed Level parameter ................................. 51
202
HPV 900 Series 2
Data subject to change without notice. HPV 900 S2 and Series 2 is a trademark of Magnetek, Inc.
Magnetek Elevator Products
N50 W13775 Overview Dr
Menomonee Falls, Wisconsin 53051
(800) 236-1705, (262) 252-6999, FAX (262) 790-4142
http://www.elevatordrives.com
TM7333  2012 Magnetek, Inc. 7/12 rev 08
Magnetek Elevator Products - Europe
20 Drake Mews, Crownhill
Milton Keynes, Bucks MK8 0ER UK
+44(0) 1908 261427, FAX +44(0) 1908 261674
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement